AS Series Module Manual

Industrial Automation Headquarters

Delta Electronics, Inc.
Taoyuan Technology Center
No.18, Xinglong Rd., Taoyuan City,
Taoyuan County 33068, Taiwan
TEL: 886-3-362-6301 / FAX: 886-3-371-6301

Asia
Delta Electronics (Jiangsu) Ltd.
Wujiang Plant 3
1688 Jiangxing East Road,
Wujiang Economic Development Zone
Wujiang City, Jiang Su Province, P.R.C. 215200
TEL: 86-512-6340-3008 / FAX: 86-769-6340-7290

Delta Greentech (China) Co., Ltd.

238 Min-Xia Road, Pudong District,
ShangHai, P.R.C. 201209
TEL: 86-21-58635678 / FAX: 86-21-58630003

Delta Electronics (Japan), Inc.

Tokyo Office
2-1-14 Minato-ku Shibadaimon,
Tokyo 105-0012, Japan
TEL: 81-3-5733-1111 / FAX: 81-3-5733-1211

Delta Electronics (Korea), Inc.

1511, Byucksan Digital Valley 6-cha, Gasan-dong,

AS Series Module Manual

Geumcheon-gu, Seoul, Korea, 153-704
TEL: 82-2-515-5303 / FAX: 82-2-515-5302

Delta Electronics Int’l (S) Pte Ltd.

4 Kaki Bukit Ave 1, #05-05, Singapore 417939
TEL: 65-6747-5155 / FAX: 65-6744-9228

Delta Electronics (India) Pvt. Ltd.

Plot No 43 Sector 35, HSIIDC
Gurgaon, PIN 122001, Haryana, India
TEL : 91-124-4874900 / FAX : 91-124-4874945

Americas
Delta Products Corporation (USA)
Raleigh Office
P.O. Box 12173,5101 Davis Drive,
Research Triangle Park, NC 27709, U.S.A.
TEL: 1-919-767-3800 / FAX: 1-919-767-8080

Delta Greentech (Brasil) S.A.

Sao Paulo Office
Rua Itapeva, 26 - 3° andar Edificio Itapeva One-Bela Vista
01332-000-São Paulo-SP-Brazil
TEL: 55 11 3568-3855 / FAX: 55 11 3568-3865

Europe
Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V.
Eindhoven Office
De Witbogt 20, 5652 AG Eindhoven, The Netherlands
TEL : +31 (0)40-8003800 / FAX : +31 (0)40-8003898

AS-0249820-07

*We reserve the right to change the information in this manual without prior notice.
2019/11/28 www.deltaww.com
 AS Series Module Manual
Revision History
Ve r s i o n Revision Date
1st The first version was published. 2 0 1 6 / 11 / 3 0
1. Chapter 1: Added information concerning new models
AS08AD-B and AS08AD-C.
2. Chapter 2: Added information concerning new models
AS08AD-B andAS08AD-C.
3. Chapter 3: Updated information concerning CR#23-24
and software new screenshots.
4. Chapter 4: Updated information concerning CR#35-
2nd 54/CR#210-225 and software new screenshots. 2017/07/07
5. Chapter 5: Updated information concerning CR#1-
4/CR#210-217 and software new screenshots.
6. Chapter 6: Updated information concerning CR#210-
217 and software new screenshots.
7. Chapter 7: Updated information concerning theoretical
calibration and software new screenshots
8. Chapter 8: Updated information concerning new FW2.0.
1. Chapter 1: Added information concerning new models
A S 0 6 RT D - A a n d A S 0 8 T C - A a n d i n s t a l l a t i o n i n f o r m a t i o n
updated in section 1.3.1.
3rd 2. Chapter 5: Added information concerning new model 2018/02/09
A S 0 6 RT D - A .
3. Chapter 6: Added information concerning new models
AS08TC-A.
1. Chapter 1: Added information concerning ambient air
temperature-barometric pressure-altitude.
2. Chapter 2: Added information concerning filter average,
cable length and resistance. Updated section 2.2.4
CR#23-38 and section 2.2.5 CR#43-74.
3. Chapter 3: Added information concerning cable length
and resistance. Updated section 3.2.1 analog to digital
conversion range, output impedance and section 3.2.4
CR17-20 and CR#21-36.
4. Chapter 4: Added information concerning filter average,
cable length and resistance. Updated section 4.2.1
analog to digital conversion range, output impedance
4th and 4.2.4 CR#31-21. 2 0 1 8 / 11 / 2 6
5. Chapter 5: Updated section 5.2.1 JPt100 range, section
5.2.4-5.2.5 added notes on CR, updated section 5.2.6
PID information, revised section 5.2.7 control mode.
6. Chapter 6: Section 6.2.1 revised type B range, added a
note, section 6.2.4-6.2.5 added notes on CR, revised
CR# for the records, updated section 6.2.6 PID
information and revised section 6.2.7 control mode.
7. Chapter 7: Section 7.2.4 added notes on CR.
8. Chapter 8: New functions in new FW2.02.
9. Chapter 9: Updated section 9.2.5 output impedance
information and added sections 9.2.7.1-9.2.7.9 for new
functions added and operational examples.
1. Chapter 7: Revised contents of CR#0 and #59 in
5th section 7.2.4. 2019/1/29
2. Chapter 8: Deleted a note in section 8.6.4.
6th 1. Chapter 5: Updated wiring information in section 5.2.8. 2019/5/10
Ve r s i o n Revision Date
1. Chapter 1: Added model information including AS02PU-
A, AS04PU-A, AS02HC-A, AS04SIL-A and AS-FPFN02
2. Chapter 2: Updated section 2.2.1 specification, 2.2.4
and 2.2.5 CR table, and 2.4 adding a new error code.
3. Chapter 3: Updated section 3.2.4 CR table and 3.4
adding a new error code.
4. Chapter 4: Updated section 4.2 specification, 4.2.4 CR
table and 4.4 adding a new error code.
5. Chapter 5: Updated section 5.2 specification, 5.2.4 and
5.2.5 CR table, and 5.4 adding a new error code.
6. Chapter 6: Updated section 6.2.4 and 6.2.5 CR table.
7th 2019/11/28
Added DMPID instruction supporting firmware versions
and section 6.4 adding a new error code.
7. Chapter 7: Updated section 7.2.4 and 7.2.5 CR table
and 7.5 adding a new error code.
8. Chapter 8: Added a new error code in section 8.7.2.2.
9. Chapter 9: Updated AS-F2AD specifications in sections
9 . 2 . 4 a n d 9 . 2 . 5 . D e l e t e d S M 111 0 a n d S R 1 5 4 0 i n
section 9.2.7. Added AS-FPFN02 information in
sections 9.2.8 and 9.3.5.
1 0 . C h a p t e r 11 : N e w c h a p t e r i n t r o d u c i n g p o s i t i o n i n g
modules AS02PU-A and AS04PU-A.
 AS Series Module Manual
Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Introduction

1.1 Overview ........................................................................................... 1-2

1.2 Specifications .................................................................................... 1-4

1.2.1 General Specifications .................................................................... 1-4
1.2.2 EMS Standards ............................................................................. 1-6
1.2.2.1 EMI ......................................................................................... 1-6
1.2.2.2 EMS ........................................................................................ 1-6
1.2.2.3 Conducted Immunity Test .......................................................... 1-7

1.3 Installation ........................................................................................ 1-8

1.3.1 Installing a Module ........................................................................ 1-8
1.3.2 Installing a Removable Terminal Block .............................................. 1-8
1.3.3 Changing a Module ...................................................................... 1-10
1.3.4 Installing and Removing an Extension Card ..................................... 1-11
1.3.5 Installing a Wiring Module ............................................................ 1-12

Chapter 2 Analog Input Module AS04/08AD

2.1 Overview ........................................................................................... 2-2

2.1.1 Characteristics .............................................................................. 2-2

2.2 Specifications and Functions ............................................................. 2-2

2.2.1 Specifications ............................................................................... 2-3
2.2.2 Profile ......................................................................................... 2-4
2.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals .............................................................. 2-6
2.2.4 Control Registers .......................................................................... 2-6
2.2.5 Functions ................................................................................... 2-11
2.2.6 Wiring ....................................................................................... 2-20
2.2.7 LED Indicators ............................................................................ 2-24

2.3 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft...................................................................... 2-24

2.3.1 Initial Setting ............................................................................. 2-24
2.3.2 Checking the Version of a Module .................................................. 2-27
2.3.3 Online Mode ............................................................................... 2-28
2.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File ............................................. 2-29
2.3.5 Parameters ................................................................................ 2-30

2.4 Troubleshooting .............................................................................. 2-34

2.4.1 Error Codes ................................................................................ 2-34
2.4.2 Troubleshooting Procedure............................................................ 2-35

i
Chapter 3 Analog Output Module AS04DA

3.1 Overview ........................................................................................... 3-2

3.1.1 Characteristics ............................................................................. 3-2

3.2 Specifications and Functions ............................................................. 3-3

3.2.1 Specifications ............................................................................... 3-3
3.2.2 Profile ......................................................................................... 3-5
3.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals .............................................................. 3-6
3.2.4 Control Registers .......................................................................... 3-6
3.2.5 Functions..................................................................................... 3-8
3.2.6 Wiring ....................................................................................... 3-12
3.2.7 LED Indicators............................................................................ 3-13

3.3 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft ..................................................................... 3-14

3.3.1 Initial Setting ............................................................................. 3-14
3.3.2 Checking the Version of a Module .................................................. 3-17
3.3.3 Online Mode ............................................................................... 3-18
3.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File ............................................ 3-19
3.3.5 Parameters ................................................................................ 3-20

3.4 Troubleshooting .............................................................................. 3-23

3.4.1 Error Codes ............................................................................... 3-23
3.4.2 Troubleshooting Procedure ........................................................... 3-23

Chapter 4 Analog Input/Output Module AS06XA

4.1 Overview ........................................................................................... 4-2

4.1.1 Characteristics ............................................................................. 4-2

4.2 Specifications and Functions ............................................................. 4-3

4.2.1 Specifications ............................................................................... 4-3
4.2.2 Profile ......................................................................................... 4-6
4.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals .............................................................. 4-7
4.2.4 Control Registers .......................................................................... 4-8
4.2.5 Functions................................................................................... 4-13
4.2.6 Wiring ....................................................................................... 4-20
4.2.7 LED Indicators............................................................................ 4-22

4.3 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft ..................................................................... 4-23

4.3.1 Initial Setting ............................................................................. 4-23
4.3.2 Checking the Version of a Module .................................................. 4-26
4.3.3 Online Mode ............................................................................... 4-27
4.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File ............................................ 4-28
4.3.5 Parameters ................................................................................ 4-29

ii
4.4 Troubleshooting .............................................................................. 4-33
4.4.1 Error Codes ................................................................................ 4-33
4.4.2 Troubleshooting Procedure............................................................ 4-34

Chapter 5 Temperature Measurement Module AS04/06RTD

5.1 Overview ............................................................................................... 5-2

5.1.1 Characteristics .............................................................................. 5-2
5.1.2 Characteristics .............................................................................. 5-2

5.2 Specifications and Functions.................................................................. 5-3

5.2.1 Specifications ............................................................................... 5-3
5.2.2 Profile ......................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals .............................................................. 5-6
5.2.4 AS04RTD Control Registers............................................................. 5-7
5.2.5 AS06RTD Control Registers........................................................... 5-10
5.2.6 Functions ................................................................................... 5-15
5.2.7 Control Mode .............................................................................. 5-18
5.2.8 Wiring ....................................................................................... 5-18
5.2.9 LED Indicators ............................................................................ 5-21

5.3. HWCONFIG in ISPSoft......................................................................... 5-21

5.3.1 Initial Setting. ................................................................................. 5-21
5.3.2 Checking the Version of a Module ....................................................... 5-24
5.3.3 Online Mode .................................................................................... 5-25
5.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File.................................................. 5-26
5.3.5 Parameters ..................................................................................... 5-27

5.4 Troubleshooting................................................................................... 5-30

5.4.1 Error Codes ..................................................................................... 5-30
5.4.2 Troubleshooting Procedure ................................................................ 5-31
5.4.3 State of the Connection ................................................................... 5-32

Chapter 6 Temperature Measurement Module AS04/08TC

6.1 Overview ........................................................................................... 6-2

6.1.1 Characteristics .............................................................................. 6-3

6.2 Specifications and Functions ............................................................. 6-4

6.2.1 Specifications ............................................................................... 6-4
6.2.2 Profile ......................................................................................... 6-4
6.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals .............................................................. 6-6

iii
 6.2.4 AS04TC Control Registers .............................................................. 6-6
6.2.5 AS08TC Control Registers ............................................................ 6-10
6.2.6 Functions................................................................................... 6-16
6.2.7 Control Mode ............................................................................. 6-19
6.2.8 Wiring ....................................................................................... 6-38
6.2.9 LED Indicators............................................................................ 6-39

6.3 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft ..................................................................... 6-39

6.3.1 Initial Setting ............................................................................. 6-39
6.3.2 Checking the Version of a Module .................................................. 6-42
6.3.3 Online Mode ............................................................................... 6-43
6.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File ............................................ 6-44
6.3.5 Parameters ................................................................................ 6-45

6.4 Troubleshooting .............................................................................. 6-48

6.4.1 Error Codes ............................................................................... 6-48
6.4.2 Troubleshooting Procedure ........................................................... 6-49

Chapter 7 Load Cell Module AS02LC

7.1 Overview ........................................................................................... 7-2

7.2 Specifications .................................................................................... 7-2

7.2.1 Specifications ............................................................................... 7-2
7.2.2 Profile ......................................................................................... 7-3
7.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals .............................................................. 7-4
7.2.4 Control Registers .......................................................................... 7-5
7.2.5 Functions................................................................................... 7-12
7.2.6 Wiring ....................................................................................... 7-18

7.3 Making Adjustments ........................................................................ 7-20

7.3.1 Steps to adjust points ................................................................. 7-20
7.3.2 Adjustment settings / LC Wizard ................................................... 7-21
7.3.3 Adjustment settings / Instructional calibration ................................ 7-25
7.3.4 LED Indicators............................................................................ 7-28

7.4 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft ..................................................................... 7-28

7.4.1 Initial Setting ............................................................................. 7-28
7.4.2 Checking the Version of a Module .................................................. 7-31
7.4.3 Online Mode ............................................................................... 7-32
7.4.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File ............................................ 7-33

iv
 7.4.5 Parameters ................................................................................ 7-34

7.5 Troubleshooting .............................................................................. 7-36

7.5.1 Error Codes ................................................................................ 7-36
7.5.2 Troubleshooting Procedure ........................................................... 7-37

Chapter 8 Serial Communication Module AS00SCM

8.1 Introduction ...................................................................................... 8-3

8.2 Specification, Function and Wiring .................................................... 8-4

8.2.1 The functional specifications ................................................................ 8-4
8.2.2 Dimensions and Profile........................................................................ 8-5
8.2.3 Wiring .............................................................................................. 8-7
8.2.3.1 AS00SCM-A Power Wiring .............................................................. 8-7
8.2.3.2 AS00SCM-A Communication Interface ............................................. 8-8

8.3 COM mode ......................................................................................... 8-9

8.3.1 Modbus ............................................................................................ 8-9
8.3.2 UD Link .......................................................................................... 8-10
8.3.2.1 TX Packets and RX Packets .......................................................... 8-11
8.3.2.2 Command ................................................................................. 8-13
8.3.3 CANopen Mode ................................................................................ 8-14
8.3.3.1 Features ................................................................................... 8-14
8.3.3.2 Corresponding Input / Output Device Range .................................. 8-15

8.4 RTU Mode ........................................................................................ 8-16

8.4.1 CANopen Mode (AS-FCOPM) .............................................................. 8-16
8.4.1.1 AS Remote Communication Mode ................................................. 8-17
8.4.1.2 Delta Special Driver & AS Remote Mode ........................................ 8-18
8.4.1.3 CANopen DS301 Mode ................................................................ 8-19
8.4.2 EtherNet/IP Mode............................................................................. 8-20
8.4.2.1 Connecting to Delta PLC Scanner through EIP Builder ...................... 8-20
8.4.2.2 Connecting to 3rd Party PLC Scanner through EIP Builder ................ 8-23
8.4.3 Remote Module Setting ................................................................ 8-27

8.5 Normal Exchange Area .................................................................... 8-29

8.6 Application ...................................................................................... 8-31

8.6.1 Modbus .......................................................................................... 8-31
8.6.1.1 Modbus Slave─Connection to Delta Products .................................. 8-31
8.6.1.2 Modbus Master─Connection to Delta Products ................................ 8-34
8.6.2 UD Link .......................................................................................... 8-40

v
 8.6.3 Remote IO Application (AS-FCOPM) .................................................... 8-55
8.6.4 Remote IO Application (AS-FEN02)..................................................... 8-63
8.6.5 Remote IO Application (Multiple AS-FEN02) ......................................... 8-65

8.7 Error Codes...................................................................................... 8-67

8.7.1 Troubleshooting for Module AS00SCM-A as a Communication Module ...... 8-68
8.7.1.1 ERROR LED Indicators are ON ..................................................... 8-68
8.7.1.2 ERROR LED Indicators Blinking Every 0.5 Seconds .......................... 8-68
8.7.2 Troubleshooting for Module AS00SCM-A as a Remote Module .............. 8-69
8.7.2.1 ERROR LED Indicators Are ON ..................................................... 8-69
8.7.2.2 ERROR LED Indicators Blinking Every 0.5 Seconds .......................... 8-69
8.7.2.3 ERROR LED Indicators Blinking Every 0.2 Seconds .......................... 8-70

Chapter 9 Function Cards

9.1 Introduction ...................................................................................... 9-3

9.2 Specification and Function................................................................. 9-3

9.2.1 AS-F232 ...................................................................................... 9-3
9.2.2 AS-F422 ...................................................................................... 9-3
9.2.3 AS-F485 ...................................................................................... 9-3
9.2.4 AS-F2AD ..................................................................................... 9-4
9.2.5 AS-F2DA ..................................................................................... 9-5
9.2.6 AS-FCOPM ................................................................................... 9-5
9.2.7 AS-FEN02 .................................................................................... 9-6
9.2.7.1 Supported Software and Firmware Versions ..................................... 9-6
9.2.7.2 Features ..................................................................................... 9-6
9.2.7.3 Specifications .............................................................................. 9-6
9.2.7.4 Topology .................................................................................... 9-8
9.2.7.5 SM/SR ....................................................................................... 9-9
9.2.7.6 Data Mapping through EtherNet/IP Adapter ................................... 9-11
9.2.7.7 Example of Connecting to 3rd Party PLC Scanner through EIP Builder 9-13
9.2.7.8 Data Mapping through Modbus TCP .............................................. 9-17
9.2.7.9 Webpage .................................................................................. 9-19
9.2.8 AS-FPFN02 ................................................................................ 9-23
9.2.8.1 Supported Firmware Versions ...................................................... 9-23
9.2.8.2 Features ................................................................................... 9-23
9.2.8.3 Specifications ............................................................................ 9-23
9.2.8.4 LED Indicators........................................................................... 9-24
9.2.8.5 Configuring the Data Length for I/O ............................................. 9-25
9.2.8.6 Status Register .......................................................................... 9-26
9.2.8.7 Topology .................................................................................. 9-28
9.2.8.8 PROFINET Device Example (Adapter) ............................................ 9-28

vi
9.3 Profiles and Dimensions .................................................................. 9-41
9.3.1 AS-F232 .................................................................................... 9-41
9.3.2 AS-F422/AS-F485/AS-F2AD/AS-F2DA ............................................ 9-41
9.3.3 AS-FCOPM ................................................................................. 9-41
9.3.4 AS-FEN02 .................................................................................. 9-42
9.3.5 AS-FPFN02 ................................................................................. 9-43

9.4 Wiring .............................................................................................. 9-44

9.4.1 AS-F2AD .................................................................................... 9-44
9.4.2 AS-F2DA .................................................................................... 9-45

9.5 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft...................................................................... 9-45

9.5.1 Initial Setting ............................................................................. 9-45

Chapter 10 DeviceNet Master Scanner Module AS01DNET-A

10.1 Introduction of AS01DNET-A ........................................................... 10-3

10.1.1 Feature ...................................................................................... 10-3
10.1.2 Specifications ............................................................................. 10-3

10.2 Components of AS01DNET-A............................................................ 10-4

10.2.1 Profile and Dimensions................................................................. 10-4
10.2.2 Components ............................................................................... 10-5
10.2.3 Mode Toggle（RTU- Master/Slave） ................................................ 10-5
10.2.4 DeviceNet Connector ................................................................... 10-5
10.2.5 Address Switch ........................................................................... 10-6
10.2.6 Function Switch .......................................................................... 10-6
10.2.7 Digital Displayer.......................................................................... 10-6

10.3 DeviceNet Network Communication................................................. 10-7

10.3.1 Relationship between Transmission Distance and Baud Rate .............. 10-7
10.3.2 DeivceNet Network Topology Structure ........................................... 10-7
10.3.3 Choice and Purpose of a DeviceNet Terminal Resistor ..................... 10-11
10.3.4 DeviceNet Network Supply Power ................................................ 10-12

10.4 Master /Slave Mode ....................................................................... 10-13

10.4.1 Introduction of Master/Slave Mode .............................................. 10-13
10.4.1.1Scan List, Input Table and Output Table ...................................... 10-13
10.4.2 Installation ............................................................................... 10-14
10.4.2.1Connecting AS01DNET-A Module to AS series PLC ........................ 10-14
10.4.2.2Connecting the DeviceNet Communication Connector ................... 10-14
10.4.3 IO Mapping for AS01DNET in AS PLC ............................................ 10-15
10.4.3.1Data Mapping between Modules and AS PLC ................................ 10-15
10.4.3.2Tables of Input Mapping and Output Mapping areas ...................... 10-16
10.4.4 Bit-strobe Command.................................................................. 10-17

vii
 10.4.4.1Bit-strobe Work Principle ........................................................... 10-17
10.4.5 Network Node Status Display....................................................... 10-18
10.4.5.1Scan-List Node Status Indication ................................................ 10-18
10.4.5.2Module Status Indication ........................................................... 10-18
10.4.6 Setting the Time for Data Exchange between Master and Slaves ....... 10-18
10.4.7 Application Example Network Node Status Indication ...................... 10-19
10.4.7.1.Constructing One DeviceNet Network ......................................... 10-20
10.4.7.2.Using DeviceNet Builder to Configure a DeviceNet Network ........... 10-21
10.4.7.3.DeviceNet Network Control ....................................................... 10-28
10.4.8 Sending Explicit Message through Ladder Diagram ......................... 10-29
10.4.8.1.Principle of Explicit Message Transmission................................... 10-29
10.4.8.2.Explicit Message Transmission Instruction DNETRW ...................... 10-30
10.4.9 LED Indicators and Troubleshooting .............................................. 10-36
10.4.9.1.NS LED .................................................................................. 10-36
10.4.9.2.MS LED ................................................................................. 10-37
10.4.9.3.Combination of MS LED and NS LED .......................................... 10-37
10.4.9.4.Digital Displayer ..................................................................... 10-37
10.4.10 Master-Slave Mode Switch and 8 Baud Rates Setting via Software ...... 10-39
10.4.10.1.Setting AS01DNET-A to Slave Mode ......................................... 10-39
10.4.10.2.Setting AS01DNET-A to Master Mode........................................ 10-42
10.4.10.3.Baud Rate Setting of When AS01DNET-A is in Slave Mode ........... 10-45
10.4.10.4.Baud Rate Setting of When AS01DNET-A is in Master Mode ......... 10-48

10.5 RTU Mode ...................................................................................... 10-51

10.5.1 Introduction of AS01DNET (in RTU Mode) .................................... 10-51
10.5.2 AS-Series Extension Modules Connectable to AS01DNET (RTU) ......... 10-52
10.5.3 Installation ............................................................................... 10-53
10.5.3.1.Installing AS01DNET (in RTU Mode) ........................................... 10-53
10.5.3.2.Connecting the Cable to DeviceNet Connector ............................. 10-54
10.5.4 Configuring AS01DNET (in RTU mode) .......................................... 10-55
10.5.4.1.Terms.................................................................................... 10-55
10.5.4.2.Introduction of Software .......................................................... 10-56
10.5.4.3.DeviceNet Mapping Data .......................................................... 10-74
10.5.4.4.Connecting AS01DNET (RTU) to the Network .............................. 10-81
10.5.5 Application Example ................................................................... 10-82
10.5.5.1.Network Structure................................................................... 10-82
10.5.5.2.Using DeviceNet Builder to Configure the Network ....................... 10-82
10.5.5.3.Using LD Program to Control the Entire Network .......................... 10-91
10.5.6 Error Diagnosis and Trouble Shooting ........................................... 10-91
10.5.6.1.Indicator Diagnosis ................................................................. 10-92
10.5.6.2.Codes in Seven-Segment Displayer ........................................... 10-93
10.5.6.3.Status Word Diagnosis ............................................................. 10-95
10.5.6.4.Software Diagnosis ................................................................. 10-96

viii
10.6 How to Call DeviceNet Builder through ISPSoft (AS-Series PLC) ... 10-97

Chapter 11 Positioning Modules AS02/04PU

11.1 Overview ......................................................................................... 11-2

11.1.1. Characteristics ............................................................................ 11-2

11.2 Specifications and Functions ........................................................... 11-3

11.2.1. Specifications ............................................................................. 11-3
11.2.2. Profile ....................................................................................... 11-5
11.2.3. Arrangement of Terminals ............................................................ 11-6
11.2.4. Special Designed Instrucitons ....................................................... 11-8
11.2.5. Wiring ....................................................................................... 11-9

11.3 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft.................................................................... 11-12

11.3.1. Initial Setting ........................................................................... 11-12
11.3.2. Checking the Version of a Module ................................................ 11-15
11.3.3. Online Mode ............................................................................. 11-16
11.3.4. Importing/Exporting a Parameter File ........................................... 11-17
11.3.5. Parameters .............................................................................. 11-18
11.3.6. Normal Exchange Area ............................................................... 11-20

11.4 Troubleshooting ............................................................................ 11-21

11.4.1. Error Codes .............................................................................. 11-21
11.4.2. Troubleshooting Procedure.......................................................... 11-21
11.4.3. State Codes (Axis 1 - 4) ............................................................. 11-21

ix
 1
Chapter 1 Introduction

Table of Contents
1.1 Overview ...........................................................................1-2
1.2 Specifications .....................................................................1-5
1.2.1 General Specifications .................................................................... 1-5
1.2.2 EMS Standards .............................................................................. 1-6
1.2.2.1 EMI .......................................................................................... 1-6
1.2.2.2 EMS ......................................................................................... 1-6
1.2.2.3 Conducted Immunity Test ........................................................... 1-7

1.3 Installation ........................................................................1-8

1.3.1 Installing a Module ......................................................................... 1-8
1.3.2 Installing a Removable Terminal Block .............................................. 1-8
1.3.3 Changing a Module....................................................................... 1-10
1.3.4 Installing and Removing an Extension Card ..................................... 1-11
1.3.5 Installing a Wiring Module ............................................................. 1-12

1-1
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

1.1 Overview
_1 This manual introduces the use of special modules. The special modules are the analog input/output modules,

temperature measurement modules, load cell modules, and network modules. They are described in the

following table.

Classification Model Name Description

4-channel analog input module

Hardware resolution: 16 bits

AS04AD-A
0–10 V, 0/1–5 V, -5 to +5 V, -10 to +10 V, 0/4–20 mA, -20 to +20 mA

Conversion time: 2 ms/channel

8-channel analog input module

Hardware resolution: 16 bits

AS08AD-B
0–10 V, 0/1–5 V, -5 to +5 V, -10 to +10 V

Conversion time: 2 ms/channel

8-channel analog input module

Hardware resolution: 16 bits

AS08AD-C
0/4–20 mA, -20 to +20 mA
Analog
Conversion time: 2 ms/channel
input/output
4-channel analog input module
module
Hardware resolution: 12 bits
AS04DA-A
-10 to +10 V, 0–20 mA, 4–20 mA

Conversion time: 2 ms/channel

4-channel analog input module

Hardware resolution: 16 bits

0–10 V, 0/1–5 V, -5 to +5 V, -10 to +10 V, 0/4–20 mA, -20 to +20 mA

Conversion time: 2 ms/channel

AS06XA-A
2-channel analog input module

Hardware resolution: 12 bits

-10 to +10 V, 0–20 mA, 4–20 mA

Conversion time: 2 ms/channel

4-channel, 2-wire/3-wire RTD

Temperature
Sensor type: Pt100 / Ni100 / Pt1000 / Ni1000 / JPt100 / LG-Ni1000 /
measurement AS04RTD-A
Cu50 / Cu100 / 0–300Ω / 0–3000Ω input impedance
module
Resolution: 0.1°C/0.1°F (16 bits)

1-2
 Ch a pt er 1 In tr od uc t i o n

Classification Model Name Description

Conversion time: 200 ms/channel 1_

6-channel, 2-wire/3-wire RTD

Sensor type: Pt100 / Ni100 / Pt1000 / Ni1000 / JPt100 / LG-Ni1000 /

AS06RTD-A Cu50 / Cu100 / 0–300Ω / 0–3000Ω input impedance

Resolution: 0.1°C/0.1°F (16 bits)

Conversion time: 200 ms/channel

4-channel thermocouple

Sensor type: J, K, R, S, T, E, N, B, and -100 to +100 mV

AS04TC-A
Resolution: 0.1°C/0.1°F (24 bits)

Conversion time: 200 ms/channel

8-channel thermocouple

Sensor type: J, K, R, S, T, E, N, B, and -100 to +100 mV

AS08TC-A
Resolution: 0.1°C/0.1°F (24 bits)

Conversion time: 200 ms/channel

2-channel, 4-wire/6-wire load cell sensor

Eigenvalue applicable to a load cell: 1, 2, 4, 6, 20, 40, 80 mV/V

Load cell
AS02LC-A Highest precision: 1/10000 @ 50 ms of the conversion time
module
ADC Resolution : 24 bits

Conversion time: 2.5–400 ms (nine options to choose from)

2-axis positioning control

1 high-speed differential input, 5-24 VDC, maximum at 200 kHz
AS02PU-A
5 external inputs, 24 VDC, 5 mA,

2-axis high-speed differential outputs, 5 VDC, maximum at 200 kHz

4-axis positioning control

Positioning /
6 inputs, 24 VDC, 5mA,
counter AS04PU-A
4-axis high-speed open collector output, 5-30 VDC, 0.1A,
module
maximum at 200 kHz

2-channel high-speed counters

Input methods for the 2-channel are pulse-input (max. at 200 kHz)
AS02HC-A
and SSI communication interface input (max. at 1.25 MHz)

Incrementing / decrementing encoder input

Network Serial communication module, 2x communication ports, applicable to

AS00SCM-A
module communication cards, supporting MODBUS protocols

1-3
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Classification Model Name Description

_1 AS01DNET-A DeviceNet communication port, functioning as master or slave

AS04SIL-A IO-Link module, built-in with 4 IO-Link communication ports

AS00SCM-A

+ Network module with AS-FCOPM function cards

AS-FCOPM

AS00SCM-A
Remote I/O
+ Network module with AS-FEN02 function cards
module
AS-FEN02

DeviceNet remote IO slave, its right side connectswith AS Series

AS01DNET-A
extension modules, including digital modules, analog modules,
(RTU)
temperature modules, etc.

AS-F232 Serial communication port, RS232, functioning as master or slave

AS-F422 Serial communication port, RS422, functioning as master or slave

AS-F485 Serial communication port, RS485, functioning as master or slave

CANopen communication port, supporting DS301, AS series remote

AS-FCOPM
modules, and Delta servo systems

2-channel analog input

AS-F2AD 0–10 V (12 bits), 4–20 mA (11 bits)

Function cards
Conversion time: 3 ms/channel

2-channel analog input

AS-F2DA 0–10 V, 4–20 mA (12 bits)

Conversion time: 2 ms/channel

2x Ethernet ports, supporting MODBUS TCP, EtherNet/IP Adapter, AS

AS-FEN02
Series remote control, and DLR function

AS-FPFN02 2x Ethernet ports, supporting PROFINET Device (adapter)

1-4
 Ch a pt er 1 In tr od uc t i o n

1.2 Specifications
1.2.1 General Specifications 1_

Item Specifications

Operating temperature -20 to +60°C

Storage temperature -40 to +80°C
5–95%
Operating humidity
No condensation
5–95%
Storage humidity
No condensation
Work environment No corrosive gas
Installation location In a control box
Pollution degree 2

Ingress protection
IP20
(IP ratings)

EMC (electromagnetic
Refer to Chapter 7 for more information.
compatibility)
Tested with:
5 Hz ≦ f ≦ 8.4 Hz, constant amplitude 3.5 mm

Vibration resistance 8.4 Hz ≦ f ≦ 150 Hz, constant acceleration 1 g

Duration of oscillation: 10 sweep cycles per axis on each direction of the three
mutually perpendicular axes
International Standard IEC 61131-2 & IEC 60068-2-6 (TEST Fc)
Tested with:
Half-sine wave
Strength of shock: 15 g peak value, 11 ms duration
Shock resistance
Shock direction: The shocks on each direction per axis, of the three mutually
perpendicular axes (for a total of 18 shocks)
International Standard IEC 61131-2 & IEC 60068-2-27 (TEST Ea)
Safety Conforms to IEC 61131-2, UL508
Ambient air
Operating: 1080 ~ 795hPa (-1000 ~ 2000 m)
temperature-barometric
pressure-altitude Storage:1080 ~ 660hPa (-1000 ~ 3500 m)

1-5
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

1.2.2 EMS Standards

_1 1.2.2.1 EMI

Port Frequency Range Level (Normative) Reference Standard

Enclosure port 30-230 MHz 40 dB (μV/m) quasi-peak

(radiated)

(measured at a
230-1000 MHz 47 dB (μV/m) quasi-peak
distance of 10

meters) IEC 61000-6-4

79 dB (μV) quasi-peak
0.15-0.5 MHz
AC power port 66 dB (μV) average

(conducted) 73 dB (μV) quasi-peak

0.5-30 MHz
60 dB (μV) average

1.2.2.2 EMS

Environmental
Reference Standard Test Test Level
Phenomenon

Electrostatic Contact ±4 kV
IEC 61000-4-2
Discharge Air ±8 kV

Radio Frequency 2.0-2.7 GHz 1 V/m

80% AM,
Electromagnetic Field 1.4-2.0 GHz 3 V/m
IEC 61000-4-3 1 kHz
Amplitude
sinusoidal 80-1000 MHz 10 V/m
Modulated

Power Frequency 60 Hz 30 A/m

IEC 61000-4-8
Magnetic Field 50 Hz 30 A/m

1-6
 Ch a pt er 1 In tr od uc t i o n

1.2.2.3 Conducted Immunity Test

1_
Radio
Fast Transient High Energy
Environmental Phenomenon Frequency
Burst Surge
Interference

Reference Standard IEC 61000-4-4 IEC 61000-4-5 IEC 61000-4-6

Interface/Port Specific Interface/Port Test Level Test Level Test Level

Shielded cable 1 kV 1 kV CM 10 V
Data communication
Unshielded cable 1 kV 1 kV CM 10 V

2 kV CM
AC I/O (unshielded) 2 kV 10 V
1 kV DM

Digital and analog I/O Analog or DC I/O

1 kV 1 kV CM 10 V
(unshielded)

All shielded lines (earth) 1 kV 1 kV CM 10 V

2 kV CM
AC power 2 kV 10 V
1 kV DM
Equipment power
0.5 kV CM
DC power 2 kV 10 V
0.5 kV DM

AC I/O and AC auxiliary 2 kV CM

2 kV 10 V
I/O power and power 1 kV DM

auxiliary power output DC I/O and DC auxiliary 0.5 kV CM

2 kV 10 V
power 0.5 kV DM

1-7
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

1.3 Installation
_1 1.3.1 Installing a Module
1. Press the clip rings if they are out as the image 1 shown. Push the module to the desire position
until you hear a click to finish installation.
2. Link the I/O modules on the right side of the PLC and make sure they are hooked together. Push the
modules into the DIN rail until you hear a click.
3. After you installed the module, fasten the screws on the modules to secure the module on the DIN rail.

1 2

If there is a vibration source near the installation site, install anti-vibration baffles on the sides of the AS Series
modules for better stabilization, such as the gray baffles show below.

1-8
 Ch a pt er 1 In tr od uc t i o n

 Install the baffles:

1. Hook the baffle onto the DIN rail and press it down as the directional arrow shows below.
1_

2. Use screws to secure the baffle.

3. The completed baffle installation is shown below.

1-9
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

1.3.2 Installing a Removable Terminal Block

_1 Install a removable terminal block on the module as illustrated below.

 Installation

1. Level the terminal block at the printed circuit board, and press it into the module.

 Removal

1. Pull down the clip in the direction indicated by the arrow and then pull the terminal block up

as illustrated below.

1 1

1.3.3 Changing a Module

1. Take the removable terminal block out of the module, and then pull the clip out from the DIN rail as
shown below.

1-10
 Ch a pt er 1 In tr od uc t i o n

2. Remove the module.

3. Slide the new module in as shown below.

1_

1.3.4 Installing and Removing an Extension Card

 Installation

Push the extension card into the extension card slot until you hear a click.

 Removal

Press the tab labeled PUSH to release the extension card, and then remove the extension card.

1 - 11
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

1.3.5 Installing a Wiring Module

_1 Connect a communication cable to the port on a CPU module, and make sure that the connector of the cable

is properly seated in the port.

 Installation

1. Firmly seat one side of the wiring module first.

2. Press the driver board in the direction indicated by arrow 1, and make sure that the groove is

attached to the DIN rail.

 Removal

1. Push the wiring module in the direction indicated by arrow 1.

2. Pull the wiring module in the direction indicated by arrow 2.

1-12
 2
Chapter 2 Analog Input Module
AS04/08AD

Table of Contents
2.1 Overview ........................................................................................... 2-2
2.1.1 Characteristics ............................................................................... 2-2

2.2 Specifications and Functions ............................................................. 2-2

2.2.1 Specifications ................................................................................ 2-3
2.2.2 Profile........................................................................................... 2-4
2.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals ............................................................... 2-6
2.2.4 Control Registers ........................................................................... 2-6
2.2.5 Functions .................................................................................... 2-11
2.2.6 Wiring ........................................................................................ 2-20
2.2.7 LED Indicators ............................................................................. 2-24

2.3 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft ..................................................................... 2-24

2.3.1 Initial Setting .............................................................................. 2-24
2.3.2 Checking the Version of a Module................................................... 2-27
2.3.3 Online Mode ................................................................................ 2-28
2.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File ............................................. 2-29
2.3.5 Parameters ................................................................................. 2-30

2.4 Troubleshooting .............................................................................. 2-34

2.4.1 Error Codes ................................................................................. 2-34
2.4.2 Troubleshooting Procedure ............................................................ 2-35

2-1
 A S 30 0 S er i es M od u le Ma n ua l

2.1 Overview
This chapter describes the specifications for analog-to-digital modules, their operation, and their programming.

In this chapter, “module” refers to the analog-to-digital modules AS04AD-A, AS08AD-B, and AS08AD-C.

2.1.1 Characteristics
_2 (1) Select a module based on its practical application.

AS04AD-A: Has four channels. A channel can receive either voltage or current input.

AS08AD-B: Has eight channels. A channel can receive voltage input.

AS08AD-C: Has eight channels. A channel can receive current input.

(2) High-speed conversion

Analog signals are converted to digital signals at a rate of 25 ms per channel.

(3) High accuracy

Conversion accuracy: The error range for both voltage input and current input is ±0.2% at ambient

temperature of 25° C. The number of voltage/current inputs that are averaged

is 100.

(4) Use the utility software to configure the module.

The HWCONFIG utility software is built into ISPSoft. You can set modes and parameters directly in

HWCONFIG without spending time writing programs to set registers to manage functions.

2-2
 Ch a pt er 2 A na l o g In pu t M od u l e A S0 4 /0 8 A D- A

2.2 Specifications and Functions

2.2.1 Specifications
 Electrical specifications

Module Name AS04AD-A AS08AD-B AS08AD-C

2_
Number of Inputs 4 8 8

Analog-to-Digital
Voltage input/Current input Voltage input Current input
Conversion

Supply Voltage 24 VDC (20.4 VDC–28.8 VDC) (-15% to +20%)

Connector Type Removable terminal block

Conversion Time 2ms/channel

An analog circuit is isolated from a digital circuit by a digital integrated circuit/

optocoupler, but the analog channels are not isolated from one another.

Isolation between a digital circuit and a ground: 500 VDC

Isolation
Isolation between an analog circuit and a ground: 500 VDC

Isolation between an analog circuit and a digital circuit: 500 VDC

Isolation between the 24 VDC and a ground: 500 VDC

Weight 145g

 Functional specifications

Analog-to-Digital
Voltage Input
Conversion

Rated Input Range -10 V ~ +10 V 0 V ~ 10 V ±5 V 0V~5V 1V~5V

Rated Digital K-32000 K0 K-32000 K0 K0

~ ~ ~ ~ ~
Conversion Range K32000 K32000 K32000 K32000 K32000

Hardware Input -10.12V -0.12V -5.06V -0.06V 0.95V

~ ~ ~ ~ ~
Limit*1 10.12V 10.12V 5.06V 5.06V 5.05V

Digital Conversion K-32384 K-384 K-32384 K-384 K-384

~ ~ ~ ~ ~
Limit*2 K32384 K32384 K32384 K32384 K32384

Error Rate Room Temperature: ±0.2% ; Full Temperature Range: ±0.5%

Hardware
16 bits
Resolution

Input Impedance 2MΩ

2-3
 A S 30 0 S er i es M od u le Ma n ua l

Analog-to-Digital
Voltage Input
Conversion

Absolute Input
±15 V
Range*3

*1: If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, the module only shows the maximum value. If the
_2
input signal is below the lower limit, it only shows the minimum value.

*2: If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, it also exceeds the digital conversion limit and a

conversion limit error appears. For example in the voltage input mode (-10 V to +10 V), when the input

signal is 10.15 V, exceeding the hardware upper limit, it also exceeds the conversion upper limit. The

module uses the upper limit value (32387) as the input signal and a conversion limit error appears.

*3: If an input signal exceeds the absolute range, it might damage the channel.

Analog-to-Digital
Current Input
Conversion

Rated Input Range ±20 mA 0 mA–20 mA 4 mA–20 mA

Rated Digital K-32000 K0 K0

~ ~ ~
Conversion Range K+2000 K32000 K32000

Hardware Input
-20.24 mA ~ 20.24 mA -0.24 mA ~ 20.24 mA 3.81 mA ~ 20.19 mA
Limit*1

Digital Conversion K-32384 K-384 K-384

~ ~ ~
Limit*2 K32384 K32384 K32384

Error Rate Room Temperature: ±0.2% ; Full Temperature Range: ±0.5%

Hardware Resolution 16 bits

Input Impedance 250Ω

Absolute Input
±32 mA
Range*3

*1: If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, the module only shows the maximum value. If the

input signal is below the lower limit, it only shows the minimum value.

*2: If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, it also exceeds the digital conversion limit and a

conversion limit error appears. For example in the voltage input mode (4 mA to 20 mA), when the input

signal is 0 mA, exceeding the hardware upper limit, it also exceeds the conversion upper limit. The

module uses the upper limit value (-384) as the input signal and a conversion limit error appears.

*3: If an input signal exceeds the absolute range, it might damage the channel.

2-4
 Ch a pt er 2 A na l o g In pu t M od u l e A S0 4 /0 8 A D- A

2.2.2 Profile
 AS04AD-A

38.2 95

04AD 1
7
7 2_
V 1+ V 2+
P WR
I1 + I2 +

V I1- V I2- E RR 2

98.3
A D

88
V 3+ V 4+

I3 + I4 +

V I3- V I4-
3
8 S LD S LD

AG 2 4V

0V
4
9 5
6 75
35
Unit: mm

Number Name Description

1 Model Name Model name of the module

Status of the power supply

POWER LED Indicator ON: the power is on.

OFF: the power is off.

Error status of the module

ON: a serious error exists in the module.

2 ERROR LED Indicator
OFF: the module is operating normally.

Blinking: A minor error exists in the module.

Analog-to-digital conversion status

Analog to Digital
Blinking: conversion is in process.
Conversion Indicator
OFF: conversion has stopped.

Removable Terminal Inputs are connected to sensors.

3
Block Outputs are connected to loads to be driven.

Arrangement of the
4 Arrangement of the terminals
Input/Output Terminals

5 Terminal Block Clip For removing the terminal block

6 DIN Rail Clip Secures the module onto the DIN rail

7 Module Connecting Set Connects the modules

8 Ground Clip

9 Label Nameplate

2-5
 A S 30 0 S er i es M od u le Ma n ua l

2.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals

AS04AD-A AS08AD-B AS08AD-C

04AD 08AD 08AD

_2

V 1+ V 2+ V1+ V2+ I1+ I2+

P WR PWR PWR
I1 + I2 + V1- V2- I1- I2-

V I1- V I2- E RR V3+ V4+ ERR I3+ I4+ ERR

A D A D A D
V 3+ V 4+ V3- V4- I3- I4-

I3 + I4 + V5+ V6+ I5+ I6+

V I3- V I4- V5- V6- I5- I6-

S LD S LD V7+ V8+ I7+ I8+

V7- V8- I7- I8-

AG 2 4V AG 24V AG 24V

0V 0V 0V

2.2.4 AS04AD Control Register

*If you use HWCONFIG to set values in CRs, once the set value is downloaded, the values can be retained in

the module; however if you use TO instruction to write data into CRs, the values CANNOT be retained, after

power failure or after transition of the CPU from STOP to RUN.

Note: The attribute of the CR must be W (write) to use TO instruction.

CR# Name Description Atr. Defaults

0: integer format
0 Format Setup R 0
1: floating point format

0: closed
1 Channel 1 mode setup
1: -10 V to +10 V

Channel 2 mode setup 2: 0 V–10 V

2
3: -5 V to +5 V
R/W 1
Channel 3 mode setup 4: 0 V–5 V
3
5: 1 V–5 V

Channel 4 mode setup 6: 0 mA–20 mA

4
7: 4 mA–20 mA

2-6
 Ch a pt er 2 A na l o g In pu t M od u l e A S0 4 /0 8 A D- A

CR# Name Description Atr. Defaults

8: -20 mA to +20 mA

5 Channel 1 offset

6 Channel 2 offset
Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 0
2_
7 Channel 3 offset

8 Channel 4 offset

9 Channel 1 gain

10 Channel 2 gain
Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 1000
11 Channel 3 gain

12 Channel 4 gain

Channel 1 average
13
times

Channel 2 average
14
times
Range: 1–100 R/W 10
Channel 3 average
15
times

Channel 4 average
16
times

Channel 1 filter
17
average percentage
Range: 0–3
Channel 2 filter
18 Unit: ±10%
average percentage
1: ±10% R/W 1
Channel 3 filter
19 2: ±20%
average percentage
3: ±30%
Channel 4 filter
20
average percentage

0: 2 ms

Channel sampling 1: 4 ms

cycle 2: 10 ms
21 R/W 0
(sampling/integration 3: 15 ms
time) 4: 20 ms

5: 30 ms

2-7
 A S 30 0 S er i es M od u le Ma n ua l

CR# Name Description Atr. Defaults

6: 40 ms

7: 50 ms

8: 60 ms

_2
9: 70 ms

10: 80 ms

11: 90 ms

12: 100 ms

0: open channel alarm

1: close channel alarm

bit0: channel 1

bit1: channel 2

bit2: channel 3

bit3: channel 4
22 Channel Alarm Setup R/W 0

0: warning

1: alarm

bit8: error in the power supply

bit9: error in the module hardware

bit10: error in calibration

23 The minimum scale

When the format is set to integer in HWCONFIG, -10.0
24 range for channel 1
the scale range is invalid.
25 The minimum scale For analog-digital modules, it is much more -10.0
26 range for channel 2 convenient if the system can convert digital values
27 The minimum scale to floating-point values for earier understanding.
-10.0
28 range for channel 3 Here you can set the minimum and maximum scale
29 The minimum scale ranges of corresponding floating-point values for
R -10.0
30 range for channel 4 channels.
31 The maximum scale For example, if the scale range for an analog to
10.0
32 range for channel 1 digital input channel is ± 10.0 V, it indicates the

33 The maximum scale maximum value is +10.0 V and the minimum value
10.0
34 range for channel 2 is -10.0 V.

35 The maximum scale If the scale range for an analog to digital input
10.0
36 range for channel 3 channel is 4 mA ~ 20 mA. It indicates the maximum

2-8
 Ch a pt er 2 A na l o g In pu t M od u l e A S0 4 /0 8 A D- A

CR# Name Description Atr. Defaults

37 value is 20 mA and the minimum value is 4 mA.

Note: You can use PLC instruction DSCLP

The maximum scale
(API0217) and set SM685 to ON to use floating- 10.0
38 range for channel 4
point operations when a conversion range needs to

edit.
2_
Instructions for peak values

16#0101: record the peak value again for channel

16#0102: record the peak value again for channel

16#0104: record the peak value again for channel

16#0108: record the peak value again for channel

16#010F: record the peak values again for

channels 1–4
201 Instruction Set W 0
16#0201: enable recording for channel 1

16#0202: enable recording for channel 2

16#0204: enable recording for channel 3

16#0208: enable recording for channel 4

16#020F: enable recording for channels 1–4

16#0211: disable recording for channel 1

16#0212: disable recording for channel 2

16#0214: disable recording for channel 3

16#0218: disable recording for channel 4

16#021F: disable recording for channels 1–4

16#0502: restore default settings

The maximum peak

210 0
value for channel 1

The maximum peak

211 Integer format; the maximum peak value for analog 0
value for channel 2 R
inputs
The maximum peak
212 0
value for channel 3

213 The maximum peak 0

2-9
 A S 30 0 S er i es M od u le Ma n ua l

CR# Name Description Atr. Defaults

value for channel 4

The minimum peak

214 0
value for channel 1

The minimum peak

_2 215 0
value for channel 2 Integer format; the minimum peak value for analog
R
The minimum peak inputs
216 0
value for channel 3

The minimum peak

217 0
value for channel 4

The time to record for

222 1
channel 1

The time to record for

223 Unit: 10 ms 1
channel 2
Range: 1–100 R/W
The time to record for
224 Time to record the digital value for the channel 1
channel 3

The time to record for

225 1
channel 4

The number of records

240 0
for channel 1

The number of records

241 0
for channel 2
Range: 0–500, display the current records R
The number of records
242 0
for channel 3

The number of records

243 0
for channel 4
4000~
Records for channel 1 500 records for channel 1 R --
4499
4500~ Records for channel 2 500 records for channel 2 R --
4999
5000~ Records for channel 3 500 records for channel 3 R --
5499
5500~ Records for channel 4 500 records for channel 4 R --
5999

2-10
 Ch a pt er 2 A na l o g In pu t M od u l e A S0 4 /0 8 A D- A

2.2.5 AS08AD Control Registers

*If you use HWCONFIG to set values in CRs, once the set value is downloaded, the values can be retained in

the module; however if you use TO instruction to write data into CRs, the values CANNOT be retained, after

power failure or after transition of the CPU from STOP to RUN.

Note: The attribute of the CR must be W (write) to use TO instruction.

2_
CR# Name Description Atr. Defaults

0: integer format
0 Format Setup R 0
1: floating point format

1 Channel 1 mode setup

AS08AD-B
2 Channel 2 mode setup
0: closed

1: -10 V to +10 V
3 Channel 3 mode setup 2: 0 V–10 V

3: -5 V to +5 V

4 Channel 4 mode setup 4: 0 V–5 V

5: 1 V–5 V R/W 1

5 Channel 5 mode setup

AS08AD-C

6 Channel 6 mode setup 0: closed

1: -20 mA to +20 mA

2: 0 mA–20 mA
7 Channel 7 mode setup
3: 4 mA–20 mA

8 Channel 8 mode setup

9 Channel 1 offset

10 Channel 2 offset

11 Channel 3 offset

12 Channel 4 offset
Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 0
13 Channel 5 offset

14 Channel 6 offset

15 Channel 7 offset

16 Channel 8 offset

2 - 11
 A S 30 0 S er i es M od u le Ma n ua l

CR# Name Description Atr. Defaults

17 Channel 1 gain

18 Channel 2 gain

19 Channel 3 gain

_2 20 Channel 4 gain
Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 1000
21 Channel 5 gain

22 Channel 6 gain

23 Channel 7 gain

24 Channel 8 gain

25 Channel 1 average times

26 Channel 2 average times

27 Channel 3 average times

28 Channel 4 average times

Range: 1–100 R/W 10
29 Channel 5 average times

30 Channel 6 average times

31 Channel 7 average times

32 Channel 8 average times

Channel 1 filter average

33
percentage

Channel 2 filter average

34
percentage

Channel 3 filter average

35
percentage Range: 0–3

Channel 4 filter average Unit: ±10%

36
percentage 1: ±10% R/W 1

Channel 5 filter average 2: ±20%

37
percentage 3: ±30%

Channel 6 filter average

38
percentage

Channel 7 filter average

39
percentage

40 Channel 8 filter average

2-12
 Ch a pt er 2 A na l o g In pu t M od u l e A S0 4 /0 8 A D- A

CR# Name Description Atr. Defaults

percentage

0: 2 ms

1: 4 ms

2_
2: 10 ms

3: 15 ms

4: 20 ms

Channel Sampling Cycle 5: 30 ms

41 (Sampling/Integration 6: 40 ms R/W 0

Time) 7: 50 ms

8: 60 ms

9: 70 ms

10: 80 ms

11: 90 ms

12: 100 ms

0: open channel alarm

1: close channel alarm

bit0: channel 1

bit1: channel 2

bit2: channel 3

bit3: channel 4

bit4: channel 5

bit5: channel 6
42 Channel Alarm Setup R/W 0
bit6: channel 7

bit7: channel 8

0: warning

1: alarm

bit8: error in the power supply

bit9: error in the module hardware

bit10: error in calibration

43 The minimum scale range When the format is set to integer in

44 for channel 1 HWCONFIG, the scale range is invalid. R -10.0

45 The minimum scale range For analog-digital modules, it is much more

2-13
 A S 30 0 S er i es M od u le Ma n ua l

CR# Name Description Atr. Defaults

46 for channel 2 convenient if the system can convert digital

47 The minimum scale range values to floating-point values for earier

for channel 3 understanding. Here you can set the minimum

48
and maximum scale ranges of corresponding
_2 49 The minimum scale range
floating-point values for channels.
50 for channel 4
For example, if the scale range for an analog
51 The minimum scale range to digital input channel is ±10.0 V, it indicates
52 for channel 5 the maximum value is +10.0 V and the

53 The minimum scale range minimum value is -10.0 V.

54 for channel 6 If the scale range for an analog to digital input

55 channel is 4 mA ~ 20 mA. It indicates the

The minimum scale range
maximum value is 20 mA and the minimum
56 for channel 7
value is 4 mA.
57 The minimum scale range

58 for channel 8
Note: You can use PLC instruction DSCLP
59 The maximum scale range
(API0217) and set SM685 to ON to use
60 for channel 1
floating-point operations when a conversion
61 The maximum scale range range needs to edit.

62 for channel 2

63 The maximum scale range

64 for channel 3

65 The maximum scale range

66 for channel 4
R 10.0
67 The maximum scale range

68 for channel 5

69 The maximum scale range

70 for channel 6

71 The maximum scale range

72 for channel 7

73 The maximum scale range

74 for channel 8

2-14
 Ch a pt er 2 A na l o g In pu t M od u l e A S0 4 /0 8 A D- A

CR# Name Description Atr. Defaults

Instructions for peak values

16#0101: record the peak value again for

channel 1

16#0102: record the peak value again for

2_
channel 2

16#0104: record the peak value again for

channel 3

16#0108: record the peak value again for

channel 4

16#010F: record the peak values again for

channels 1-4
201 Instruction Set W 0
16#0201: enable recording for channel 1

16#0202: enable recording for channel 2

16#0204: enable recording for channel 3

16#0208: enable recording for channel 4

16#020F: enable recording for channels 1–4

16#0211: disable recording for channel 1

16#0212: disable recording for channel 2

16#0214: disable recording for channel 3

16#0218: disable recording for channel 4

16#021F: disable recording for channels 1–4

16#0502: restore default settings

The maximum peak value

210 0
for channel 1

The maximum peak value

211 0
for channel 2

The maximum peak value

212 0
for channel 3 Integer format; the maximum peak value for
R
The maximum peak value analog inputs
213 0
for channel 4

The maximum peak value

214 0
for channel 5

The maximum peak value

215 0
for channel 6

2-15
 A S 30 0 S er i es M od u le Ma n ua l

CR# Name Description Atr. Defaults

The maximum peak value

216 0
for channel 7

The maximum peak value

217 0
for channel 8
_2
The minimum peak value
218 0
for channel 1

The minimum peak value

219 0
for channel 2

The minimum peak value

220 0
for channel 3

The minimum peak value

221 0
for channel 4 Integer format; the minimum peak value for
R
The minimum peak value analog inputs
222 0
for channel 5

The minimum peak value

223 0
for channel 6

The minimum peak value

224 0
for channel 7

The minimum peak value

225 0
for channel 8

The time to record for

222 1
channel 1

The time to record for Unit: 10 ms

223 1
channel 2 Range: 1–100
R
The time to record for Time to record the digital value for the
224 1
channel 3 channels

The time to record for

225 1
channel 4

2-16
 Ch a pt er 2 A na l o g In pu t M od u l e A S0 4 /0 8 A D- A

2.2.6 Functions

Item Function Description

Enable/Disable a 1. Enable or disable a channel.

1
Channel 2. If a channel is disabled, the total conversion time decreases.

2 Calibration Calibrate a linear curve. 2_

3 Average Conversion values are averaged and filtered.

Disconnection Disconnection detection only operates when the analog range is 4 mA–
4
Detection 20 mA or 1 V–5 V.

If an input signal exceeds the range of inputs that the hardware can
Channel Detect and
5 receive, the module produces an alarm or a warning. You can disable
Alarm
this function.

The Limit Detections

6 Save the maximum/minimum values for channels.
for Channels

Records for

Channels
7 Save the analog curves for channels
(Applicable for

AS04AD)

8 Scale Range When the format is floating-point, you can set the scale range.

1. Enable/Disable a channel

An analog signal is converted into a digital signal at a rate of 2 ms per channel. The total conversion time is

2 ms X (the number of channels). If a channel is not used, you can disable it to decrease the total
conversion time.

2. Calibration

To make a curve meet specific needs, calibrate the curve by changing the offset and the gain. The

calibration range depends on the range of inputs that the hardware can receive. The formula is:

Example:

A channel receives voltage inputs between -10.0 V to +10.0 V. The gain is 1000, and the offset is 0. The

corresponding value for the original signal -10.0 V to +10.0 V is -32000 to +32000. If you change the offset to -

100, the calibrated value for the original signal -10.0 V to +10.0 V becomes -31900 to +32100.

2-17
 A S 30 0 S er i es M od u le Ma n ua l

Original signals
1 0V S igna ls aft er t he ca libration

-32 000 -31900

3200 0 32100
Digita l v alue (X)
_2
-10V

Voltag e (Y)
Analog s ig nal

3. Average

You can set the average value between 1–100. It is a steady value obtained from the sum of the recorded

values. If the recorded values include an acute pulse due to unavoidable external factors, however, you
may observe violent changes in the average value. Use the filtering function to exclude acute pulses from

the sum-up and equalization, so that the computed average value is not affected by the acute recorded

values. Set the filter percentage to the range 0–3, where the unit is 10%. If you set the filter range to 0, the

system sums up all the recorded values and divides them to obtain the average value, but if you set the

filter range to 1, for example, the system excludes the bottom 10% and top 10% of the values and

averages only the remaining values to obtain the average value. For instantance, set the average value to

100 and set the filter percentage to 3. When there are 100 pieces of data collected, the system arranges

the collected data according to their values from large to small and then excludes the bottom 30% and top

30% of the values (60 pieces of data) and averages only the remaining values (40 pieces of data) to

obtain the average value.

Quantity

Range for filter percentage

Present measured value

4. Disconnection detection

Disconnection detection only operates when the analog range is 4–20 mA or 1–5 V. If a module that can

receive inputs between 4–20 mA or from 1–5 V is disconnected, the input signal exceeds the range of

allowable inputs, so the module produces an alarm or a warning.

2-18
 Ch a pt er 2 A na l o g In pu t M od u l e A S0 4 /0 8 A D- A

5. Channel detection

If an input signal exceeds the allowable range of inputs, an error message appears. You can disable this

function so that the module does not produce an alarm or a warning when the input signal exceeds the

input range.

6. Limit detections for channels 2_

This function saves the maximum and minimum values for channels so that you can determine the peak to

peak values.

Valu e o f the chan nel

Maximum valu e

Mini mu m va lue

Time

7. Records for channels (applicable for AS04AD)

Record the input values of the cyclic sampling for each channel. The system saves up to 500 data

points and the recording time is 10 ms.

Valu e o f the chan nel

500 records o f d ata

Ti me
Instru cti on for recordi ng Recordin g e nds

8. Scale range

You can set the scale range when the format is floating-point. The analog output mode of a channel has

a corresponding digital range. Digital values correspond to analog outputs sent by the module. For

example, if the analog range is -10 V to +10 V, the digital range is -10.0 to +10.0, the HSP scale is 10.0,

and the LSP scale is -10.0. The digital values -10.0 to +10.0 correspond to the analog values -10 V to
+10 V, as the example below shows.

2-19
 A S 30 0 S er i es M od u le Ma n ua l

Analog value

10 V

Rated output range

_2

-10 V
Digital value
-10.0 10.0
Scale range

2.2.7 Wiring
 Precautions

To ensure the analog-to-digital module functions well and reliably, the external wiring must prevent noise.

Before you install the cables, follow the precautions below.

(1) To prevent a surge and induction, the AC cable and the input signal cables that are connected to the

module must be separate cables.

(2) Do not install the cable near a main circuit, a high-voltage cable, or a cable connected to a load that is

not a PLC. In addition, the cable must not be bound to a main circuit, a high-voltage cable, or a cable

connected to a load which is not a PLC.

(3) Ground shielded cables and hermetically sealed cables separately.

(4) Terminals with insulation sleeves cannot be arranged as a terminal block, so you should cover the

terminals with insulation tubes.

(5) Use single-core cables or twin-core cables in a diameter of 24 AWG–22 AWG with pin-type connectors

smaller than 1 mm. Use only copper conducting wires that can resist temperatures above 60° C-75° C.

< 1m m 8-10m m 24-22AWG

(6) Notes on two-wire, three-wire, and four-wire connections:

 Two-wire connection/three-wire connection (passive transducer): connect the transducer and

the analog input module to the same power circuit.

 Four-wire connection (active transducer): the transducer uses an independent power supply so

do not connect it to the same power circuit as the analog input module.

(7) Note: use cables with the same length (less than 200 m) and use wire resistance of less than 100 ohm.

2-20
 Ch a pt er 2 A na l o g In pu t M od u l e A S0 4 /0 8 A D- A

 AS04AD-A External wiring

AG
*6
4-wir e: v ol tage inp ut
CHX
-10 V~ + 10 V Shi eld ed cabl e *1 1M
+ V I+
+ 2 4V 250 CH1
- *3 I1 +
0V 1M
VI 1-
*4
FE
*6 AG 2_
4-wir e: c urr ent inp ut CHX
-20 mA ~ +2 0 mA Shi eld ed c abl e *1 1M
V 2+
+ *2 25 0 CH2
+ 24 V I2 +
- 1M
0V V I2 -

*4
FE
2-wi re: cu rrent i np ut
4 mA ~ +2 0m A
*6 AG
+ 2 4V
Shi eld ed c abl e *1 CHX
+ 1M
V 3+
- *2 25 0 CH3
I3 +
1M
0V V I3 -
*4
FE
3-wi re: vo ltag e inpu t
-1 0 V~ + 10 V Shi eld ed c abl e *1 *6 AG

+ 2 4V CH X
+ 1M
V4 +
25 0 CH4
0V - I 4+
1M
*4 V I4 -

FE

3-wi re: cur rent i npu t

-2 0m A~ + 20 m A *6 AG
Shi eld ed c abl e *1 CHX
+ 24 V 1M
+ *2 V 1+
25 0 CH1
I1 +
0V -
1M
V I1 -
*4
FE
*5

+ 15 V
0V D C /D C
24 VD C AG
24 V C on ve rt e r
-15 V

*1. Use shielded cables to isolate the analog input signal cable from other power cables.

*2. If the module is connected to a current signal, the terminals Vn and In+ (n=1–4) must be short-circuited.

*3. If variability in the input voltage results in interference within the wiring, connect the module to a capacitor

with a capacitance between 0.1–0.47 μF and a working voltage of 25 V.

*4. Connect the shielded cable to the terminal FE.

*5. Connect the terminal to the ground terminal.

*6. Every channel can operate with the wiring presented above.

2-21
 A S 30 0 S er i es M od u le Ma n ua l

 AS08AD-B External wiring

4 -w ire vo lt ag e inp u t AG
-10 V~ + 10 V Sh ield ed c ab le* 1 *5
CHX 1M
+ 2 4V +
V 1+
- *2 1M
_2
0V V1 -
*3
FE

3 - wire v olt ag e in pu t
-1 0 V~ + 10 V S hie ld ed ca b le* 1 *5 AG
CH X
+ 2 4V + 1M
V2 +
0V -
1M
V 2-
*3
FE

*4

+ 1 5V
0V D C / DC
2 4 VD C C on ve rte r AG
2 4V
-1 5V

*1. Use shielded cables to isolate the analog input signal cable from other power cables.

*2. If variability in the input voltage results in interference within the wiring, connect the module to a capacitor

with a capacitance between 0.1–0.47 μF and a working voltage of 25 V.

*3. Connect the shielded cable to the terminal FE.

*4. Connect the terminal to the ground terminal.

*5. Every channel can operate with the wiring presented above.

2-22
 Ch a pt er 2 A na l o g In pu t M od u l e A S0 4 /0 8 A D- A

 AS08AD-C External wiring

4 -w ire cu rren t in pu t AG
*4
-2 0m A~ + 2 0m A Sh ield ed cab le* 1
CHX
1M
+ 2 4V +
I1 +
- 2 50 1M
0V I1 -

*2 2_
FE
2- w ire curre nt in pu t
4m A~ + 20 m A
+ 24 V
Sh ield ed cab le* 1 *4 AG
+
CHX
- 1M
I2 +
250 1M
0V I2 -
*2
FE

3 -w ire cu rren t inp ut

-20 mA ~ +2 0 mA Sh ield ed cab le* 1
*4 AG
+2 4 V + CH X
1M
I 3+
0V - 25 0 1M
I3 -
*2
FE
*3

+ 1 5V
0V D C /D C
2 4 VD C C on ve rt e r AG
2 4V
-1 5V

*1. Use shielded cables to isolate the analog input signal cable from other power cables.

*2. Connect the shielded cable to the terminal FE.

*3. Connect the terminal to the ground terminal.

*4. Every channel can operate with the wiring presented above.

2-23
 A S 30 0 S er i es M od u le Ma n ua l

2.2.8 LED Indicators

Number Name Description

Operating status of the module

1 RUN LED Indicator ON: the module is running.

_2 OFF: the module is not running.

Error status of the module

ERROR LED ON: a serious error exists in the module.

2
Indicator OFF: the module is operating normally.

Blink: a minor error exists in the module.

Analog to Digital Analog-to-digital conversion status

3 Conversion Blinking: conversion is in process.

Indicator OFF: conversion has stopped.

2.3 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft

The following example uses the AS04AD-A module.

2.3.1 Initial Setting

(1) Start ISPSoft and double-click HWCONFIG.

2-24
 Ch a pt er 2 A na l o g In pu t M od u l e A S0 4 /0 8 A D- A

(2) Select a module and drag it to the working area.

2_

(3) Double-click the module in the working area to open the Device Setting page.

2-25
 A S 30 0 S er i es M od u le Ma n ua l

_2

(4) Choose a parameter, set the values, and click OK.

2-26
 Ch a pt er 2 A na l o g In pu t M od u l e A S0 4 /0 8 A D- A

(5) Click Download on the toolbar to download the parameters. Note that you cannot download the
parameters while the CPU module is running.

2_

2.3.2 Checking the Version of a Module

(1) On the Option menu, click Online Mode.

2-27
 A S 30 0 S er i es M od u le Ma n ua l

(2) Double-click the module to open the Device Setting page. The versions of both the firmware and the

hardware are displayed.

_2

2.3.3 Online Mode

(1) Click Online Mode on the toolbar.

2-28
 Ch a pt er 2 A na l o g In pu t M od u l e A S0 4 /0 8 A D- A

(2) Right-click the module and click Module Status.

2_
(3) View the module status.

2.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File

(1) Click Export in the Device Settings dialog box to save the current parameters as a CSV file (.csv).

2-29
 A S 30 0 S er i es M od u le Ma n ua l

_2 (2) Click Import in the Device Settings dialog box and select a CSV file to import saved parameters.

2.3.5 Parameters
(1) The input formats of the channels

2-30
 Ch a pt er 2 A na l o g In pu t M od u l e A S0 4 /0 8 A D- A

(2) The CH1–CH4 (channel 1–channel 4) mode settings

2_

(3) The CH1-CH4 calibration settings

2-31
 A S 30 0 S er i es M od u le Ma n ua l

(4) The average filter settings

_2

(5) The sampling time settings

2-32
 Ch a pt er 2 A na l o g In pu t M od u l e A S0 4 /0 8 A D- A

(6) The channel detection settings

2_

2-33
 A S 30 0 S er i es M od u le Ma n ua l

2.4 Troubleshooting
2.4.1 Error Codes

Error A  D LED ERROR LED

Description
Code Indicator Indicator

_2 16#1605 Hardware failure OFF ON

16#1607 The external voltage is abnormal. OFF ON

16#1608 The factory calibration is abnormal. OFF ON

16#1801 The external voltage is abnormal. OFF Blinking

16#1802 Hardware failure OFF Blinking

16#1804 The factory calibration is abnormal. OFF Blinking

The signal received by channel 1 exceeds the range of inputs

16#1808
that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 2 exceeds the range of inputs that

16#1809
the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 3 exceeds the range of inputs that

16#180A
the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 4 exceeds the range of inputs that

16#180B
the hardware can receive. Run: blinking
Blinking
The signal received by channel 5 exceeds the range of inputs that Stop: OFF
16#180C
the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 6 exceeds the range of inputs that

16#180D
the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 7 exceeds the range of inputs that

16#180E
the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 8 exceeds the range of inputs that

16#180F
the hardware can receive.

Blinking once

or twice and

after 2
- When power-on, the module is not detected by CPU module. OFF
seconds, it

blinks

repeatedly

2-34
 Ch a pt er 2 A na l o g In pu t M od u l e A S0 4 /0 8 A D- A

2.4.2 Troubleshooting Procedure

Description Procedure

Ensure the external 24 V power supply to the module is

The external voltage is abnormal.
functioning normally.

Hardware failure Return the module to the factory for repair. 2_

Internal error
Contact the factory.
The factory calibration is abnormal.

The signal received by channel 1 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 1
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 2 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 2.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 3 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 3.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 4 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 4.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 5 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 5.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 6 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 6.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 7 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 7.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 8 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 8.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

When power-on, the module is not detected by Check if the connection between module and CPU

CPU module. module is working. If not, connect again.

2-35
 A S 30 0 S er i es M od u le Ma n ua l

MEMO

_2

2-36
 3
Chapter 3 Analog Output Module AS04DA

Table of Contents
3.1 Overview ........................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.1 Characteristics ............................................................................... 3-2

3.2 Specifications and Functions ............................................................. 3-3

3.2.1 Specifications ................................................................................ 3-3
3.2.2 Profile........................................................................................... 3-5
3.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals ............................................................... 3-6
3.2.4 Control Registers ........................................................................... 3-6
3.2.5 Functions ...................................................................................... 3-8
3.2.6 Wiring ........................................................................................ 3-12
3.2.7 LED Indicators ............................................................................. 3-13

3.3 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft ..................................................................... 3-14

3.3.1 Initial Setting .............................................................................. 3-14
3.3.2 Checking the Version of a Module................................................... 3-17
3.3.3 Online Mode ................................................................................ 3-18
3.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File ............................................. 3-19
3.3.5 Parameters ................................................................................. 3-20

3.4 Troubleshooting .............................................................................. 3-23

3.4.1 Error Codes ................................................................................. 3-23
3.4.2 Troubleshooting Procedure ............................................................ 3-23

3-1
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

3.1 Overview
An analog output module receives four 12-bit blocks of digital data from a CPU module. The module converts

the digital data into analog signals (voltage or current).

3.1.1 Characteristics
(1) Select a module based on its practical application.

AS04DA-A: Has four channels. A channel can send either voltage or current output.

(2) High-speed conversion

_3
Digital signals are converted to analog signals at a rate of 2 ms per channel.

(3) High accuracy

Conversion accuracy: The error range for both voltage output and current output is ±0.2% at ambient

temperature of 25° C.

(4) Use the utility software to configure the module.

The HWCONFIG utility software is built into ISPSoft. You can set modes and parameters directly in

HWCONFIG without spending time writing programs to set registers to manage functions.

3-2
 Ch a pt er 3 A na l o g O u tp ut M o du l e A S 0 4D A

3.2 Specifications and Functions

3.2.1 Specifications
 Electrical specifications
Module Name AS04DA-A

Number of Outputs 4

Analog-to-Digital
Voltage input/Current input
Conversion

Supply Voltage 24 VDC (20.4 VDC–28.8 VDC) (-15% to +20%)

3_
Connector Type Removable terminal block

Conversion Time 2 ms/channel

An analog circuit is isolated from a digital circuit by a digital integrated circuit/

optocoupler, but the analog channels are not isolated from one another.
Isolation between a digital circuit and a ground: 500 VDC
Isolation
Isolation between an analog circuit and a ground: 500 VDC
Isolation between an analog circuit and a digital circuit: 500 VDC
Isolation between the 24 VDC and a ground: 500 VDC

Weight 145 g

 Functional specifications
Analog-to-Digital
Voltage Output
Conversion

Rated Output Range ±10 V 0 V~10 V ±5 V 0 V~5 V 1 V~5 V

Analog to Digital K-32000 K-32000 K0 K0

~ K0~K32000 ~ ~ ~
Conversion Range K32000 K32000 K32000 K32000

Hardware Output Range -10.1V~10.1V -0.1V~10.1V -5.05V~5.05V -0.05V~5.05V 0.95V~5.05V

Error Rate
±0.2%
(Room Temperature)

Error Rate (Full

±0. 5%
Temperature Range)

Linearity error
±0.05%
(Room Temperature)

Linearity error (Full

±0.05%
Temperature Range)

Hardware Resolution 12 bits

3-3
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Analog-to-Digital
Voltage Output
Conversion

Output Impedance ≧1 kΩ ≧500 Ω

Analog-to-Digital Conversion Current Output

Rated Output Range 0 mA–20 mA 4 mA–20 mA

K0
Analog to Digital Conversion ~
Range K32000
_3
Hardware Output Range -0.2 mA to +20.2 mA 3.8 mA–20.2 mA

Error Rate
±0.2%
(Room Temperature)

Error Rate
±0.5%
(Full Temperature Range)

Linearity Error (Room

±0.03%
Temperature)

Linearity error (Full

±0.03%
Temperature Range)

Hardware Resolution 12 bits

Output Impedance ≦550 Ω

3-4
 Ch a pt er 3 A na l o g O u tp ut M o du l e A S 0 4D A

3.2.2 Profile
38.2 95

04DA 1
7
7
VO1 VO2
P WR
IO1 IO2

AG AG E RR 2

98.3
D A

88
SLD SLD

VO3 VO4

IO3 IO4
3
8 AG AG

SLD SLD

24V

0V
4
9 5 3_
6 75
35

unit: mm

Number Name Description

1 Model Name Model name of the module

Status of the power supply

POWER LED Indicator ON: the power is on.

OFF: the power is off.

Error status of the module

ON: a serious error exists in the module.

2 ERROR LED Indicator
OFF: the module is operating normally.

Blinking: a minor error exists in the module.

Analog-to-digital conversion status

Analog to Digital
Blinking: conversion is in process.
Conversion Indicator
OFF: conversion has stopped.

Removable Terminal
3 Outputs are connected to loads to be driven.
Block

Arrangement of the
4 Arrangement of the terminals
Input/Output Terminals

5 Terminal Block Clip For removing the terminal block

6 DIN Rail Clip Secures the module onto the DIN rail

7 Module Connecting Set Connects the modules

8 Ground Clip

9 Label Nameplate

3-5
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

3.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals

AS04DA-A

04DA

VO1 VO2
P WR
IO1 IO2

AG AG E RR

_3
D A
SLD SLD

VO3 VO4

IO3 IO4

AG AG

SLD SLD

24V

0V

3.2.4 Control Registers

*If you use HWCONFIG to set values in CRs, once the set value is downloaded, the values can be retained in

the module; however if you use TO instruction to write data into CRs, the values CANNOT be retained, after

power failure or after transition of the CPU from STOP to RUN.

Note: The attribute of the CR must be W (write) to use TO instruction.

CR# Name Description Atr. Defaults

0: integer format
0 Format Setup R 0
1: floating-point format

0: closed
1 Channel 1 mode setup R/W
1: -10 V to +10 V (default)

2: 0 V–10 V
2 Channel 2 mode setup R/W
3: -5 V to +5 V
1
4: 0 V–5 V
3 Channel 3 mode setup R/W
5: 1 V–5 V

6: 0 mA–20 mA
4 Channel 4 mode setup R/W
7: 4 mA–20 mA

5 Channel 1 offset Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 0

3-6
 Ch a pt er 3 A na l o g O u tp ut M o du l e A S 0 4D A

CR# Name Description Atr. Defaults

6 Channel 2 offset

7 Channel 3 offset

8 Channel 4 offset

9 Channel 1 gain

10 Channel 2 gain
Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 1000
11 Channel 3 gain

12 Channel 4 gain
3_
Retaining an output
13
sent by channel 1

Retaining an output 0: when the PLC stops, the value of the analog output
14
sent by channel 2 is reset to 0.
R/W 0
Retaining an output 1: when the PLC stops, the value of the analog output
15
sent by channel 3 is retained.

Retaining an output
16
sent by channel 4

Refreshing the time for

17 an output sent by 0
channel 1

Refreshing the time for

Range: 10–3200 (100 ms–32000 ms)
18 an output sent by 0
Unit: 10 ms
channel 2
Any value less than 10 is processed as 0. Any value R/W
Refreshing the time for
larger than 3200 is processed as 3200.
19 an output sent by 0
Set the value to 0 to disable this function.
channel 3

Refreshing the time for

20 an output sent by 0

channel 4
21 When the format is set to integer in HWCONFIG, the R
The minimum scale
-10.0
range for channel 1
22 scale range is invalid. R

23 The minimum scale For analog-digital modules, it is much more convenient R

-10.0
24 range for channel 2 R
if the system can convert digital values to floating-point

25 The minimum scale values for earier understanding. Here you can set the R
-10.0
26 range for channel 3 minimum and maximum scale ranges of corresponding R

27 The minimum scale floating-point values for channels. R -10.0

3-7
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

CR# Name Description Atr. Defaults

28 range for channel 4 For example, if the scale range for an analog to digital R

29 The maximum scale input channel is ±10.0 V, it indicates the maximum R

10.0
30 range for channel 1 value is +10.0 V and the minimum value is -10.0 V. R

31 The maximum scale If the scale range for an analog to digital input channel R
10.0
32 range for channel 2 is 4 mA ~ 20 mA. It indicates the maximum value is 20 R
mA and the minimum value is 4 mA.
33 The maximum scale R
10.0
34 range for channel 3 Note: You can use PLC instruction DSCLP (API0217) R
and set SM685 to ON to use floating-point operations
_3 35
The maximum scale
R
range for channel 4 when a conversion range needs to edit. 10.0
36 R

0: warning

1: alarm

37 Channel alarm setup bit0: error in the power supply R/W 0

bit1: error in the module hardware

bit2: error in calibration

3.2.5 Functions

Item Function Description

Enable/Disable a 1. Enable or disable a channel.

1
Channel 2. If a channel is disabled, the total conversion time decreases.

2 Calibration Calibrate a linear curve.

When a module stops running, the system can retain the signal sent by the
3 Retain an Output
module.

Refresh Time for an Refresh the analog output value according to the value of the fixed slope.
4
Output

5 Scale Range You can set the scale range when the format is floating-point.

3-8
 Ch a pt er 3 A na l o g O u tp ut M o du l e A S 0 4D A

1. Enable/Disable a Channel

An analog signal is converted into a digital signal at a rate of 2 ms per channel. The total conversion time is

2 ms X (the number of channels). If a channel is not used, you can disable it to decrease the total

conversion time.

2. Calibration

To make a curve meet specific needs, calibrate the curve by changing the offset and the gain. The

calibration range depends on the range of inputs that the hardware can receive. The formula is:

3_

Example:

A channel receives voltage inputs between -10.0 V to +10.0 V. The gain is 1000, and the offset is 0. The

corresponding value for the original signal -10.0 V to +10.0 V is -32000 to +32000. If you change the offset to -

100, the calibrated value for the original signal -10.0 V to +10.0 V becomes -31900 to +32100.

Original signals
1 0V S igna ls aft er t he ca libration

-32 000 -31900

3200 0 32100
Digita l v alue (X)

-10V

Voltag e (Y)
Analog s ig nal

3-9
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

3. Retain an Output

When a module stops running, the system can retain the signal sent by the module.

The output is retained:

Input si gnal

_3 Output signal

Module s tops runni ng Tim e

The output is not retained:

Anal og si gnal

Output signal

Modul e stops r unning Tim e

3-10
 Ch a pt er 3 A na l o g O u tp ut M o du l e A S 0 4D A

4. Refresh time for an Output

Set the refresh time for an output and the system updates the value of the slope (m) accordingly.

Anal og si gnal

Max imum output

3_

Mi ni mum output Time

When the analog output signal changes, the system updates the value of the analog output according to the

value set in the slope, as shown in the image below.

Analog si gnal

Time

3 - 11
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

5. Scale Range

You can set the scale range when the format is floating-point. The analog output mode of a channel has a

corresponding digital range. Digital values correspond to analog outputs sent by the module. For example, if

the analog range is -10 V to +10 V, the digital range is -10.0 to +10.0, the HSP scale is 10.0, and the LSP

scale is -10.0. The digital values -10.0 to +10.0 correspond to the analog values -10 V to +10 V, as the

example below shows.

Analog value

10 V

_3
Rated output range

-10 V
Digital value
-10.0 10.0
Scale range
3.2.6 Wiring
 Precautions

To ensure the digital-to-analog module functions well and reliably, the external wiring must prevent noise.

(1) To prevent a surge and induction, the AC cable and the output signal cables that are connected to the

AS04DA-A must be separate cables.

(2) Do not install or bound the cable to a main circuit, a high-voltage cable, or a cable connected to a
load that is not a PLC.

(3) Ground shielded cables and hermetically sealed cables separately.

(4) Terminals with insulation sleeves cannot be arranged as a terminal block, so you should cover the

terminals with insulation tubes.

(5) Connect 24 to 22 AWG (1 mm) wires to the input/output terminals. The plastic jackets that are

removed from the cables should be 8 mm to 10 mm long. The specifications for the terminals and the

wiring of the terminals are shown below. Use only copper leads that can resist temperatures above

60° C /75° C.

< 1mm 8-10mm 24-22AWG

(6) Note: use cables with the same length (less than 200 m) and use wire resistance of less than 100

ohm.

3-12
 Ch a pt er 3 A na l o g O u tp ut M o du l e A S 0 4D A

 External wiring

Voltage output
- 10V~+1 0V *4
CHX
VO1 CH1
*2
IO1
AC m otor driv e, Shielded c able* 1 AG
AG
recorder, SL D
proportioning v alv e

Current output *4
CHX
0 mA ~20 mA
VO4 CH4
IO4 3_
AG
AG
AC motor driv e, Shielded cable*1 SLD
recorder,
proporti oni ng v al ve *3
FE

+15 V
0V DC/DC
24VDC AG
2 4V C on ve rte r
-15V

*1. Use shielded cables to isolate the analog input signal cable from other power cables.

*2. If variability in the input voltage results in interference within the wiring, connect the module to a capacitor

having a capacitance between 0.1–0.47 μF and a working voltage of 25 V.

*3. Connect the SLD to FE, and connect both the FE and the terminal to the ground terminal.

*4. Every channel can operate with the wiring presented above.

3-13
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

3.2.7 LED Indicators

Number Name Description

Operating status of the module

1 RUN LED Indicator ON: the module is running.

OFF: the module is not running.

Error status of the module

ON: a serious error exists in the module.

2 ERROR LED Indicator
OFF: the module is operating normally.
_3
Blink: a minor error exists in the module.

Digital-to-analog conversion status

Digital to Analog
3 Blinking: conversion is in process.
Conversion Indicator
OFF: conversion has stopped.

3.3 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft

3.3.1 Initial Setting

(1) Start ISPSoft and double-click HWCONFIG.

3-14
 Ch a pt er 3 A na l o g O u tp ut M o du l e A S 0 4D A

(2) Select a module and drag it to the working area.

3_

(3) Double-click the module in the working area to open the Device Setting page.

3-15
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

_3

(4) Choose a parameter, set the values, and click OK.

3-16
 Ch a pt er 3 A na l o g O u tp ut M o du l e A S 0 4D A

(5) Click Download on the toolbar to download the parameters. Note you cannot download the parameters
cannot be downloaded.

3_

3.3.2 Checking the Version of a Module

(1) On the Option menu, click Online Mode.

3-17
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(2) Double-click the module to open the Device Setting page. The versions of both the firmware and the
hardware are displayed.

_3

3.3.3 Online Mode

(1) On the Option menu, click Online Mode.

3-18
 Ch a pt er 3 A na l o g O u tp ut M o du l e A S 0 4D A

(2) Right-click the module and click on Module Status.

(3) View the module status.

3_

3.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File

(1) Click Export in the Device Settings dialog box to save the current parameters as a CSV file (.csv).

3-19
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(2) Click Import in the Device Settings dialog box and select a CSV file to import save parameters.

_3

3.3.5 Parameters
(1) The output formats of the channels

3-20
 Ch a pt er 3 A na l o g O u tp ut M o du l e A S 0 4D A

(2) The CH1–CH4 (channel 1–channel 4) mode settings

3_

(3) The CH1–CH4 calibration settings

3-21
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(4) The output settings

_3

(5) The alarm settings

3-22
 Ch a pt er 3 A na l o g O u tp ut M o du l e A S 0 4D A

3.4 Troubleshooting
3.4.1 Error Codes

Error D  A LED ERROR LED

Description
Code Indicator Indicator

16#1605 Hardware failure OFF ON

16#1607 The external voltage is abnormal. OFF ON

16#1608 The factory calibration is abnormal. OFF ON

16#1801 The external voltage is abnormal. OFF Blinking 3_

16#1802 Hardware failure OFF Blinking

16#1804 The factory calibration is abnormal. OFF Blinking

Blinking once

or twice and

after 2
- When power-on, the module is not detected by CPU module. OFF
seconds, it

blinks

repeatedly

3.4.2 Troubleshooting Procedure

Description Procedure

Ensure the external 24 V power supply to the module is

The external voltage is abnormal.
functioning normally.

Hardware failure Return the module to the factory for repair.

Internal error
Contact the factory.
The factory calibration is abnormal.

When power-on, the module is not detected by Check if the connection between module and CPU

CPU module. module is working. If not, connect again.

3-23
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

MEMO

_3

3-24
 4
Chapter 4 Analog Input/Output Module
AS06XA

Table of Contents
4.1 Overview ........................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.1 Characteristics .............................................................................. 4-2

4.2 Specifications and Functions ............................................................. 4-3

4.2.1 Specifications ............................................................................... 4-3
4.2.2 Profile ......................................................................................... 4-6
4.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals .............................................................. 4-7
4.2.4 Control Registers .......................................................................... 4-8
4.2.5 Functions ................................................................................... 4-13
4.2.6 Wiring ....................................................................................... 4-20
4.2.7 LED Indicators ............................................................................ 4-22

4.3 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft ..................................................................... 4-23

4.3.1 Initial Setting ............................................................................. 4-23
4.3.2 Checking the Version of a Module .................................................. 4-26
4.3.3 Online Mode ............................................................................... 4-27
4.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File............................................. 4-28
4.3.5 Parameters ................................................................................ 4-29

4.4 Troubleshooting .............................................................................. 4-33

4.4.1 Error Codes ................................................................................ 4-33
4.4.2 Troubleshooting Procedure ........................................................... 4-34

4-1
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

4.1 Overview
This chapter describes the specifications for the analog input/output module, its operation, and its

programming. On the analog input/output module, four channels receive analog signals (voltage or current),

and converts those signals into 16-bit digital signals. In addition, the analog input/output module receives two

blocks of 16-bit digital data from a CPU module, and converts the digital data into analog signals (voltage or

current). The analog input/output module sends the analog signals by two channels

4.1.1 Characteristics
(1) Use the AS06XA-A analog input/output module, based on its practical application.

CH1–CH4: A channel can receive either voltage or current inputs.

CH5–CH6: A channel can send either voltage or current outputs.

_4 (2) High-speed conversion

The conversion rate is 2 ms per channel.

(3) High accuracy

Conversion accuracy: At ambient temperature of 25° C.

Input: The error range for both voltage and current input is ±0.2%.

Output: The error range for both voltage and current output is ±0.02%.

(4) Use the utility software to configure the module.

The HWCONFIG utility software is built into ISPSoft. You can set modes and parameters directly in

HWCONFIG without spending time writing programs to set registers to manage functions.

4-2
 Ch ap te r 4 Ana lo g In pu t/O u tput Mo du le AS06 XA

4.2 Specifications and Functions

4.2.1 Specifications
 Electrical specifications

Module Name AS06XA-A

Number of Analog 4 inputs

Inputs/Outputs 2 outputs

Analog-to-Digital
Voltage input/Current input/Voltage output/Current output
Conversion

Supply Voltage 24 VDC (20.4–28.8 VDC) (-15% to +20%)

Connector Type Removable terminal block

Conversion Time 2ms/channel 4_

An analog circuit is isolated from a digital circuit by a digital integrated circuit/
optocoupler, but the analog channels are not isolated from one another.
Isolation between a digital circuit and the ground: 500 VDC
Isolation
Isolation between an analog circuit and the ground: 500 VDC
Isolation between an analog circuit and a digital circuit: 500 VDC
Isolation between the 24 VDC and the ground: 500 VDC

Weight 145 g

 Functional specifications for the analog-to-digital conversion

Analog-to-Digital
Voltage Input
Conversion

Rated Input Range -10 V ~ +10 V 0 V ~ 10 V ±5 V 0V~5V 1V~5V

Rated Digital Conversion K-32000 K0 K-32000 K0 K0

~ ~ ~ ~ ~
Range K32000 K32000 K32000 K32000 K32000
-10.12V -0.12V -5.06V -0.06V 0.95V
Hardware Input Limit*1 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
10.12V 10.12V 5.06V 5.06V 5.05V

Digital Conversion K-32384 K-384 K-32384 K-384 K-384

~ ~ ~ ~ ~
Limit*2 K32384 K32384 K32384 K32384 K32384

Error Rate Room Temperature: ±0.2% ; Full Temperature Range: ±0.5%

Hardware Resolution 16 bits

Input Impedance 2MΩ

4-3
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

Analog-to-Digital
Voltage Input
Conversion

Absolute Input Range*3 ±15 V

*1: If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, the module only shows the maximum value. If the

input signal is below the lower limit, it only shows the minimum value.

*2: If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, it also exceeds the digital conversion limit and a

conversion limit error appears. For example in the voltage input mode (-10 V to +10 V), when the input signal

is 10.15 V, exceeding the hardware upper limit, it also exceeds the conversion upper limit. The module uses

the upper limit value (32384) as the input signal and a conversion limit error appears.

*3: If an input signal exceeds the absolute range, it might damage the channel.

_4
Analog-to-Digital
Current Input
Conversion

Rated Input Range ±20 mA 0 mA–20 mA 4 mA–20 mA

Rated Digital K-32000 K0 K0

~ ~ ~
Conversion Range K+2000 K32000 K32000

Hardware Input
-20.24 mA ~ 20.24 mA -0.24 mA ~ 20.24 mA 3.81 mA ~ 20.19 mA
Limit*1

Digital Conversion K-32384 K-384 K-384

~ ~ ~
Limit*2 K32384 K32384 K32384

Error Rate Room Temperature: ±0.2% ; Full Temperature Range: ±0.5%

Hardware Resolution 16 bits

Input Impedance 250Ω

Absolute Input
±32 mA
Range*3

*1: If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, the module only shows the maximum value. If the

input signal is below the lower limit, it only shows the minimum value.

*2: If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, it also exceeds the digital conversion limit and a

conversion limit error appears. For example in the voltage input mode (4 mA to 20 mA), when the input signal

is 0 mA, exceeding the hardware upper limit, it also exceeds the conversion upper limit. The module uses the

upper limit value (-384) as the input signal and a conversion limit error appears.

*3: If an input signal exceeds the absolute range, it might damage the channel.

4-4
 Ch ap te r 4 Ana lo g In pu t/O u tput Mo du le AS06 XA

 Functional specifications for the digital-to-analog conversion

Digital-to-Analog
Voltage Output
Conversion

Rated Output Range ±10 V 0 ~ 10 V ±5 V 0~5V 1~5V

Analog to Digital K-32000 K0 K-32000 K0 K0

~ ~ ~ ~ ~
Conversion Range K32000 K32000 K32000 K32000 K32000
-10.1 V -0.1 V -5.05 V -0.05 V 0.95
Hardware Output Range ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
+10.1 V 10.1 V +5.05 V +5.05 V 5.05 V

Error Rate
±0.2%
(Room Temperature)

Error Range
±0.5%
(Full temperature range) 4_
Linearity Error
±0.05%
(Room Temperature)

Linearity Error
±0.05%
(Full Temperature Range)

Hardware Resolution 12 bits

Permissible load
≧1kΩ ≧500Ω
impedance

Digital-to-Analog
Current Output
Conversion

Rated Output Range 0–20 mA 4–20 mA

K0 K0
Analog to Digital ~ ~
Conversion Range K32000 K32000

Hardware Output Range -0.2 mA to 20.2 mA 3.8–20.2 mA

Error Range
±0.2%
(Room Temperature)

Error Range
±0.5%
(Full Temperature Range)

Linearity Error
±0.03%
(Room Temperature)

4-5
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

Linearity Error
±0.10%
(Full Temperature Range)

Hardware Resolution 12 bits

Permissible Load
≦550 Ω
Impedance

4.2.2 Profile

38.2 95

1
7
7

2
98.3

_4
88

8 3

4
9
5
6 75
35

Unit: mm

Number Name Description

1 Model Name Model name of the module

Operating status of the module

RUN LED Indicator ON: the module is running.

OFF: the module is not running.

Error status of the module

ON: a serious error exists in the module.

2 ERROR LED Indicator
OFF: the module is operating normally.

Blink: a minor error exists in the module.

Digital-to-analog conversion status

Digital to Analog
Blinking: conversion is in process.
Conversion Indicator
OFF: conversion has stopped.

Inputs are connected to transducers.

3 Removable Terminal Block
Outputs are connected to loads to be driven.

4 Arrangement of the Arrangement of the terminals

4-6
 Ch ap te r 4 Ana lo g In pu t/O u tput Mo du le AS06 XA

Number Name Description

Input/Output Terminals

5 Clip For removing the terminal block

6 DIN Rail Clip Secures the module onto the DIN rail

7 Module Connecting Set Connects the modules

8 Ground Clip

9 Label Nameplate

4.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals

AS06XA-A

4_
06X A

V1+ V2+
P WR
I1+ I2+

VI1- VI2- E RR
A D
V3+ V4+

I3+ I4+

VI3- VI4 -

VO1 VO2

IO1 IO2

AG 24V

0V

4-7
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

4.2.4 Control Registers

*If you use HWCONFIG to set values in CRs, once the set value is downloaded, the values can be retained in

the module; however if you use TO instruction to write data into CRs, the values CANNOT be retained, after

power failure or after transition of the CPU from STOP to RUN.

Note: The attribute of the CR must be W (write) to use TO instruction.

CR# Name Description Atr. Defaults

0: integer format
0 Format Setup R 0
1: floating point format

0: closed
1 Input channel 1 mode setup
1: -10 V to +10 V (default)

2: 0–10 V
2 Input channel 2 mode setup
3: -5 to +5 V
_4 R/W 1
4: 0–5 V
3 Input channel 3 mode setup
5: 1–5 V

6: 0–20 mA

4 Input channel 4 mode setup 7: 4–20 mA

8: -20 mA to +20 mA
5 Input channel 1 offset

6 Input channel 2 offset

Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 0
7 Input channel 3 offset

8 Input channel 4 offset

9 Input channel 1 gain

10 Input channel 2 gain

Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 1000
11 Input channel 3 gain

12 Input channel 4 gain

Input channel 1 average

13
times

Input channel 2 average

14
times
Range: 1–100 R/W 10
Input channel 3 average
15
times

Input channel 4 average

16
times

17 Input channel 1 filter R/W 1

4-8
 Ch ap te r 4 Ana lo g In pu t/O u tput Mo du le AS06 XA

CR# Name Description Atr. Defaults

average percentage

Input channel 2 filter Range: 0–3

18
average percentage Unit: ±10%
Input channel 3 filter 1: ±10%
19
average percentage 2: ±20%

Input channel 4 filter 3: ±30%

20
average percentage

0: 2 ms

1: 4 ms

2: 10 ms

3: 15 ms
4_
4: 20 ms

Input channel sampling 5: 30 ms

21 cycle 6: 40 ms R/W 0

(sampling/integration time)
7: 50 ms

8: 60 ms

9: 70 ms

10: 80 ms

11: 90 ms
12: 100 ms

0: open channel alarm

1: close channel alarm

bit0: channel 1

bit1: channel 2

bit2: channel 3

bit3: channel 4
22 Input channel alarm setup R/W 0

0: warning

1: alarm

bit8: error in the power supply

bit9: error in the module hardware

bit10: error in calibration

4-9
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

CR# Name Description Atr. Defaults

0: closed
Output channel 1 mode 1: -10 V to +10 V (default)
23
setup
2: 0–10 V

3: -5 V to +5 V R/W
1
4: 0–5 V
Output channel 2 mode 5: 1–5 V
24
setup 6: 0–20 mA

7: 4–20 mA

25 Output channel 1 offset

Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 0
26 Output channel 2 offset

_4 27 Output channel 1 gain

Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 1000
28 Output channel 2 gain

Retain the output sent by 0: When the PLC stops, the value of the
29
channel 1 analog output is reset to 0.
R/W 0
Retain the output sent by 1: When the PLC stops, the value of the
30
channel 2 analog output is retained.

Refresh the time for Range: 10–3200 (100 ms–32000 ms)

31 R/W 0
output sent by channel 1 Unit: 10 ms

Any value less than 10 is read as 0. Any value

Refreshing the time for an
32 larger than 3200 is read as 3200. R/W 0
output sent by channel 2
Set the value to 0 to disable this function.

33 The minimum scale range

When the format is set to integer in -10.0
34 for input channel 1
HWCONFIG, the scale range is invalid.
35 The minimum scale range For analog-digital modules, it is much more -10.0
36 for input channel 2 convenient if the system can convert digital
37 The minimum scale range values to floating-point values for earier
-10.0
38 for input channel 3 understanding. Here you can set the minimum
R
39 The minimum scale range and maximum scale ranges of corresponding
-10.0
40 for input channel 4 floating-point values for channels.

41 The minimum scale range For example, if the scale range for an analog
-10.0
42 for output channel 1 to digital input channel is ±10.0 V, it indicates

43 the maximum value is +10.0 V and the

The minimum scale range
minimum value is -10.0 V. -10.0
44 for output channel 2

4-10
 Ch ap te r 4 Ana lo g In pu t/O u tput Mo du le AS06 XA

CR# Name Description Atr. Defaults

45 The maximum scale range If the scale range for an analog to digital input
10.0
46 for input channel 1 channel is 4 mA ~ 20 mA. It indicates the

47 The maximum scale range maximum value is 20 mA and the minimum

10.0
48 for input channel 2 value is 4 mA.

49 The maximum scale range Note: You can use PLC instruction DSCLP
10.0
for input channel 3 (API0217) and set SM685 to ON to use
50
floating-point operations when a conversion
51 The maximum scale range
range needs to edit. 10.0
52 for input channel 4

53 The maximum scale range

10.0
54 for output channel 1

55 The maximum scale range

56 for output channel 2

10.0 4_
Instructions for peak values

16#0101: record the peak value again for

channel 1

16#0102: record the peak value again for

channel 2

16#0104: record the peak value again for

channel 3

16#0108: record the peak value again for

channel 4

16#010F: record the peak values again for

channels 1–4
201 Instruction Set W 0
16#0201: enable recording for channel 1

16#0202: enable recording for channel 2

16#0204: enable recording for channel 3

16#0208: enable recording for channel 4

16#020F: enable recording for channels 1–4

16#0211: disable recording for channel 1

16#0212: disable recording for channel 2

16#0214: disable recording for channel 3

16#0218: disable recording for channel 4

16#021F: disable recording for channels 1–4

16#0502: restore default settings

4 - 11
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

CR# Name Description Atr. Defaults

The maximum peak value

210
for channel 1

The maximum peak value

211
for channel 2 Integer format; the maximum peak value for
R -
analog inputs
The maximum peak value
212
for channel 3

The maximum peak value

213
for channel 4

The minimum peak value

214
for channel 1

The minimum peak value

215
_4 for channel 2 Integer format; the minimum peak value for
R -
The minimum peak value analog inputs
216
for channel 3

The minimum peak value

217
for channel 4

The time to record for

222
channel 1

The time to record for

223 Unit: 10 ms
channel 2
Range: 1–100 R/W 1
The time to record for Time to record the digital value for the
224
channel 3 channels

The time to record for

225
channel 4

The number of records for

240
channel 1

The number of records for

241
channel 2
Range: 0–500, display the current records R 0
The number of records for
242
channel 3

The number of records for

243
channel 4
4000
Records for channel 1 500 records for channel 1
~4499
R -
4500
Records for channel 2 500 records for channel 2
~4999

4-12
 Ch ap te r 4 Ana lo g In pu t/O u tput Mo du le AS06 XA

CR# Name Description Atr. Defaults

5000
Records for channel 3 500 records for channel 3
~5499
5500
Records for channel 4 500 records for channel 4
~5999

4.2.5 Functions

Set modes of operation and parameters with HWCONFIG utility software built into ISPSoft.

 Analog input

Item Function Description

Enable/Disable a 1. Enable or disable a channel.

1
Channel 2. If a channel is disabled, the total conversion time decreases.

2 Calibration Calibrate a linear curve.

4_
3 Average Conversion values are averaged and filtered.

Disconnection Disconnection detection only operates when the analog range is 4–20
4
Detection mA or 1–5 V.

If an input signal exceeds the range of inputs that the hardware can
Channel Detect and
5 receive, the module produces an alarm or a warning. You can disable
Alarm
this function.

Limit Detections for

6 Save the maximum/minimum values for channels
Channels

Records for
7 Save the analog curves for channels.
Channels

8 Scale Range When the format is floating-point, you can set the scale range.

1. Enable/Disable a Channel

An analog signal is converted into a digital signal at a rate of 2 ms per channel. The total conversion time

is 2 ms X (the number of channels). If a channel is not used, you can disable it to decrease the total

conversion time.

2. Calibration

To make a curve meet specific needs, calibrate the curve by changing the offset and the gain. The

calibration range depends on the range of inputs which can be received by the hardware. The formula is:

4-13
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

Example:

A channel receives voltage inputs between -10.0 V to +10.0 V. The gain is 1000, and the offset is 0. The

corresponding value for the original signal -10.0 V to +10.0 V is -32000 to +32000. If you change the offset to

-100, the calibrated value for the original signal -10.0 V to +10.0 V becomes -31900 to +32100. When the

input voltage is 0 V, the digital value becomes -100. When the input voltage is 10.0 V, the digital value

becomes 32100.

Gain = 1000, Offset = -100

Signals after the calibration

10
Original signals
(X2, Y2)
(10V, 32100)

_4 -10V
10V Voltage (X)
(X1, Y1) Input analog v alue
(0V, 100)

-10

(Y)
Digital value

3. Average

You can set the average value between 1–100. It is a steady value obtained from the sum of the recorded

values. If the recorded values include an acute pulse due to unavoidable external factors, however, you may

observe violent changes in the average value. Use the filtering function to exclude acute pulses from the

sum-up and equalization, so the computed average value is not affected by the acute recorded values. Set

the filter percentage to the range 0–3, where the unit is 10%. If you set the filter range to 0, the system sums

up all the recorded values and divides them to obtain the average value, but if you set the filter range to 1, for

example, the system excludes the bottom 10% and the top 10% of the values and averages only the

remaining values to get the average value. For instantance, set the average value to 100 and set the filter

percentage to 3. When there are 100 pieces of data collected, the system arranges the collected data

according to their values from large to small and then excludes the bottom 30% and top 30% of the values

(60 pieces of data) and averages only the remaining values (40 pieces of data) to obtain the average value.

4-14
 Ch ap te r 4 Ana lo g In pu t/O u tput Mo du le AS06 XA

Quantity
Range for filter percentage

Present measured value

4. Disconnection detection

Disconnection detection only operates when the analog range is 4–20 mA or 1–5 V. If a module which can

receive inputs between 4–20 mA or between 1–5 V is disconnected, the input signal exceeds the range of

allowable inputs, so the module produces an alarm or a warning.

4_

5. Channel Detection

If an input signal exceeds the allowable range of inputs, an error message appears. You can disable this

function so that the module does not produce an alarm or a warning when the input signal exceeds the

input range.

6. Limit detections for channels

This function saves the maximum and minimum values for channels so that you can determine the peak to
peak values.

Valu e o f the chan nel

Maximum valu e

Mini mu m va lue

Time

4-15
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

7. Records for Channels

Record the input values of the cyclic sampling for each channel. The system saves up to 500 data

points and the recording time is 10 ms.

Valu e o f the chan nel

500 records o f d ata

Ti me
Instru cti on for recordi ng Recordin g e nds

_4 8. Scale range

When the format is floating-point, you can set the scale range. The analog output mode of a channel

has a corresponding digital range. Digital values correspond to analog outputs sent by the module. For

example, if the analog range is -10 V to +10 V, the digital range is -10.0 to +10.0, the HSP scale is 10.0,

and the LSP scale is -10.0. The digital values -10.0 to +10.0 correspond to the analog values -10 V to

+10 V, as the example below shows.

Analog value

10 V

Rated output range

-10 V
Digital value
-10.0 10.0
Scale range

4-16
 Ch ap te r 4 Ana lo g In pu t/O u tput Mo du le AS06 XA

 Analog Output

Item Function Description

Enable/Disable a 1. Enable or disable a channel.

1
Channel 2. If a channel is disabled, the total conversion time decreases.

2 Calibration Calibrate a linear curve.

When a module stops running, the system retains the signal sent by the
3 Retain an Output
module.

Refresh Time for an Refresh the analog output value according to the value of the fixed slope.
4
Output

5 Scale Range You can set the scale range when the format is floating-point.

1. Enable/Disable a Channel
4_
An analog signal is converted into a digital signal at a rate of 2 ms per channel. The total conversion time

is 2 ms X (the number of channels). If a channel is not used, you can disable it to decrease the total

conversion time.

2. Calibration

To make a curve meet specific needs, calibrate the curve by changing the offset and the gain. The calibration

range depends on the range of inputs which can be received by the hardware. The formula is:

Example:

A channel receives voltage inputs between -10.0 V to +10.0 V. The gain is 1000, and the offset is 0. The

corresponding value for the original signal -10.0 V to +10.0 V is -32000 to +32000. If you change the offset to

200 and the gain to 1000, the calibrated value for the original signal -10.0 V to +10.0 V is -31800 to +32200.

Original signals
1 0V S igna ls aft er t he ca libration

-32 000 -31800

3200 0 32200
Digita l v alue (X)

-10V

Voltag e (Y)
Analog s ig nal

4-17
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

3. Retain an Output
When a module stops running, the system retains the signal sent by the module.

The output is not retained:

Analog signal

Output signal

_4 Time

4. Refresh Time for an Output

Set the refresh time for an output and the system updates the value of the slope (m) accordingly.
Anal og si gnal

Max imum output

Mi ni mum output Time

4-18
 Ch ap te r 4 Ana lo g In pu t/O u tput Mo du le AS06 XA

When the analog output signal changes, the system updates the value of the analog output according to

the value set in the slope, as shown in the image below.

Analog si gnal

Time

*The output conversion time and the input channel sampling cycle are the same.
4_

5. Scale Range

You can set the scale range when the format is floating-point. The analog output mode of a channel has

a corresponding digital range. Digital values correspond to analog outputs sent by the module. For

example, if the analog range is -10 V to +10 V, the digital range is -10.0 to +10.0, the HSP scale is 10.0,

and the LSP scale is -10.0. The digital values -10.0 to +10.0 correspond to the analog values -10 V to

+10 V, as the example below shows.

Analog value

10 V

Rated output range

-10 V
Digital value
-10.0 10.0
Scale range

4-19
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

4.2.6 Wiring
 Precautions

To ensure the analog-to-digital module functions well and reliably, the external wiring must prevent noise.

Before you install the cables, follow the precautions below.

(1) To prevent a surge and induction, the AC cable and the input signal cables that are connected to the

AS06XA-A must be separate cables.

(2) Do not install the cable near a main circuit, a high-voltage cable, or a cable connected to a load that

is not a PLC. In addition, the cable must not be bound to a main circuit, a high-voltage cable, or a

cable connected to a load which is not a PLC.

(3) Ground shielded cables and hermetically sealed cables separately.

_4 (4) Terminals with insulation sleeves cannot be arranged as a terminal block, so you should cover the

terminals with insulation tubes.

(5) Use single-core cables or twin-core cables with a diameter of 24–22 AWG and with pin-type

connectors smaller than 1 mm. Only use copper conducting wires which can withstand temperatures

of 60° C /75° C or higher.

< 1m m 8-10m m 24-22AWG

(6) Note: use cables with the same length (less than 200 m) and use wire resistance of less than 100

ohm.

(7) Notes on two-wire, three-wire, and four-wire connections:

 Two-wire connection/three-wire connection (passive transducer): connect the transducer and

the analog input module to the same power circuit.

 Four-wire connection (active transducer): the transducer uses an independent power supply, so

do not connect it to the same power circuit as the analog input module.

4-20
 Ch ap te r 4 Ana lo g In pu t/O u tput Mo du le AS06 XA

 External wiring

(1) AS06XA-A

AG
4-w ire: vo lt ag e inp ut *8
-10 V~ +1 0V
Sh ield ed cabl e *1 C HX -I
1M
+ V1 +
+2 4V 25 0 CH 1
- *3 I1+
0V 1M
VI1 -
*6
FE

*8 AG
4-w ire: cu rrent i np ut C HX -I
-20 mA~ + 20 mA Sh ield ed cabl e *1 1M
V 2+
+ *2 25 0 CH2
+ 24 V I2 +
- 1M
0V VI 2-

*6
2-wi re: cur rent in put FE

4 mA ~+ 20 mA
*8 AG
+ 24V Sh ield ed cabl e *1 CH X-I
+ 1M
- *2
V 3+
I3 +
25 0 CH3 4_
1M
0V VI 3-
*6
FE
3-w ir e: vol tage in put
-10 V~ +1 0V Sh ield ed cabl e *1 *8 AG

+2 4V C HX -I
+ 1M
V4 +
2 50 C H4
0V - I 4+
1M
*6 V I4 -

FE
3-w ire: cu rrent i np ut
*8 AG
-2 0m A~ +2 0m A Sh ield ed cabl e *1 C HX -I
+ 2 4V 1M
+ *2 V 1+
2 50 C H1
I1 +
0V - 1M
V I1 -
*6
FE
AC motor dr ive,
rec order, Vol tage o utput
-10 V~+ 1 0V *8
proportioning v alv e C HX-O
VO1 C H5
*5
IO1
AG
Sh ield ed cabl e *4 * 6 AG
FE

AC motor dr ive, *8
rec order, Current output CH X-O
proportioning v alv e 0m A~2 0m A
VO2 CH6
IO2
AG
AG
Sh ield ed cabl e *4 * 6
FE
*7
+1 5V
0V D C /D C
24 VD C AG
24 V C o nv ert er
-15 V

*1. Use shielded cables to isolate the analog input signal cable from other power cables.

*2. If the module is connected to a current signal, the terminals Vn and In+ (n=1–4) must be short-circuited.

*3. If variability in the input voltage results in interference within the wiring, connect the module to a capacitor

having a capacitance between 0.1–0.47 μF and a working voltage of 25 V.

4-21
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

*4. Connect the shielded cable to the terminal FE and to the ground terminal.

*5. Connect the terminal to the ground terminal.

*6. The wording “CHX-I” indicates that you can use those five wiring methods for every input channel. The

wording “CHX-O” indicates that you can use those two wiring methods for every output channel.

4.2.7 LED Indicators

Number Name Description

Operating status of the module

1 RUN LED Indicator ON: the module is running.

OFF: the module is not running.

Error status of the module

_4
ERROR LED ON: a serious error exists in the module.
2
Indicator OFF: the module is operating normally.

Blink: a minor error exists in the module.

Digital to Analog Digital-to-analog conversion status

3 Conversion Blinking: conversion is in process.

Indicator OFF: conversion has stopped.

4-22
 Ch ap te r 4 Ana lo g In pu t/O u tput Mo du le AS06 XA

4.3 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft

4.3.1 Initial Setting

(1) Start ISPSoft and double-click HWCONFIG.

4_

(2) Select a module and drag it to the working area.

4-23
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

(3) Double-click the module in the working area to open the Device Setting page.

_4

4-24
 Ch ap te r 4 Ana lo g In pu t/O u tput Mo du le AS06 XA

(4) Choose the parameter, set the values, and click OK.

4_

(5) Click Download on the toolbar to download the parameters. Note that you cannot download the
parameters while the CPU module is running.

4-25
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

4.3.2 Checking the Version of a Module

(1) On the Option menu, click Online Mode.

_4

(2) Double-click the module to open the Device Setting page. The versions of both the firmware and the

hardware are displayed.

4-26
 Ch ap te r 4 Ana lo g In pu t/O u tput Mo du le AS06 XA

4.3.3 Online Mode

(1) On the Option menu, click Online Mode.

4_

(2) Right-click the module and click Module Status.

(3) View the module status.

4-27
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

4.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File

(1) Click Export in the Device Settings dialog box to save the current parameters as a CSV file (.csv).

_4

(2) Click Import in the Device Settings dialog box and select a CSV file to import saved parameters.

4-28
 Ch ap te r 4 Ana lo g In pu t/O u tput Mo du le AS06 XA

4.3.5 Parameters
(1) The input modes of the channels

4_

(2) Input CH1–CH4 (channel 1–channel 4) mode settings

4-29
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

(3) Input CH1–CH4 calibration

_4

(4) Input average filter

4-30
 Ch ap te r 4 Ana lo g In pu t/O u tput Mo du le AS06 XA

(5) Input sampling time

4_

(6) Input channel detection and alarm settings

4-31
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

(7) Output CH1-CH2 mode settings

_4

(8) Output CH1-2 calibration

4-32
 Ch ap te r 4 Ana lo g In pu t/O u tput Mo du le AS06 XA

(9) Output Settings

4_

4.4 Troubleshooting
4.4.1 Error Codes

Error A↔ D LED ERROR LED

Description
Code indicator indicator

16#1605 Hardware failure OFF ON

16#1607 The external voltage is abnormal. OFF ON

16#1608 The factory calibration is abnormal. OFF ON

16#1801 The external voltage is abnormal. OFF Blinking

16#1802 Hardware failure OFF Blinking

16#1804 The factory calibration is abnormal. OFF Blinking

The signal received by channel 1 exceeds the range of inputs

16#1808
that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 2 exceeds the range of inputs that

16#1809
the hardware can receive. Run: blinking
Blinking
The signal received by channel 3 exceeds the range of inputs that Stop: OFF
16#180A
the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 4 exceeds the range of inputs that

16#180B
the hardware can receive.

4-33
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

Error A↔ D LED ERROR LED

Description
Code indicator indicator

Blinking once

or twice and

after 2
- When power-on, the module is not detected by CPU module. OFF
seconds, it

blinks

repeatedly

4.4.2 Troubleshooting Procedure

Description Procedure
_4 Ensure the external 24 V power supply to the module is
The external voltage is abnormal.
functioning normally.

Hardware failure Return the module to the factory for repair.

Internal error
Contact the factory.
The factory calibration is abnormal.

The signal received by channel 1 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 1
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 2 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 2.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 3 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 3.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 4 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 4.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

When power-on, the module is not detected by Check if the connection between module and CPU

CPU module. module is working. If not, connect again.

4-34
 5
Chapter 5 Temperature Measurement
Module AS04/06RTD
Table of Contents
5.1 Overview ............................................................................................... 5-2
5.1.1 Characteristics ............................................................................... 5-2
5.1.2 Characteristics ............................................................................... 5-2

5.2 Specifications and Functions.................................................................. 5-3

5.2.1 Specifications ................................................................................ 5-3
5.2.2 Profile........................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals ............................................................... 5-6
5.2.4 AS04RTD Control Registers ............................................................. 5-7
5.2.5 AS06RTD Control Registers ........................................................... 5-10
5.2.6 Functions .................................................................................... 5-15
5.2.7 Control Mode ............................................................................... 5-18
5.2.8 Wiring ........................................................................................ 5-18
5.2.9 LED Indicators ............................................................................. 5-21

5.3. HWCONFIG in ISPSoft ......................................................................... 5-21

5.3.1 Initial Setting. .................................................................................. 5-21
5.3.2 Checking the Version of a Module........................................................ 5-24
5.3.3 Online Mode ..................................................................................... 5-25
5.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File .................................................. 5-26
5.3.5 Parameters ...................................................................................... 5-27

5.4 Troubleshooting ................................................................................... 5-30

5.4.1 Error Codes ...................................................................................... 5-30
5.4.2 Troubleshooting Procedure ................................................................. 5-31
5.4.3 State of the Connection ..................................................................... 5-32

5-1
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

5.1 Overview
5.1.1 Characteristics
This section describes the specifications for temperature measurement modules, their operation, and their

programming. The AS04/06RTD is a temperature measurement module that converts the temperatures

received from four/six thermocouples into digital signals. You can select either Celsius or Fahrenheit as the

unit of measurement.

5.1.2 Characteristics
(1) Select a sensor based on its practical application.

Pt100/Ni100/Pt1000/Ni1000/JPt100/LG-Ni1000/Cu50/Cu100/0–300 Ω/0–3000 Ω sensor

(2) High-speed conversion

Two-wire/Three-wire configuration: 200 ms/channel

(3) High accuracy

_5 Conversion accuracy: The error range of the input is ±0.1% at ambient temperature of 25° ±5° C.)

(4) Disconnection detection

When a sensor is disconnected, the AS04RTD produces an alarm or a warning.

(5) PID control

An object’s temperature can be maintained through PID control actions.

(6) Use the utility software to configure the module.

The HWCONFIG utility software is built into ISPSoft. You can set modes and parameters directly in

HWCONFIG without spending time writing programs to set registers to manage functions.

5-2
 Ch a pt er 5 Tem per at ur e M eas ur em ent Mo d u l e A S 0 4/ 0 6RT D

5.2 Specifications and Functions

5.2.1 Specifications
 Electrical specifications

Module AS04RTD-A AS06RTD-A

Number of Analog
4 6
Inputs

2-Wire & 3-Wire Pt100/Ni100/Pt1000/Ni1000/JPt100/LG-Ni1000/Cu50/Cu100/0–

300 Ω/0–3000 Ω

Pt100: DIN 43760-1980 JIS C1604-1989; 100 Ω 3850 PPM/°C

Pt1000: DIN EN60751; 1 kΩ 3850 PPM/°C

Applicable Sensor
Ni100/Ni1000: DIN 43760

JPt100: JIS C1604-1989

LG-Ni1000

Cu50/Cu100

Supply Voltage 24 VDC (20.4–28.8 VDC) (-15% to +20%)

5_
Connector Type Removable terminal block

Pt100/Ni100/Pt1000/Ni1000/JPt100

25° C/77° F: The allowed error range is ±0.1% of full scale.

-20° C to 60° C/-4° F to 140° F: The allowed error range is ±0.5% of full scale.
Overall Accuracy
LG-Ni1000; 25° C/77° F: The allowed error range is ±0.1% of full scale.

Cu50; 25° C/77° F: The allowed error range is ±4% of full scale.

Cu100; 25° C/77° F: The allowed error range is ±2% of full scale.

Conversion Time Two-wire/Three-wire configuration: 200 ms/channel

An analog circuit is isolated from a digital circuit by a digital integrated circuit/

optocoupler, and the analog channels are isolated from one another by

optocouplers.

Isolation Isolation between a digital circuit and the ground: 500 VDC

Isolation between an analog circuit and the ground: 500 VDC

Isolation between an analog circuit and the digital circuit: 500 VDC

Isolation between the 24 VDC and the ground: 500 VDC

Weight 115 g 125 g

5-3
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

 Functional specifications

Analog-to-Digital
Centigrade (°C) Fahrenheit (°F) Input Impedance
Conversion

Pt100 : -292° F to +1,472° F

Pt100 : -180° C to +800° C Ni100：-112° F to +338° F
Ni100 : -80° C to +170° C
Pt1000：-292° F to +1,472° F
Pt1000 : -180° C to +800° C
Ni1000 : -80° C to +170° C Ni1000：-112° F to +338° F 0–300 Ω
Rated Input Range*1
JPt100 : -180° C to +500° C JPt100：-292° F to +932° F 0–3000 Ω
LG-Ni1000 : -50° C to +180° C LG-Ni1000：-58° F to +356° F
Cu50 : -50° C to +150° C
Cu50：-58° F to +302° F
Cu100 : -50° C to +150° C
Cu100：-58° F to +302° F
Average function Range: 1-100

Self-diagnosis Disconnection detection

*1 If the measured temperature exceeds the upper limit, it only shows the maximum value. If the measured

temperature is below the lower limit, it only shows the minimum value.

5.2.2 Profile

_5 38.2 95

04RT D 1
7 7

2
98.3
88

3
8

4
9
5
6 75
35

Unit: mm

Number Name Description

1 Model Name Model name of the module

Operating status of the module

RUN LED Indicator ON: the module is running.

2 OFF: the module is not running.

ERROR LED Error status of the module

Indicator ON: a serious error exists in the module.

5-4
 Ch a pt er 5 Tem per at ur e M eas ur em ent Mo d u l e A S 0 4/ 0 6RT D

Number Name Description

OFF: the module is operating normally.

Blink: a minor error exists in the module.

Digital-to-Analog Digital-to-analog conversion status

Conversion Blinking: conversion is in process.

Indicator OFF: conversion has stopped.

Removable The inputs are connected to transducers.

3
Terminal Block The outputs are connected to loads to be driven.

Arrangement of the

4 Input/Output Arrangement of the terminals

Yerminals

5 Clip For removing the terminal block

6 DIN Rail Clip Secures the module onto the DIN rail

Module Connecting Connects the modules

7
Set
5_
8 Ground Clip

5-5
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

5.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals

AS04RTD-A AS06RTD-A

0 4R T D 06RTD

L1+ L1- L1+ L1-

PWR P WR
S LD I 1- L2+ L2-

L2+ L2- ERR SLD I12 - E RR

A D A D
S LD I 2- L3+ L3-

L3+ L3- L4+ L4-

S LD I 3- I 56- I34-

L4+ L4- L5+ L5-

S LD I 4- L6+ L6-

24V SLD 24V

0V 0V

_5

5-6
 Ch a pt er 5 Tem per at ur e M eas ur em ent Mo d u l e A S 0 4/ 0 6RT D

5.2.4 AS04RTD Control Registers

*If you use HWCONFIG to set values in CRs, once the set value is downloaded, the values can be retained in

the module; however if you use TO instruction to write data into CRs, the values CANNOT be retained, after

power failure or after transition of the CPU from STOP to RUN.

Note: The attribute of the CR must be W (write) to use TO instruction.

CR# Name Description Atr. Defaults

0: integer format
0 Format Setup R 0
1: floating point format

0: closed
1 Channel 1 mode setup 1：0–300 Ω (default)

2：0–3000 Ω

3：Pt100
2 Channel 2 mode setup
4：JPt100

5：Pt1000 R/W 1

6：Ni100
3 Channel 3 mode setup
7：Ni1000 5_
8：LG-Ni1000

4 Channel 4 mode setup 9：Cu50

10：Cu100

5 Channel 1 offset

6 Channel 2 offset
Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 0
7 Channel 3 offset

8 Channel 4 offset

9 Channel 1 gain

10 Channel 2 gain
Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 1000
11 Channel 3 gain

12 Channel 4 gain

13 Channel 1 average times

14 Channel 2 average times

Range: 1–100 R/W 10
15 Channel 3 average times

16 Channel 4 average times

17 Channel 1 filter average percentage Range: 0–3

R/W 1
18 Channel 2 filter average percentage Unit: ±10%

5-7
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

CR# Name Description Atr. Defaults

19 Channel 3 filter average percentage

20 Channel 4 filter average percentage

0: Fahrenheit
21 Units of temperature R/W 0
1: Celsius

0: open channel alarm

1: close channel alarm

bit0: channel 1

bit1: channel 2

bit2: channel 3

bit3: channel 4
22 Channel alarm setup R/W 0

0: warning

1: alarm

bit8: error in the power supply

_5
bit9: error in the module hardware

bit10: error in calibration

16#0101: record the peak value

again for channel 1

16#0102: record the peak value

again for channel 2

16#0104: record the peak value

again for channel 3

16#0108: record the peak value

again for channel 4

201 Instruction set 16#010F: record the peak values W 0

again for channels 1–4

16#0201: enable recording for

channel 1

16#0202: enable recording for

channel 2

16#0204: enable recording for

channel 3

16#0208: enable recording for

5-8
 Ch a pt er 5 Tem per at ur e M eas ur em ent Mo d u l e A S 0 4/ 0 6RT D

CR# Name Description Atr. Defaults

channel 4

16#020F: enable recording for

channels 1–4

16#0211: disable recording for

channel 1

16#0212: disable recording for

channel 2

16#0214: disable recording for

channel 3

16#0218: disable recording for

channel 4

16#021F: disable recording for

channels 1–4

16#0502: restore default settings

210 The maximum peak value for channel 1 -

5_
211 The maximum peak value for channel 2 Integer format; the maximum -
R
212 The maximum peak value for channel 3 peak value for analog inputs -

213 The maximum peak value for channel 4 -

214 The minimum peak value for channel 1 -

215 The minimum peak value for channel 2 Integer format; the minimum peak -

value for analog inputs R

216 The minimum peak value for channel 3 -

217 The minimum peak value for channel 4 -

222 The time to record for channel 1 Unit: 10 ms 1

223 The time to record for channel 2 Range: 1–100 1

R/W
224 The time to record for channel 3 The time to record the digital 1

225 The time to record for channel 4 value for the channels 1

240 The number of records for channel 1 0

241 The number of records for channel 2 Range: 0–500, display the current 0
R
242 The number of records for channel 3 records 0

243 The number of records for channel 4 0

4000-
Records for channel 1 500 records for channel 1 R --
4499

4500- Records for channel 2 500 records for channel 2 R --

5-9
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

CR# Name Description Atr. Defaults

4999

5000-
Records for channel 3 500 records for channel 3 R --
5499

5500-
Records for channel 4 500 records for channel 4 R --
5999

5.2.5 AS06RTD Control Registers

*If you use HWCONFIG to set values in CRs, once the set value is downloaded, the values can be retained in

the module; however if you use TO instruction to write data into CRs, the values CANNOT be retained, after

power failure or after transition of the CPU from STOP to RUN.

Note: The attribute of the CR must be W (write) to use TO instruction.

CR# Name Description Atr. Defaults

0: integer format
0 Format Setup R 0
_5 1: floating point format

0: closed
1 Channel 1 mode setup
1：0–300 Ω (default)

2 2：0–3000 Ω
Channel 2 mode setup
3：Pt100 1

3 Channel 3 mode setup 4：JPt100

5：Pt1000 R/W

4 Channel 4 mode setup 6：Ni100

7：Ni1000
5 Channel 5 mode setup 8：LG-Ni1000

9：Cu50
6 Channel 6 mode setup
10：Cu100

7 Channel 1 offset

8 Channel 2 offset

9 Channel 3 offset
Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 0
10 Channel 4 offset

11 Channel 5 offset

12 Channel 6 offset

13 Channel 1 gain Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 1000

5-10
 Ch a pt er 5 Tem per at ur e M eas ur em ent Mo d u l e A S 0 4/ 0 6RT D

CR# Name Description Atr. Defaults

14 Channel 2 gain

15 Channel 3 gain

16 Channel 4 gain

17 Channel 5gain

18 Channel 6 gain

19 Channel 1 average times

20 Channel 2 average times

21 Channel 3 average times

Range: 1–100 R/W 10
22 Channel 4 average times

23 Channel 5 average times

24 Channel 6 average times

Channel 1 filter average

25
percentage

Channel 2 filter average 5_

26
percentage

Channel 3 filter average

27
percentage Range: 0–3
R/W 1
Channel 4 filter average Unit: ±10%
28
percentage

Channel 5 filter average

29
percentage

Channel 6 filter average

30
percentage

0: Fahrenheit
31 Units of temperature R/W 0
1: Celsius

0: open channel alarm

1: close channel alarm

bit0: channel 1

32 Channel alarm setup bit1: channel 2 R/W 0

bit2: channel 3

bit3: channel 4

bit4: channel 5

5 - 11
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

CR# Name Description Atr. Defaults

bit5: channel 6

0: warning

1: alarm

bit8: error in the power supply

bit9: error in the module hardware

bit10: error in calibration

16#0101: record the peak value again for

channel 1

16#0102: record the peak value again for

channel 2

16#0104: record the peak value again for

channel 3

16#0108: record the peak value again for

_5 channel 4

16#110: record the peak values again for

channels 5

16#120: record the peak values again for

channels 6

16#013: record the peak values again for

channels 1-6
201 Instruction set W 0

16#0201: enable recording for channel 1

16#0202: enable recording for channel 2

16#0204: enable recording for channel 3

16#0208: enable recording for channel 4

16#0210: enable recording for channels 5

16#0220: enable recording for channels 6

16#023F: enable recording for channels

1-6

16#0301: disable recording for channel 1

16#0302: disable recording for channel 2

16#0304: disable recording for channel 3

5-12
 Ch a pt er 5 Tem per at ur e M eas ur em ent Mo d u l e A S 0 4/ 0 6RT D

CR# Name Description Atr. Defaults

16#0308: disable recording for channel 4

16#0310: disable recording for channel 5

16#0320: disable recording for channel 6

16#033F: disable recording for channel1-

16#0501: restore default settings, clear

setting values in the Flash

16#0502: restore default settings, do not

clear setting values in the Flash

The maximum peak value for

210 -
channel 1

The maximum peak value for

211 -
channel 2
5_
The maximum peak value for
212 -
channel 3 Integer format; the maximum peak value
R
The maximum peak value for for analog inputs
213 -
channel 4

The maximum peak value for

214 -
channel 5

The maximum peak value for

215 -
channel 6

The minimum peak value for

216 -
channel 1

The minimum peak value for

217 -
channel 2

The minimum peak value for

218 Integer format; the minimum peak value -
channel 3 R
for analog inputs
The minimum peak value for
219 -
channel 4

The minimum peak value for

220 -
channel 5

221 The minimum peak value for -

5-13
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

CR# Name Description Atr. Defaults

channel 6

The time to record for channel

222 1
1

The time to record for channel

223 1
2

The time to record for channel Unit: 100 ms

224 1
3 Range: 1–100
R/W
The time to record for channel The time to record the digital value for the
225 1
4 channels

The time to record for channel

226 1
5

The time to record for channel

227 1
6

The number of records for

240 0
channel 1
_5
The number of records for
241 0
channel 2

The number of records for

242 0
channel 3 Range: 0–200, display the current
R
The number of records for records
243 0
channel 4

The number of records for

244 0
channel 5

The number of records for

245 0
channel 6

4000
Records for channel 1 200 records for channel 1 R -
-4199

4500
Records for channel 2 200 records for channel 2 R -
-4699

5000
Records for channel 3 200 records for channel 3 R -
-5199

5500
Records for channel 4 200 records for channel 4 R -
-5699

6000 Records for channel 4 200 records for channel 5 R -

5-14
 Ch a pt er 5 Tem per at ur e M eas ur em ent Mo d u l e A S 0 4/ 0 6RT D

CR# Name Description Atr. Defaults

-6199

6500
Records for channel 4 200 records for channel 6 R -
-6699

5.2.6 Functions
Use the HWCONFIG utility software built into ISPSoft to set modes of operation and parameters.

 Analog input

Item Function Description

Enable/Disable a 1. Enable or disable a channel.

1
Channel 2. If a channel is disabled, the total conversion time decreases.

2 Unit of Measurement Select the unit of measurement: Fahrenheit or Celsius.

3 Calibration Calibrate a linear curve.

5_
4 Average Conversion values are averaged and filtered.

Disconnection If the channel is open, the module can detect when it is disconnected. If
5
Detection the input is open-circuited, the module produces an alarm or a warning.

If an input signal exceeds the range of inputs that the hardware can
Channel Detection
6 receive, the module produces an alarm or a warning. You can disable
and Alarm
this function.

Limit Detections for

7 Save the maximum/minimum values for channels.
Channels

Records for
8 Save the analog curves for channels.
Channels

9 PID Algorithm PID control modes

1. Enable/Disable a Channel

An analog signal is converted into a digital signal at a rate of 200 ms per channel. If a channel is not used,

you can disable it to decrease the total conversion time.

2. Unit of Measurement

Select the unit of measurement, Fahrenheit or Celsius, according to your needs.

5-15
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

3. Calibration

 To make a curve meet specific needs, calibrate the curve by changing the offset and the gain. The

calibration range depends on the range of inputs that the hardware can receive. The formula is:

(𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 × 𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺)
𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 = + 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂
1000
Example:

If the gain is 1000 and the offset is 0, the corresponding value for the original signal 0° C to 100° C is 0–1000.

If you change the offset to 100, the calibrated value for the original signal 0° C to 100° C becomes 100–1100.

O
Original signals
100 C Signals af ter the calibration

-320 00
0 100 1000 110 0
D igital v alue (X)

_5
I nput analog value (Y)

4. Average

You can set the average value between 1–100. It is a steady value obtained from the sum of the recorded

values. If the recorded values include an acute pulse due to unavoidable external factors, however, you
may observe violent changes in the average value. Use the filtering function to exclude the acute pulses

from the sum-up and equalization, so the computed average value is not affected by the acute recorded

values. Set the filter percentage to the range 0–3, where the unit is 10%. If you set the filter range to 0, the

system sums up all the recorded values and divides them to obtain the average value, but if you set the

filter range to 1, for example, the system excludes the bottom 10% and the top 10% of the values and

averages only the remaining values to obtain the average value.

Quantity

Range for filter percentage

Present measured value

5-16
 Ch a pt er 5 Tem per at ur e M eas ur em ent Mo d u l e A S 0 4/ 0 6RT D

5. Disconnection Detection

If the channel is open, the module can detect when it is disconnected. If the input is open-circuited, the

module produces an alarm or a warning.

6. Channel Detection

If an input signal exceeds the allowable range of inputs, an error message appears. You can disable this

function so that the module does not produce an alarm or a warning when the input signal exceeds the

input range.

7. Limit Detections for Channels

This function saves the maximum and minimum values for channels so that you can determine the peak to

peak values.

Valu e o f the chan nel

Maximum valu e

5_

Mini mu m va lue

Time

8. Records for Channels

Record the input values of the cyclic sampling for each channel. The system saves up to 500 data

points for AS04RTD-A and up to 200 data points for AS06RTD-A and the recording time is 100 ms. The

following uses AS04RTD-A as an example to demonstrate.

Valu e o f the chan nel

500 records o f d ata

Ti me
Instru cti on for recordi ng Recordin g e nds

5-17
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

9. PID control

PID algorithm is available for every channel. With its auto tuning function, parameters such as Kp, Ki, Kd

and more can be calculated and therefore temperature control can be achieved. You can also use

DMPID instruction to calculate relative parameters by entering the parameters in the endpoints of

corresponding instruction image and you can then obtain the output values from the output endpoints.

Note: DMPID instruction is availbe for AS04RTD-A (V1.04 or later), AS06RTD-A (V1.00 or later), AS

Series PLC (V1.06 or later) and AS-SCM (V2.04 or later).

5.2.7 Control Mode

1. Refer to section 6.2.7 for more details on how to use DMPID instruction.

2. When using PID parameters to set up control registers: PID control registers of AS04RTD-A are
retainable; however PID control registers of AS06RTD-A are not retainable.

5.2.8 Wiring
_5
 Precautions

To ensure the analog-to-digital module functions well and reliably, the external wiring must prevent noise.

Before you install the cables, follow the precautions below.

(1) To prevent a surge and induction, the AC cable and the input signal cables that are connected to the
ASRTD Series must be separate cables.

(2) Do not install the cable near a main circuit, a high-voltage cable, or a cable connected to a load
which is not a PLC. In addition, the cable must not be bound to a main circuit, a high-voltage cable,

or a cable connected to a load which is not a PLC.

(3) Ground shielded cables and hermetically sealed cables separately.

(4) Terminals with insulation sleeves cannot be arranged as a terminal block, so you should cover the
terminals with insulation tubes.

(5) Note: use cables with the same length (less than 200 m) and use wire resistance of less than 20
ohm.

5-18
 Ch a pt er 5 Tem per at ur e M eas ur em ent Mo d u l e A S 0 4/ 0 6RT D

 External wiring

(1) AS04RTD-A

0~ 300Ω, 0~ 3000Ω
N i100 /Ni1000/ Pt 100/ Pt 1000 Ni 10 0 Pt1 00 ,J Pt1
, 00 ,
C u50/C u100/ J Pt 100/ LG -Ni1000 Cu 5 0, C u 1 00 /
Ni 10 0 0, P t1 0 00 ,
C H1 L G -N i 10 00 * 3
L1 +
L 1- ADC
*2 INA
I1-
S hielded cab le * 1 S LD
2 -Wi re AG

C H2
L2+
L2-
I2-
S hielded cab le * 1 AG
3 -Wi re

5_
*1. Use shielded twisted pair cables for temperature sensors, and keep them away from power cables

and other cables that generate noise.

*2. If you use two-wire temperature sensors, Ln- and In- must be short-circuited (where n is between 1–

4).

*3. There are two different internal excitation currents. If you are using a Ni100 temperature sensor, a

Pt100 sensor, a JPt100, a Cu50/Cu100, or a 0~300 Ω resistance sensor, the internal excitation
current is 1.5 mA. If you are using a Ni1000 temperature sensor, a Pt1000 temperature sensor, a LG-

Ni1000 sensor, or a 0~3000 Ω resistance sensor, the internal excitation current is 0.2 mA.

Note: When using a three-wire temperature sensor, the cables should be the same length (less than 200

meter) and with a resistor less than 20 ohm.

5-19
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(2) AS06RTD-A

0~ 300Ω, 0~ 3000Ω
N i100 /Ni1000/ Pt 100/ Pt 1000 Ni 10 0 Pt1 00 ,J Pt1
, 00 ,
C u50/C u100/ J Pt 100/ LG -Ni1000 Cu 5 0, C u 1 00 /
Ni 10 0 0, P t1 0 00 ,
C H1 L G -N i 10 00 * 3
L1 +
L 1- ADC

S LD INA

2 -Wi re S hielde d c able *1

CH2
L2+
L2 -
I12- *2

3 -Wi re S hielde d c able *1 AG

*1. Use shielded twisted pair cables for temperature sensors and keep them away from power cables and
_5
other cables that generate noise.

*2. Terminal “I12-“ indicates “ I1- & I2-“, terminal “I34-“ indicates “ I3- & I4-“, and terminal “I56-“ indicates

“ I5- & I6-“. If you use two-wire temperature sensors, Ln- and In- must be short-circuited (where n is

between 1–6).

*3. There are two different internal excitation currents. If you are using a Ni100 temperature sensor, a

Pt100 sensor, a JPt100, a Cu50/Cu100, or a 0~300 Ω resistance sensor, the internal excitation

current is 1.0 mA. If you are using a Ni1000 temperature sensor, a Pt1000 temperature sensor, a LG-

Ni1000 sensor, or a 0~3000 Ω resistance sensor, the internal excitation current is 0.2 mA.

Note: When using a three-wire temperature sensor, the cables should be the same length (less than 200

meter) and with a resistor less than 20 ohm.

5-20
 Ch a pt er 5 Tem per at ur e M eas ur em ent Mo d u l e A S 0 4/ 0 6RT D

5.2.9 LED Indicators

Number Name Description

Operating status of the module

1 RUN LED Indicator ON: the module is running.

OFF: the module is not running.

Error status of the module

ERROR LED ON: a serious error exists in the module.

2
Indicator OFF: the module is operating normally.

Blink: a minor error exists in the module.

Digital-to-Analog Digital-to-analog conversion status

3 Conversion Blinking: conversion is in process.

Indicator OFF: conversion has stopped.

5.3. HWCONFIG in ISPSoft

5_
5.3.1 Initial Setting

The following users AS04RTD-A as an example to demonstrate.

(1) Start ISPSoft and double-click HWCONFIG.

5-21
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(2) Select a module and drag it to the working area.

_5

(3) Double-click the module in the working area to open the Device Setting page.

5-22
 Ch a pt er 5 Tem per at ur e M eas ur em ent Mo d u l e A S 0 4/ 0 6RT D

(4) Choose the parameter, set the values, and click OK.

5_

5-23
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(5) Click Download on the toolbar to download the parameters. Note that you cannot download the
parameters while the CPU module is running.

_5

5.3.2 Checking the Version of a Module

(1) On the Option menu, click Online Mode.

5-24
 Ch a pt er 5 Tem per at ur e M eas ur em ent Mo d u l e A S 0 4/ 0 6RT D

(2) Double-click the module to open the Device Setting page. The versions of both the firmware and the

hardware are displayed.

5_

5.3.3 Online Mode

(1) On the Option menu, click Online Mode.

5-25
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(2) Right-click the module and click Module Status.

(3) View the module status.

_5

5.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File

(1) Click Export in the Device Setting dialog box to save the current parameters as a CSV file (.csv).

5-26
 Ch a pt er 5 Tem per at ur e M eas ur em ent Mo d u l e A S 0 4/ 0 6RT D

(2) Click Import in the Device Setting dialog box and select a CSV file to import saved parameters.

5_
5.3.5 Parameters
(1) The input modes of the channels

5-27
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(2) Input CH1–CH4 (channel 1–channel 4) mode settings

(3) Input CH1-CH4 calibration

_5

5-28
 Ch a pt er 5 Tem per at ur e M eas ur em ent Mo d u l e A S 0 4/ 0 6RT D

(4) Input average filter

(5) Temperature measurement

5_

5-29
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(6) Input channel detection and alarm settings

5.4 Troubleshooting
_5
5.4.1 Error Codes

Error A↔ D LED ERROR LED

Description
Code Indicator Indicator

16#1605 Hardware failure OFF ON

16#1607 The external voltage is abnormal. OFF ON

16#1608 The factory calibration is abnormal. OFF ON

16#1801 The external voltage is abnormal. OFF Blinking

16#1802 Hardware failure OFF Blinking

16#1804 The factory calibration is abnormal. OFF Blinking

The signal received by channel 1 exceeds the range of inputs

16#1808
that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 2 exceeds the range of inputs that

16#1809
the hardware can receive. Run: blinking
Blinking
The signal received by channel 3 exceeds the range of inputs that Stop: OFF
16#180A
the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 4 exceeds the range of inputs that

16#180B
the hardware can receive.

5-30
 Ch a pt er 5 Tem per at ur e M eas ur em ent Mo d u l e A S 0 4/ 0 6RT D

Error A↔ D LED ERROR LED

Description
Code Indicator Indicator

The signal received by channel 5 exceeds the range of inputs that

16#180C
the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 6 exceeds the range of inputs that

16#180D
the hardware can receive.

Blinking once

or twice and

after 2
- When power-on, the module is not detected by CPU module. OFF
seconds, it

blinks

repeatedly

5.4.2 Troubleshooting Procedure

Description Procedure

Ensure the external 24 V power supply to the module is 5_

The external voltage is abnormal.
functioning normally.

Hardware failure Return the module to the factory for repair.

Internal error
Contact the factory.
The factory calibration is abnormal.

The signal received by channel 1 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 1.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 2 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 2.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 3 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 3.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 4 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 4.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 5 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 5.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 6 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 6.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

When power-on, the module is not detected by Check if the connection between module and CPU

CPU module. module is working. If not, connect again.

5-31
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

5.4.3 State of the Connection

State of connection
Channel value
L+ L- I-

● ● ● Maximum value for the channel

● ● Maximum value for the channel

● ● Maximum value for the channel

● Maximum value for the channel

● ● Maximum value for the channel

● Maximum value for the channel

● Minimum value for the channel*1

●: Disconnection

*1: for AS06RTD Series: in the modes of 0-300Ω and 0-3000Ω, it cannot detect I- state of connection.

_5

5-32
 6
Chapter 6 Temperature Measurement
Module AS04/08TC

Table of Contents
6.1 Overview ........................................................................................... 6-2
6.1.1 Characteristics ............................................................................... 6-3

6.2 Specifications and Functions ............................................................. 6-4

6.2.1 Specifications ................................................................................ 6-4
6.2.2 Profile........................................................................................... 6-4
6.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals ............................................................... 6-6
6.2.4 AS04TC Control Registers ............................................................... 6-6
6.2.5 AS08TC Control Registers ............................................................. 6-10
6.2.6 Functions .................................................................................... 6-16
6.2.7 Control Mode ............................................................................... 6-19
6.2.8 Wiring ........................................................................................ 6-38
6.2.9 LED Indicators ............................................................................. 6-39

6.3 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft ..................................................................... 6-39

6.3.1 Initial Setting .............................................................................. 6-39
6.3.2 Checking the Version of a Module .................................................. 6-42
6.3.3 Online Mode ................................................................................ 6-43
6.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File ............................................. 6-44
6.3.5 Parameters ................................................................................. 6-45

6.4 Troubleshooting .............................................................................. 6-48

6.4.1 Error Codes ................................................................................. 6-48
6.4.2 Troubleshooting Procedure ............................................................ 6-49

6-1
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

6.1 Overview
This chapter describes the specifications for the ASTC-A module, its operation, and its programming. The

AS04TC-A is a temperature measurement module that converts temperatures received from thermocouples

(type J, K, R, S, T, E, N, or B, with ±100 mV voltage inputs) into digital signals. You can select either Celsius

(resolution: 0.1° C) or Fahrenheit (resolution: 0.1° F) as the unit of measurement.

An introduction to thermocouples

A thermocouple uses the Seebeck effect to measure differences in temperature. Generally speaking, a

thermocouple consists of two conductors of different materials that produce a voltage at the point where the

two conductors contact. The voltage produced depends on the difference of temperature between the

junctions with other parts of those conductors, and it ranges from several dozen microvolts to several

thousand microvolts. Because the voltage is so low, it needs to be amplified.

Differential operations are used to eliminate external noise. Thermocouples are more stable than thermistors,

resistance thermometers, and thermal resistors, so thermocouples are widely used in industrial applications.

A thermocouple consists of a circuit having two wires of different metals or metal alloys welded together or

joined at both ends. One of the junctions—normally the cold junction—is maintained at a known reference

temperature, and the other junction is at the temperature to be sensed. A temperature gradient across the

junction of the wires gives rise to an electric potential according to the Seebeck effect. The voltage produced

is proportional to the difference of temperature between the junctions with other parts of those conductors.
_6
The voltage can be derived from the following equation.

(Q A − QB )dT
T2
V =∫
T1
(A)

where QA and QB are the thermopowers (Seebeck coefficient) of the metals A and B, and T1 and T2 are the

temperatures of the two junctions.

Principle of operation

Because QA and QB are almost unrelated to temperature, formula (A) above can be approximated as in

equation (B).

V=α(T2- T1) (B)

6-2
 Ch a pt er 6 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

There are two types of thermocouple thermometers: wrapped thermocouples and bare thermocouples. A

wrapped thermocouple is wrapped in protective metal, and is similar to an electric spoon in appearance.

Wrapped thermocouples are used to measure temperature of liquid, and bare thermocouples are used to

measure temperature of gas.

6.1.1 Characteristics
(1) Select a sensor based on its practical application.

Type J thermocouples, type K thermocouples, type R thermocouples, type S thermocouples, type T

thermocouples, type E thermocouples, or type N thermocouples, with ±100 mV voltage inputs

(2) Select a module based on its practical application.

AS04TC-A: Has four channels. Inputs received by a channel are temperatures.

AS08TC-A: Has eight channels. Inputs received by a channel are temperatures.

(3) High-speed conversion

A temperature is converted into a digital signal at a speed of 200 ms per channel.

(4) High accuracy

Conversion accuracy: the error range is ±0.5% of the input at ambient temperature of 25° C ±5° C.
6_
(5) Disconnection detection

When a sensor is disconnected, the module produces an alarm or a warning.

(6) PID control

An object’s temperature can be maintained through PID control actions.

(7) Use the utility software to configure the module.

The HWCONFIG software is built into ISPSoft. You can set modes and parameters directly in

HWCONFIG without spending time writing programs to set registers to manage functions.

6-3
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

6.2 Specifications and Functions

6.2.1 Specifications
 Electrical specifications

Module Name AH04TC-A AH08TC-A

Number of Analog
4 8
Inputs

Type J, type K, type R, type S, type T, type E, type N, and type B

Applicable Sensor
thermocouples; ±100 mV voltage inputs

Supply Voltage 24 VDC (20.4–28.8 VDC) (-15% to +20%)

Connector Type Removable terminal block

25° C/77° F: The error range allowed is ±0.5% of full scale.

Overall Accuracy
-20° C to +60° C/-4° F to +140° F: the error range allowed is ±1% of full scale.

Conversion Time 200 ms/channel

An analog circuit is isolated from a digital circuit by a digital integrated circuit/

optocoupler, and the analog channels are isolated from one another by
optocouplers.
Isolation between a digital circuit and the ground: 500 VDC
Isolation
Isolation between an analog circuit and the ground: 500 VDC
Isolation between an analog circuit and a digital circuit: 500 VDC
Isolation between the 24 VDC and the ground: 500 VDC
Isolation between analog channels: 120 VAC
_6
Weight 115g 125g

 Functional specifications

Analog-to-Digital
Centigrade (°C) Fahrenheit (°F) Voltage Input
Conversion

Type J: -100° C to +1,200° C Type J: -148° F to +2,192° F

Type K: -100° C to +1,350° C Type K: -148° F to +2,462° F
Type R: 0° C to 1,750° C Type R: 32° F to 3,182° F
Type S: 0° C to 1,750° C Type S: 32° F to 3,182° F
Rated Input Range*1 ±100 mV
Type T: -150° C to +400° C Type T: -238° F to +734° F
Type E: -150° C to +980° C Type E: -238° F to +1,796° F
Type N: -150° C to +1,300° C Type N: -238° F to +2,372° F
Type B: 200° C to +1,800° C Type B: 392°F to 3,272°F

Average Function Range: 1-100

Self-Diagnosis Disconnection detection

*1 If the measured temperature exceeds the upper limit, it only shows the maximum value. If the measured

temperature is below the lower limit, it only shows the minimum value.

6-4
 Ch a pt er 6 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

6.2.2 Profile

38.2 95

04TC 1
7
7

98.3
88
3
8

4
9 5

6 75
35

Unit: mm

Number Name Description

1 Model Name Model name of the module

Operating status of the module

RUN LED Indicator ON: the module is running.

OFF: the module is not running.

Error status of the module

ON: a serious error exists in the module.

2 ERROR LED Indicator
OFF: the module is operating normally. 6_
Blink: a minor error exists in the module.

Digital-to-analog conversion status

Digital to Analog
Blinking: conversion is in process.
Conversion Indicator
OFF: conversion has stopped.

The inputs are connected to transducers.

3 Removable Terminal Block
The outputs are connected to loads to be driven.

Arrangement of the
4 Arrangement of the terminals
Input/Output Terminals

5 Clip For removing the terminal block

6 DIN rail clip Secures the module onto the DIN rail

7 Module connecting set Connects the modules

8 Ground clip

6-5
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

6.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals

AS04TC-A AS08TC-A

0 4 TC 08 TC

I1 + I1+ I 1-
PWR PWR
SLD I1- I2+ I 2-

I2 + ERR I3+ I 3- ERR

A D A D
SLD I2- I4+ I 4-

I3 + I5+ I 5-

SLD I3- I6+ I 6-

I4 + I7+ I 7-

SLD I4- I8+ I 8-

2 4V SLD 24V

0V 0V

6.2.4 AS04TC Control Registers

*If you use HWCONFIG to set values in CRs, once the set value is downloaded, the values can be retained in

the module; however if you use TO instruction to write data into CRs, the values CANNOT be retained, after

power failure or after transition of the CPU from STOP to RUN.

Note: The attribute of the CR must be W (write) to use TO instruction.

_6 CR# Name Description Atr. Defaults

0: integer format
0 Format Setup R 0
1: floating point format

1 Channel 1 mode setup

0: closed
1: -100 mV to +100 mV
2 Channel 2 mode setup 2: J-Type
3: K-Type
4: R-Type R/W 1
5: S-Type
3 Channel 3 mode setup 6: T-Type
7: E-Type
8: N-Type
9: B-Type
4 Channel 4 mode setup

5 Channel 1 offset

6 Channel 2 offset Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 0

7 Channel 3 offset

6-6
 Ch a pt er 6 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

CR# Name Description Atr. Defaults

8 Channel 4 offset

9 Channel 1 gain R/W

10 Channel 2 gain R/W

Range: -32768 to +32767 1000
11 Channel 3 gain R/W

12 Channel 4 gain R/W

Channel 1 average
13
times

Channel 2 average
14
times
Range: 1–100 R/W 10
Channel 3 average
15
times

Channel 4 average
16
times

Channel 1 filter average

17
percentage

Channel 2 filter average

18
percentage Range: 0–3
R/W 1 6_
Channel 3 filter average Unit: ±10%
19
percentage

Channel 4 filter average

20
percentage

0: Fahrenheit
21 Units of temperature R/W 0
1: Celsius

0: open channel alarm

1: close channel alarm

bit0: channel 1

bit1: channel 2

22 Channel alarm setup bit2: channel 3 R/W 0

bit3: channel 4

0: warning

1: alarm

6-7
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

CR# Name Description Atr. Defaults

bit8: error in the power supply

bit9: error in the module hardware

bit10: error in calibration

bit11: error in CJC temperature

16#0101: record the peak value again for

channel 1

16#0102: record the peak value again for

channel 2

16#0104: record the peak value again for

channel 3

16#0108: record the peak value again for

channel 4

16#010F: record the peak values again for

channels 1–4

201 16#0201: enable recording for channel 1 W 0

Instruction set
16#0202: enable recording for channel 2

16#0204: enable recording for channel 3

16#0208: enable recording for channel 4

_6 16#020F: enable recording for channels 1–4

16#0211: disable recording for channel 1

16#0212: disable recording for channel 2

16#0214: disable recording for channel 3

16#0218: disable recording for channel 4

16#021F: disable recording for channels 1–4

16#0502: restore default settings

The maximum peak

210 -
value for channel 1

The maximum peak

211 -
value for channel 2 Integer format; the maximum peak value for
R
The maximum peak analog inputs
212 -
value for channel 3

The maximum peak

213 -
value for channel 4

214 The minimum peak Integer format; the minimum peak value for R -

6-8
 Ch a pt er 6 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

CR# Name Description Atr. Defaults

value for channel 1 analog inputs

The minimum peak

215 -
value for channel 2

The minimum peak

216 -
value for channel 3

The minimum peak

217 -
value for channel 4

The time to record for

222 1
channel 1

The time to record for

223 Unit: 100 ms 1
channel 2
Range: 1–100 R/W
The time to record for The time to record the digital value for the
224 1
channel 3 channels

The time to record for

225 1
channel 4

The number of records

240 0
for channel 1

The number of records

241 0
for channel 2
Range: 0-500, display the current records R
6_
The number of records
242 0
for channel 3

The number of records

243 0
for channel 4

4000
Records for channel 1 500 records for channel 1 R -
~4499

4500
Records for channel 2 500 records for channel 2 R -
~4999

5000
Records for channel 3 500 records for channel 3 R -
~5499

5500
Records for channel 4 500 records for channel 4 R -
~5999

6-9
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

6.2.5 AS08TC Control Registers

*If you use HWCONFIG to set values in CRs, once the set value is downloaded, the values can be retained in

the module; however if you use TO instruction to write data into CRs, the values CANNOT be retained, after

power failure or after transition of the CPU from STOP to RUN.

Note: The attribute of the CR must be W (write) to use TO instruction.

CR# Name Description Atr. Defaults

0: integer format
0 Format Setup R 0
1: floating point format

1 Channel 1 mode setup R/W

2 Channel 2 mode setup 0: closed R/W

1: -100 mV to +100 mV
3 Channel 3 mode setup R/W
2: J-Type
3: K-Type
4 Channel 4 mode setup R/W
4: R-Type
1
5: S-Type
5 Channel 5 mode setup R/W
6: T-Type
7: E-Type
6 Channel 6 mode setup R/W
8: N-Type
7 9: B-Type
Channel 7 mode setup R/W

8 Channel 8 mode setup R/W

9 Channel 1 offset

10
_6 Channel 2 offset

11 Channel 3 offset

12 Channel 4 offset
Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 0
13 Channel 5 offset

14 Channel 6 offset

15 Channel 7 offset

16 Channel 8 offset

17 Channel 1 gain

18 Channel 2 gain

19 Channel 3 gain

20 Channel 4 gain
Range: -32768 to +32767 R/W 1000
21 Channel 5 gain

22 Channel 6 gain

23 Channel 7 gain

24 Channel 8 gain

6-10
 Ch a pt er 6 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

CR# Name Description Atr. Defaults

25 Channel 1 average times

26 Channel 2 average times

27 Channel 3 average times

28 Channel 4 average times

Range: 1–100 R/W 10
29 Channel 5 average times

30 Channel 6 average times

31 Channel 7 average times

32 Channel 8 average times

Channel 1 filter average

33 R/W
percentage

Channel 2 filter average

34 R/W
percentage

Channel 3 filter average

35 R/W
percentage

Channel 4 filter average

36 R/W
percentage Range: 0–3
1
Unit: ±10%
Channel 5 filter average
37 R/W 6_
percentage

Channel 6 filter average

38 R/W
percentage

Channel 7 filter average

39 R/W
percentage

Channel 8 filter average

40 R/W
percentage

0: Fahrenheit
41 Units of temperature R/W 0
1: Celsius

0: open channel alarm

1: close channel alarm

bit0: channel 1
42 Channel alarm setup R/W 0
bit1: channel 2

bit2: channel 3

bit3: channel 4

6 - 11
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

CR# Name Description Atr. Defaults

bit4: channel 5

bit5: channel 6

bit6: channel 7

bit7: channel 8

0: warning

1: alarm

bit8: error in the power supply

bit9: error in the module hardware

bit10: error in calibration

bit11: error in CJC temperature

16#0101: record the peak value again for

channel 1

16#0102: record the peak value again for

channel 2

16#0104: record the peak value again for

channel 3

16#0108: record the peak value again for

_6 channel 4

16#0110: record the peak value again for

channel 5

16#0120: record the peak value again for

201 Instruction set channel 6 W 0

16#0140: record the peak value again for

channel 7

16#0180: record the peak value again for

channel 8

16#01FF: record the peak value again for

channels 1-8

16#0201: enable recording for channel 1

16#0202: enable recording for channel 2

16#0204: enable recording for channel 3

16#0208: enable recording for channel 4

6-12
 Ch a pt er 6 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

CR# Name Description Atr. Defaults

16#0210: enable recording for channel 5

16#0220: enable recording for channel 6

16#0240: enable recording for channel 7

16#0280: enable recording for channel 8

16#02FF: enable recording for channels 1-8

16#0301: disable recording for channel 1

16#0302: disable recording for channel 2

16#0304: disable recording for channel 3

16#0308: disable recording for channel 4

16#0310: disable recording for channel 5

16#0320: disable recording for channel 6

16#0340: disable recording for channel 7

16#0380: disable recording for channel 8

16#03FF: disable recording for channels 1-8

16#0501: restore default settings, clear setting

values in the Flash

6_
16#0502: restore default settings, do not clear

setting values in the Flash

The maximum peak value

210 -
for channel 1

The maximum peak value

211 -
for channel 2

The maximum peak value

212 -
for channel 3

The maximum peak value Integer format; the maximum peak value for
213 R -
for channel 4 analog inputs

The maximum peak value

214 -
for channel 5

The maximum peak value

215 -
for channel 6

The maximum peak value

216 -
for channel 7

6-13
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

CR# Name Description Atr. Defaults

The maximum peak value

217 -
for channel 8

The minimum peak value

218 -
for channel 1

The minimum peak value

219 -
for channel 2

The minimum peak value

220 -
for channel 3

The minimum peak value

221 -
for channel 4
Integer format; the minimum peak value for
R
analog inputs
The minimum peak value
222 -
for channel 5

The minimum peak value

223 -
for channel 6

The minimum peak value

224 -
for channel 7

The minimum peak value

225 -
for channel 8
_6 The time to record for
226 R/W 1
channel 1

The time to record for

227 R/W 1
channel 2

The time to record for

228 R/W 1
channel 3

The time to record for

229 Unit: 100 ms R/W 1
channel 4
Range: 1–100
The time to record for The time to record the digital value for the
230 R/W 1
channel 5 channels

The time to record for

231 R/W 1
channel 6

The time to record for

232 R/W 1
channel 7

The time to record for

233 R/W 1
channel 8

6-14
 Ch a pt er 6 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

CR# Name Description Atr. Defaults

The number of records for

240
channel 1

The number of records for

241
channel 2

The number of records for

242
channel 3

The number of records for

243
channel 4
Range: 0-100, display the current records R 0
The number of records for
244
channel 5

The number of records for

245
channel 6

The number of records for

246
channel 7

The number of records for

247
channel 8
4000
Records for channel 1 100 records for channel 1 R -
~4099
4500
Records for channel 2 100 records for channel 2 R -
~4599
5000 6_
Records for channel 3 100 records for channel 3 R -
~5099
5500
Records for channel 4 100 records for channel 4 R -
~5599
6000
Records for channel 5 100 records for channel 5 R -
~6099
6500
Records for channel 6 100 records for channel 6 R -
~6599
7000
Records for channel 7 100 records for channel 7 R -
~7099
7500
Records for channel 8 100 records for channel 8 R -
~7599

6-15
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

6.2.6 Functions

Item Function Description

Enable/Disable a 1. Enable or disable a channel.

1
Channel 2. If a channel is disabled, the total conversion time decreases.

2 Unit of Measurement Select the unit of measurement: Fahrenheit or Celsius.

3 Calibration Calibrate a linear curve.

4 Average Conversion values are averaged and filtered.

Disconnection If the channel is open, the module can detect when it is disconnected. If
5
Detection the input is open-circuited, the module produces an alarm or a warning.

If an input signal exceeds the range of inputs that the hardware can
Channel Detection
6 receive, the module produces an alarm or a warning. You can disable
and Alarm
this function.

Limit Detections for

7 Save the maximum/minimum values for channels.
Channels

Records for
8 Save the analog curves for channels.
Channels

9 PID Algorithm PID control modes

_6

1. Enable/Disable a Channel

An analog signal is converted into a digital signal at a rate of 200 ms per channel. If a channel is not used,

you can disable it to decrease the total conversion time.

2. Unit of Measurement

Select the unit of measurement, Fahrenheit or Celsius, according to your needs.

3. Calibration

To make a curve meet specific needs, calibrate the curve by changing the offset and the gain. The

calibration range depends on the range of inputs that the hardware can receive. The formula is:

(𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 × 𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝑛𝑛)
𝑂𝑂𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢 = + 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂
1000

6-16
 Ch a pt er 6 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

Example:

If the gain is 1000 and the offset is 0, the corresponding value for the original signal 0° C to 100° C is 0–1000.

If you change the offset to 100, the calibrated value for the original signal 0° C to 100° C becomes 100–1100.

Gain = 1000, Offset = 0

O
Original signals
100 C Signals af ter the calibration

-320 00
0 100 1000 110 0
D igital v alue (X)

I nput analog value (Y)

4. Average

You can set the average value between 1–100. It is a steady value obtained from the sum of the recorded

values. If the recorded values include an acute pulse due to unavoidable external factors, however, you may

observe violent changes in the average value. Use the filtering function to exclude the acute pulses from the

sum-up and equalization, so the computed average value is not affected by the acute recorded values. Set the

filter percentage to the range of 0–3, where the unit is 10%. If you set the filter range to 0, for example, the
6_
system sums up all the recorded values and divides them to obtain the average value, but if you set the filter

range to 1, the system excludes the bottom 10% and the top 10% of the values and averages only the

remaining values to obtain the average value.

Quantity

Range for filter percentage

Present measured value

5. Disconnection Detection

If the channel is open, the module can detect when it is disconnected. If the input is open-circuited, the

module produces an alarm or a warning.

6-17
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

6. Channel Detection

If an input signal exceeds the allowable range of inputs that the hardware can receive, an error message

appears and the Error LED blinks. You can disable this function so that the module does not produce an

alarm or warning and the Error LED also does not blink when the input signal exceeds the input range.

7. Limit Detections for Channels

This function saves the maximum and minimum values for channels so that you can determine the peak to

peak values.

Valu e o f the chan nel

Maximum valu e

Mini mu m va lue

Time
8. Records for channels

Record the input values of the cyclic sampling for each channel. For AS04TC-A, the system saves up to

500 data points and the recording time is 10 ms. For example, if the conversion time is 2 ms and 4

channels are open, the recording time is 8 ms x 500 data points = 4 seconds in total. And the system
_6
saves up to 100 data points for AS08TC-A and the recording time is 100 ms. The following uses

AS04TC-A as an example to demonstrate.

Valu e o f the chan nel

500 records o f d ata

Ti me
Instru cti on for recordi ng Recordin g e nds

9. PID control

PID algorithm is available for every channel. With its auto tuning function, parameters such as Kp, Ki, Kd

and more can be calculated and therefore temperature control can be achieved. You can also use
DMPID instruction to calculate relative parameters by entering the parameters in the endpoints of the

corresponding instruction image and then you can then obtain the output values from the output

endpoints. Note: DMPID instruction is availbe for AS04RTD-A (V1.04 or later), AS06RTD-A (V1.00 or

later), AS Series PLC (V1.06 or later) and AS-SCM (V2.04 or later).

6-18
 Ch a pt er 6 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

6.2.7 Control Mode

You can also use DMPID to execute PID control. The applicable models and FW are AS04RTD-A: V1.04 or

later / AS06RTD-A: V1.00 or later / AS04TC-A: V1.04 or later / AS08TC-A: V1.00 / CPU: V1.06 or later /

ASSCM Remote Module: V2.04 or later.

API Instruction code Operand Function

PID algorithm for RTD/TC
1417 D MPID As shown in the following table
modules

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

GROUP   
MODULE   
CH   
UPDATE     
PID_RUN     
SV   
PID_MODE   
PID_MAN     
MOUT_AUTO     
AUTO_DBW   
Kc_Kp  
Ti_Ki  
Td_Kd  
Tf  
PID_EQ     
6_
PID_DE     
PID_DIR     
ERR_DBW 
ALPHA   
BETA   
MOUT 
BIAS   
CYCLE   
MV 
PV 
I_MV 
ERROR 
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT

Data
INT

type

See the explanation below

Pulse instruction 16-Bit instruction 32-Bit instruction

－ － AS

6-19
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

GROUP ： Group number

MODULE ： Module number
CH ： Channel number
UPDATE ： Update PID parameters
PID_RUN ： Enable the PID algorithm
SV ： Target value (SV)
PID_MODE ： PID control mode
PID_MAN ： PID Auto/Manual mode
MOUT_AUTO ： Manual/Auto output value
AUTO_DBW ： Range within which the auto tuning is not
working
Kc_Kp ： Proportional gain
Ti_Ki ： Integral coefficient (sec. or 1/sec)
Td_Kd ： Derivative coefficient (sec)
Tf ： Derivate-action time constant (sec)
PID_EQ ： PID formula types
PID_DE ： Calculation of the PID derivative error
PID_DIR ： PID forward/reverse direction
ERR_DBW ： Range within which the error value is
counted as 0
ALPHA ： Initial value compensation of integral
calculus (for heating up)
BETA ： Initial value compensation of integral
calculus (for cooling down)
MOUT ： Manual output value
BIAS ： Feed forward output value
CYCLE ： Sampling time
MV ： Output value (MV)
PV ： Present value
I_MV ： Accumulated integral value
ERROR ： Error code

Operand Data type Function Setting range Description

_6
The RTD/TC module group number

that is connected to the right side of

PLC directly or connected to the

remote module that acts as PLC, e.g.

GROUP DWORD/DINT Group number the first connected module group is

group number 1, the second connected

module group is group number 2. Up to

15 module group can be connected

and counted.

The module number that is connected

to the right side of PLC directly or

connected to the remote module that

MODULE DWORD/DINT Module number acts as PLC, e.g. the first connected

module is module number 1, the

second connected module is module

number 2. Up to 32 modules can be

6-20
 Ch a pt er 6 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

Operand Data type Function Setting range Description

connected and counted and each type

of modules should be included in the

count.

Channel number for PID algorithm, e.g.

channel 1 is number 1 for PID

CH DWORD/DINT Channel number
algorithm and channel 2 is number 2

for PID algorithm and so forth.

True：Update PID related parameters

in the module, such as
Update PID
UPDATE BOOL PID_RUN~CYCLE.
parameters
False: After updating is complete, it

refreshes to False.

True: use the PID algorithm.

Enabling the PID
PID_RUN BOOL False: reset the output value (MV) to 0,
algorithm
and stop using the PID algorithm.

SV DWORD/DINT Target value -32768~32767 Target value

0: Automatic control

When PID_MAN switches from True 6_

to False, invoke the output value

(MV) in the automatic algorithm.

1: Auto tuning the parameters for the

temperature control. After tuning is

done, the sysem switches to auto

PID_MODE DWORD/DINT PID control mode
control mode (PID_MODE is set to

0) and fill in the appropriate

parameters (Kc_Kp, Ti_Ki, Td_Kd,

Tf, ALPHA and BETA)

Note: when the mode is set to 1, auto

tuning the parameter, you cannot

use numerical value to set up.

True: Manual

Output the MV according to

PID_MAN BOOL PID A/M mode
MOUT. This setting has no effect

when PID_MODE is set to 1.

6-21
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Operand Data type Function Setting range Description

False: Automatic

Output the MV according to the

PID algorithm.

True: Automatic

MOUT varies with the MV.

MOUT automatic
MOUT_AUTO BOOL False: Normal
change mode
MOUT does not vary with the

MV.

Used when the

mode is set to auto

Range within
tuning, within the
which the auto
AUTO_DBW DWORD/DINT 0~32000 range of SV ± dead
tuning is not
band, the auto
working
tuning is not

working.

Calculated If the P coefficient is

Range of
proportional less than 0, the
positive single-
coefficient (Kc or Kc_Kp is 0.
Kc_Kp REAL precision
_6 Kp, according to
floating-
Independently, if

the settings in Kc_Kp is 0, it is not

point numbers
PID_EQ) controlled by P.

Range of

positive single- If the calculated

Integral coefficient
precision coefficient I is less
(Ti or Ki, according
Ti_Ki REAL floating- than 0, Ti_Ki is 0. If
to the settings in
point numbers Ti_Ki is 0, it is not
PID_EQ)
(unit: Ti = sec; controlled by I.

Ki = 1/sec)

Range of
Derivative If the calculated
positive single-
coefficient (Td or coefficient D is less
precision
Td_Kd REAL Kd, according to than 0, Td_Kd is 0.
floating-
the settings in If Ti_Ki is 0, it is not
point numbers
PID_EQ) controlled by D.
(unit: sec)

6-22
 Ch a pt er 6 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

Operand Data type Function Setting range Description

If the derivate-
Range of action time constant
positive single- is less than 0, Tf is

Derivate-action precision 0 and it is not

Tf REAL
time constant floating- controlled by the

point numbers derivate-action time

(unit: sec) constant (derivative

smoothing).

True: dependent formula

PID_EQ BOOL PID formula types
False: independent formula

True: use the variations in the PV to

calculate the control value of the

The calculation of derivative (Derivative of the PV).

PID_DE BOOL the PID derivative False: use the variations in the error (E)
error to calculate the control value of

the derivative (derivative of the

error).

True: reverse action; heating up

PID

PID_DIR BOOL forward/reverse

(E=SV-PV) 6_
False: forward action; cooling down
direction
(E=PV-SV)

The error value (E)

is the difference

between the SV

and the PV. When

the setting value is

Range within 0, the function

which the error disabled; otherwise

ERR_DBW DWORD/DINT -32768~32767
value is counted as the CPU module

0. checks

whether the present

error is less than

the absolute value

of ERR_DBW, and

checks whether the

6-23
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Operand Data type Function Setting range Description

present error meets

the cross status

The error value (E)

is the difference

between the SV

and the PV. When

the ERR_DBW

setting value is 0,

the function is

disabled; otherwise

the CPU PLC

checks

whether the present

error is less than

the absolute value

of ERR_DBW, and

checks whether the

present error meets

the cross status

_6 condition. If the

present error is less

than the absolute

value of

ERR_DBW,

and meets the

cross status

condition, the

present error is

counted as 0, and

the PLC applies the

PID algorithm ;

otherwise the

present error is

brought into the PID

algorithm.

6-24
 Ch a pt er 6 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

Operand Data type Function Setting range Description

Initial value Initial value

compensation of 0.0~100.0 compensation of

ALPHA DWORD/DINT
integral calculus (unit: 1%) integral calculus (for

(for heating up) heating up)

Initial value Initial value

compensation of 0.0~100.0 compensation of

BETA DWORD/DINT
integral calculus (unit: 1%) integral calculus (for

(for cooling down) cooling down)

When set to PID

Manual

(PID_MAN=True),
0~1000
MOUT DWORD/DINT MV the MV value is
(unit: 0.1%)
outputted as the

value set manually

for MOUNT.

Feed forward output

Feed forward
BIAS DWORD/DINT -32768~32767 value, used for the
output value
PID feed forward.

When the

instruction is
6_
scanned, use the
1~1000
CYCLE DWORD/DINT Sampling time (TS) PID algorithm
(unit: 100 ms)
according to the

sampling time, and

refresh MV.

0.0~100.0
MV REAL MV output value
(unit: 1%)

PV DWORD/DINT/REAL Present value Format is defined in HWCONFIG.

Accumulated integral value is for

Accumulated reference. When the MV is out of the

I_MV REAL
integral value range of 0-100%, the accumulated

integral value in I_MV stops changing.

16#0000：instruction is being executed

Error / status
ERROR DWORD/DINT and is working normally
codes
16#1400：the module you are using

6-25
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Operand Data type Function Setting range Description

does not support this instruction.

16#1401：group number or module

number setting error

16#1402：the module you are using

does not respond and communication

time out

16#1403：channel setting error

Note:

1. If the PID parameter exceeds the upper limit, only the maximum value can be written in the module, if the

PID parameter is below the lower limit, only the minimum value can be written in the module.

2. When PID_RUN switches from True to False, it clears the MV output value to 0. If you need to keep the

last MV output value, you can switch the operand EN to False to close this instruction and the MV output

value can be kept.

Example

1. You need to set up the parameters before executing DMPID. Switch the operand EN from False to True to

execute this instruction. If you need to change parameters during execution, you can use the UPDATE

_6 flag to update the parameters (including PID_RUN ~ CYCLE). After the parameters are updated, the

system clears the flag UPDATE.

2. When M0 is ON, the instruction is executed. When M2 is ON, the DMPID starts to process. When M2 is

OFF, MV value is 0. And the value in MV is stored in D16. When M0 is OFF, the instruction is not

executed. And the values in the instruction is not changed.

3. When the mode is set to 1, the system starts to auto tuning the parameters for the temperature control.

After tuning is done, the system switches to auto control mode (PID_MODE is set to 0) and fill in the

appropriate parameters (Kc_Kp, Ti_Ki, Td_Kd, Tf, ALPHA and BETA) to data devices. You can also use

retentive devices to retain PID parameters.

6-26
 Ch a pt er 6 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

6_

Use PID parameters

CR#
Operand Function Description Defaults
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8

1: the PID

algorithm is

implemented.

Enable the PID 0: the output value

600 630 660 690 720 750 780 810 PID_RUN 0
algorithm (MV) is reset to

0, and the PID

algorithm is not

implemented.

6-27
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

CR#
Operand Function Description Defaults
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8

601 631 661 691 721 751 781 811 SV SV Target value 0

0: automatic

control

When PID_MAN

is switched from

1 to 0, the

output value

(MV) is included

in the automatic

algorithm.

1: the parameters

are tuned
PID control automatically for
602 632 662 692 722 752 782 812 PID_MODE 0
mode the temperature

control. When

the tuning is

complete, the
_6
device is

automatically

reset to 0, and

the parameters

Kc_Kp, Ti_Ki,

Td_Kd, and Tf

are set

appropriately.

0: auto; the MV is

output based

on the PID

PID A/M algorithm.

603 633 663 693 723 753 783 813 PID_MAN 0
mode 1: manual; the MV

is output based

on the MOUT.
When

6-28
 Ch a pt er 6 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

CR#
Operand Function Description Defaults
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8

PID_MODE is

also set to 1,

this setting is

ineffective.

0: normal; the

MOUT does not

MOUT
vary with the
automatic
604 634 664 694 724 754 784 814 MOUT_AUTO MV. 0
change
1: auto; the MOUT
mode
varies with the

MV.

Range: 0–32000,

Auto tuning used when SV is

605 635 665 695 725 755 785 815 Auto DBWA non-action in the ±dead band 0

zone in auto tuning

mode.

Kc_Kp are

floating-point 6_
numbers. If the P
Calculated
coefficient is less
proportional
606 636 666 696 726 756 786 816
Kc_Kp than 0, the Kc_Kp 3.846
607 637 667 697 727 757 787 817 coefficient
is 0.
(Kc or Kp)
Independently, if

Kc_Kp is 0, it is

not controlled by P.

Ti_Ki are floating-

point numbers. If
Integral the calculated
608 638 668 698 728 758 788 818 coefficient
Ti_Ki coefficient I is less 0.013
609 639 669 699 729 759 789 819
(Ti or Ki) than 0, Ti_Ki is 0.

If Ti_Ki is 0, it is

not controlled by I.

610 640 670 700 730 760 790 820 Derivative Td_Kd are
Td_Kd 190.078
611 641 671 701 731 761 791 821 coefficient floating-point

6-29
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

CR#
Operand Function Description Defaults
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8

(Td or Kd) numbers. If the

calculated

coefficient D is

less than 0, Td_Kd

is 0. If Ti_Ki is 0, it

is not controlled by

D.

If the derivate-

action time

constant is less

612 642 672 702 732 762 792 822 Derivate-action than 0, Tf is 0 and
Tf 4.941
613 643 673 703 733 763 793 823 time constant it is not controlled

by the derivate-

action time

constant.

0: independent

PID formula formula

614 644 674 704 734 764 794 824 PID_EQ 0
_6
types 1: dependent

formula

0: use the
variations in the

error (E) to

calculate the

control value of

The the derivative

calculation of (derivative of

615 645 675 705 735 765 795 825 PID_DE the PID E). 0

derivative 1: use the

error variations in the

PV to calculate

the control

value of the

derivative

(derivative of

6-30
 Ch a pt er 6 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

CR#
Operand Function Description Defaults
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8

PV).

0: heating action
PID forward/
(E=SV-PV)
616 646 676 706 736 766 796 826 PID_DIR reverse 0
1: cooling action
direction
(E=PV-SV）

The error value (E)

is the difference

between the SV

and the PV. When

this setting is 0,

the function is not

enabled. When

this setting is

enabled, the CPU

module checks

whether the

present difference
6_
is less than the
Range within
absolute value of
which the
617 647 677 707 737 767 797 827 ERR_DBW ERR_DBW, and it 0
error value is
checks whether
counted as 0
the present

difference meets

the cross status

condition. If the

present difference

is less than the

absolute value of

ERR_DBW and it

meets the cross

status condition,

the present error is

counted as 0, and

the PID algorithm

6-31
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

CR#
Operand Function Description Defaults
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8

is implemented.

Otherwise the

present error is

brought into the

PID algorithm

normally.

618 648 678 708 738 768 798 828 α value Integral sum Range: 0–100 31

619 649 679 709 739 769 799 829 β value Integral sum Unit: 0.01 0

When PID_MAN is

set to 1, the MV

value is output as

Manual this manual MOUT

620 650 680 710 740 770 800 830 MOUT output value value, between 0

(MOUT) MV_MAX and

MV_MIN.

Range: 0–1000
(0%–100%)

_6 Feedforward

Feedforward output value, used

621 651 681 711 741 771 801 831 BIAS 0
output value for the PID

feedforward

A floating-point

Output value number

622 652 682 712 742 772 802 832
MV --
623 653 683 713 743 773 803 833 (MV) Range: 0–100

Unit: %

Floating-point

format.

The accumulated

624 654 684 714 744 774 804 834 Accumulated integral value is
I_MV --
625 655 685 715 745 775 805 835 integral value temporarily stored

for reference.

When the MV is

out of the range

6-32
 Ch a pt er 6 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

CR#
Operand Function Description Defaults
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8

0%–100%, the

accumulated

integral value in

I_MV is

unchanged.

When this

instruction is read,

the PID algorithm

is implemented

according to the

sampling time, and

Sampling the MV is
626 656 686 716 746 776 806 836 CYCLE 1
time (TS) refreshed.

If TS is less than 1,

it is read as 1. If TS

is larger than

1,000, it is read as

1,000.
6_
Unit: 100 ms

Note: When using PID parameters to set up control registers: PID control registers of AS04TC-A and RTD-A

are retainable; however PID control registers of AS06RTD-A and AS08TC-A are not retainable.

PID formula:

1. When the PID_MODE is set to 0, the mode is set to auto:

 Independent Formula & Derivative of E（PID_EQ=False & PID_DE=False）

t
dE
MV = K P E + Ki ∫ Edt + K d * + BIAS (E = SV – PV or E = PV – SV)
0
dt
 Independent Formula & Derivative of PV（PID_EQ=False & PID_DE=True）
t
dPV
MV = K P E + Ki ∫ Edt − K d * + BIAS (E = SV – PV)
0
dt
Or
t
dPV
MV = K P E + Ki ∫ Edt + K d * + BIAS (E =PV – SV)
0
dt

6-33
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

 Dependent Formula & Derivative of E（PID_EQ=True & PID_DE=False）

 1
t
dE 
MV = K c  E + ∫ Edt + Td *  + BIAS (E = SV – PV or E = PV – SV)
 Ti 0 dt 

 Dependent Formula & Derivative of PV（PID_EQ=True & PID_DE=True）

 1
t
dE 
MV = K c  E + ∫ Edt − Td *  + BIAS (E = SV – PV)
 Ti 0 dt 
Or
 1
t
dE 
MV = K c  E + ∫ Edt + Td *  + BIAS (E = PV – SV)
 Ti 0 dt 

2. When you set the PID_MODE to 1, auto tuning mode is enabled. When auto tuning is complete, the value

becomes 0 and switches off the auto tuning mode automatically.

PID Control Block Diagram:

PID Block Diagram (Independent)

PID_D IR
E
+ 1
SV + DEAD BAND
-
REVERSE
PV 0
X(-1)

ERR_DBW

_6 Kc_Kp
PID-P
>0 PID_MAN
BIAS
+ 0
<=0 +
0 +
Kc_Kp MV_LIMIT
1
MV
Ti_Ki
PID-I
>0
MV_MAX, MV_MIN
+
<=0 +
0 +
Ti_Ki MOUT_AUTO
+ MOUT
0
Td_Kd MOUT
PID-D PID_MAN
>0 1
0

<=0
0 1
Td_Kd, Tf MOUT

6-34
 Ch a pt er 6 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

PID Block Diagram (Dependent)

PID_D IR
E
+ 1
SV + DEAD BAND PID-P
-
REVERSE
PV 0
X(-1)

Kc_Kp
ERR_DBW Kc_Kp
>0

<=0
0

PID_MAN
BIAS
+ 0
+
+
MV_LIMIT
1
Ti_Ki MV
PID-I
>0
MV_MAX, M V_MIN
<=0
0
Ti_Ki MOUT_AUTO
MOUT
0
Td_Kd MOUT PID_MAN
PID-D
>0 1
0

<=0
0 1
Td_Kd, Tf MOUT

ERR_DBW
When the PV (present value) is in the range of ERR_DBW, at the beginning, the present error is brought

into the PID algorithm according to the normal processing, and then the CPU module checks whether the

present error meets the cross status condition: PV (present value) goes beyond the SV (target value).

Once the condition is met, the present error is counted as 0 when applying the PID algorithm. After the PV 6_
(present value) is out of the ERR_DBW range, the present error is brought into the PID algorithm again. If

PID_DE is true, that means it uses the variations in the PV to calculate the control value of the derivative,

and after the cross status condition is met, the PLC treats Δ PV as 0 to apply the PID algorithm. (Δ PV=

current PV – previous PV). In the following example, the present error is brought into the PID algorithm

according to the normal processing in section A ,and the present error or Δ PV is counted as 0 to apply

the PID algorithm in the section B.

6-35
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

α、β Value
To reduce overshoot, you can use parameters of ALPHA or BETA in the beginning of the PID
operation or while SV (target value) varies to compensate initial value of integral calculus (for
heating up or cooling down). See the images below. Use ALPHA parameter to reduce overshoot while the

temperature is climbing up. Use BETA parameter to reduce overshoot while the temperature is dropping.

0
Tem perature ( C)

Tim e

_6
0
Temperature ( C)

Time

6-36
 Ch a pt er 6 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

Formula of the output cycle:

 Output cycle width = MV (%) x output cycle

Execute the general pulse with modulation instruction (GPWM) to set output cycle width and output cycle

sampling time to manage the cycle.

Example:

If the output cycle is 2000 ms, then the output value is 50% after the PID algorithm is implemented.

 Output cycle width = 50% × 2000 ms = 1000 ms

In other words, the GWPM instruction can be set to output cycle width = 1000 and output cycle = 2000.

t =10 0 0 ms

Ou tp u t Y 1 0

T =2 00 0 ms

Note:

1. When tuning the parameters Kc_Kp, Ti_Ki, and Td_Kd (PID_MODE=0), set the Kc_Kp value first, and

then set the Ti_Ki and Td_Kd values to 0. In a controlled environment, you can increase the values of

Ti_Ki (from smaller to bigger) and Td_Kd (from bigger to smaller). When the value of Kc_Kp is 1, the 6_
proportional gain is 100%. That is, the error values increase by a factor of one. When the proportional

gain is less than 100%, the error values decrease. When the proportional gain is greater than 100%, the
error values increase.

2. The parameters which have been automatically tuned are not necessarily suitable for every controlled

environment. You can, therefore, further modify the automatically-tuned parameters, but it is

recommended that you only modify the values of Ti_Ki or Td_Kd.

3. The operand CYCLE is to set the sampling time to use the PID algorithm and refresh MV.

4. When the number of the channel for measurement is changed, the time to refresh the
measured value also changes. For example, the measured value is refreshed every 200 ms
when there is only 1 channel for measurement. The measured value is refreshed every 800 ms
when there are 4 channels for measurement. The Kc_Kp, Ti_Ki, Td_Kd parameters may differ
when the number of channel for measure is different.

6-37
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

6.2.8 Wiring
 Precautions

To ensure the analog-to-digital module functions well and reliably, the external wiring must prevent noise.

Before you install the cables, follow the precautions below.

(1) To prevent a surge and induction, the AC cable and the input signal cables that are connected to the
ASTC-A Series must be separate cables.

(2) Do not install the cable near a main circuit, a high-voltage cable, or a cable connected to a load
which is not a PLC. In addition, the cable must not be bound to a main circuit, a high-voltage cable,

or a cable connected to a load which is not a PLC.

(3) Ground shielded cables and hermetically sealed cables separately.

(4) Terminals with insulation sleeves cannot be arranged as a terminal block, so you should cover the
terminals with insulation tubes.

(5) Note1: do not wire empty terminals.

(6) Note2: only use copper conducting wires with a temperature rating of 60/75°C and the length must
be less than 50 m.

(7) Note3: TC modules must run for 30 minutes before they start to take any temperature measurement.

 External wiring

_6
J,K,R,S,T,E,N, B
CH 1

+ I 1+
- A DC
I1 -

Shielded cable* 1 SLD INA

- 1 0 0 mV ~1 0 0m V CH3
+
I3 +
-
I3 - C old - junction
SL D c ompensation

*1. Use shielded twisted pair cables for Type J, type K, type R, type S, type T, type E, type N
and type B thermocouples, and keep them separate from power cables and other cables
which generate noise.

6-38
 Ch a pt er 6 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

6.2.9 LED Indicators

Number Name Description

Operating status of the module

1 RUN LED Indicator ON: the module is running.

OFF: the module is not running.

Error status of the module

ERROR LED ON: a serious error exists in the module.

2
Indicator OFF: the module is operating normally.

Blink: a minor error exists in the module.

Digital to Analog Digital-to-analog conversion status

3 Conversion Blinking: conversion is in process.

Indicator OFF: conversion has stopped.

6.3 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft

6.3.1 Initial Setting
The following uses AS04TC-A as an example to demonstrate.

(1) Start ISPSoft and double-click HWCONFIG.

6_

6-39
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(2) Select a module and drag it to the working area.

(3) Double-click the module in the working area to open the Device Setting page.

_6

6-40
 Ch a pt er 6 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

(4) Choose the parameter, set the values, and click OK.

6_

6-41
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(5) Click Download on the toolbar to download the parameters. Note that you cannot download the
parameters while the CPU module is running.

_6
6.3.2 Checking the Version of a Module
(1) On the Option menu, click Online Mode.

6-42
 Ch a pt er 6 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

(2) Double-click the module to open the Device Setting page. The versions of both the firmware and the

hardware are displayed.

6.3.3 Online Mode

(1) On the Option menu, click Online Mode.

6_

6-43
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(2) Right-click the module and click Module Status.

(3) View the module status.

_6
6.3.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File
(1) Click Export in the Device Setting dialog box to save the current parameters as a CSV file (.csv).

6-44
 Ch a pt er 6 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

(2) Click Import in the Device Setting dialog box, and select a CSV file to import saved parameters.

6.3.5 Parameters
6_
(1) The input modes of the channels

6-45
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(2) Input CH1–CH4 (channel 1–channel 4) mode settings

(3) Input CH1-CH4 calibration

_6

6-46
 Ch a pt er 6 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

(4) Input average filter

(5) Temperature measurement

6_

6-47
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(6) Input channel detect and alarm settings

6.4 Troubleshooting
6.4.1 Error Codes

Error A↔ D LED ERROR LED

Description
Code Indicator Indicator
_6 16#1605 Hardware failure OFF ON

16#1607 The external voltage is abnormal. OFF ON

16#1608 The factory calibration is abnormal. OFF ON

16#1801 The external voltage is abnormal. OFF Blinking

16#1802 Hardware failure OFF Blinking

16#1804 The factory calibration is abnormal. OFF Blinking

The signal received by channel 1 exceeds the range of inputs

16#1808
that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 2 exceeds the range of inputs that

16#1809
the hardware can receive. Run: blinking
Blinking
The signal received by channel 3 exceeds the range of inputs that Stop: OFF
16#180A
the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 4 exceeds the range of inputs that

16#180B
the hardware can receive.

6-48
 Ch a pt er 6 Tem per at u r e M eas ur em ent M o d u le A S 0 4/ 0 8T C

Error A↔ D LED ERROR LED

Description
Code Indicator Indicator

The signal received by channel 5 exceeds the range of inputs that

16#180C
the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 6 exceeds the range of inputs that

16#180D
the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 7 exceeds the range of inputs that

16#180E
the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 8 exceeds the range of inputs that

16#180F
the hardware can receive.

Blinking once

or twice and

after 2
- When power-on, the module is not detected by CPU module. OFF
seconds, it

blinks

repeatedly

6.4.2 Troubleshooting Procedure

Description Procedure
6_
Ensure the external 24 V power supply to the module is
The external voltage is abnormal.
functioning normally.

Hardware failure Return the module to the factory for repair.

Internal error
Contact the factory.
The factory calibration is abnormal.

The signal received by channel 1 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 1.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 2 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 2.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 3 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 3.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 4 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 4.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 5 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 5.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

6-49
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Description Procedure

The signal received by channel 6 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 6.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 7 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 7.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

The signal received by channel 8 exceeds the

Check the signal received by channel 8.
range of inputs that the hardware can receive.

When power-on, the module is not detected by Check if the connection between module and CPU

CPU module. module is working. If not, connect again.

_6

6-50
 7
Chapter 7 Load Cell Module AS02LC

Table of Contents
7.1 Overview ........................................................................................... 7-2

7.2 Specifications .................................................................................... 7-2

7.2.1 Specifications ................................................................................ 7-2
7.2.2 Profile........................................................................................... 7-3
7.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals ............................................................... 7-4
7.2.4 Control Registers ........................................................................... 7-5
7.2.5 Functions .................................................................................... 7-12
7.2.6 Wiring ........................................................................................ 7-18

7.3 Making Adjustments ........................................................................ 7-20

7.3.1 Steps to adjust points................................................................... 7-20
7.3.2 Adjustment settings / LC Wizard .................................................... 7-21
7.3.3 Adjustment settings / Instructional calibration ................................. 7-25
7.3.4 LED Indicators ............................................................................. 7-28

7.4 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft ..................................................................... 7-28

7.4.1 Initial Setting .............................................................................. 7-28
7.4.2 Checking the Version of a Module .................................................. 7-31
7.4.3 Online Mode ................................................................................ 7-32
7.4.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File ............................................. 7-33
7.4.5 Parameters ................................................................................. 7-34

7.5 Troubleshooting .............................................................................. 7-36

7.5.1 Error Codes ................................................................................. 7-36
7.5.2 Troubleshooting Procedure ............................................................ 7-37

7-1
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

7.1 Overview
This chapter describes the specifications for load cell modules, their operation, and their programming. You

can use the AS02LC load cell module with four-wire or six-wire load cells with various eigenvalues, so you

can adjust its response time according to your requirements. In addition, the AS02LC-A can read and write

data via the AS Series PLC units using the FROM/TO instructions. To ensure that the product is correctly

installed and operated, read the manual carefully before use. This manual provides functional specifications,

and it also introduces installation, basic operation, and settings. Refer to load cell related literature for more

details on the principles of operating load cells.

7.2 Specifications
7.2.1 Specifications
Load Cell Module Voltage Output
Rated Supply Voltage/Power
24 VDC (-15% to +20%)/5 W
Consumption
Minimum/Maximum Voltage 18–31.2 VDC
Maximum Current Consumption 150 mA
Input Signal Range ±40 mVDC
Sensibility +5 VDC +/-10%
Highest Precision 0.04%
Communication Interface RS-232, RS-485
Applicable Sensor Type 4-wire or 6-wire load cell
Expanding a Temperature
≤ ±50 ppm/K v. E
Coefficient
Reducing a Temperature
≤ ±0.4 μV/K
Coefficient to Zero
Linearity Error ≤0.02%
_7 Response Time 2.5, 10, 16, 20, 50, 60, 100, 200, and 400 ms
Eigenvalue Applicable to a Load
0–1, 0–2, 0–4, 0–6, 0–20, 0–40 and 0–80 mV/V
Cell
Maximum Distance for
100 meters
Connecting a Load Cell
Maximum Output Current 5 VDC x 160 mA
Allowable Load 40–4010 Ω
Common-mode Rejection Ratio
≥100 dB
(CMRR @50/60 Hz)
Dynamic Filter K1–K5
Average Weights K1–K100
Between a digital circuit and the ground: 500 VAC
Isolation Between an analog circuit and the ground: 500 VAC
Between an analog circuit and a digital circuit: 500 VAC

7-2
 Ch a pt er 7 L oa d Ce l l M od u l e A S 02 LC

7.2.2 Profile

38.2 95

02LC 1
7
7
EX C+ EX C -

SI G+ SI G -
CH1
SE N+ SE N- 2

98.3
88
SL D

EX C+ EX C-
3
SI G+ SI G-
CH2

8 SE N+ SE N-

SL D

2 4V

0V
4
9
5
6 75
35

Unit: mm

Number Name Description

1 Model Name Model name of the module

Operating status of the module

RUN LED Indicator ON: the module is running.

OFF: the module is not running.

Error status of the module

ERROR LED ON: a serious error exists in the module.

2
Indicator OFF: the module is operating normally.

Blink: a minor error exists in the module.

Digital-to-Analog Digital-to-analog conversion status

Conversion Blinking: conversion is in process.

7_
Indicator OFF: conversion has stopped.

Removable The inputs are connected to transducers.

3
Terminal Block The outputs are connected to loads to be driven.

Arrangement of the

4 Input/Output Arrangement of the terminals

Terminals

5 Clip For removing the terminal block

6 DIN Rail Clip Secures the module onto the DIN rail

Module Connecting Connects the modules

7
Set

8 Ground Clip

7-3
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

7.2.3 Arrangement of Terminals

AS02LC-A

02LC

EX C+ EX C -

SI G+ SI G -
C H1
SE N+ SE N-

SL D

EX C+ EX C-

SI G+ SI G-
C H2
SE N+ SE N-

SL D

2 4V

0V

_7

7-4
 Ch a pt er 7 L oa d Ce l l M od u l e A S 02 LC

7.2.4 Control Registers

*If you use HWCONFIG to set values in CRs, once the set value is downloaded, the values can be retained in

the module; however if you use TO instruction to write data into CRs, the values CANNOT be retained, after

power failure or after transition of the CPU from STOP to RUN.

Note: The attribute of the CR must be W (write) to use TO instruction.

CR# Name Description Att. Default

0: disabled

Display options for 1: gross weight

0 R/W 1
channel 1 2: net weight

3: raw data

0: 1 mV/V

1: 2 mV/V

2: 4 mV/V

1 Eigenvalue for channel 1 3: 6 mV/V R/W 1

4: 20 mV/V

5: 40 mV/V

6: 80 mV/V

0: 2.5ms

1: 10ms

2: 16ms

3: 20ms

2 Sampling cycle for channel 1 4: 50ms R/W 4

5: 60ms 7_
6: 100ms

7: 200ms

8: 400ms

Weight measured times in a

3 Range: K1–K500 R/W 5
stability range for channel 1

4 Floating-point format
Stability range for channel 1 R/W 10
5 Range: 0–100000

Floating-point format
6 Maximum weight for channel 1 R/W 100,000
Maximum measuring weight; when the

7-5
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

CR# Name Description Att. Default

weight measured exceeds the limit, an

7 alarm is triggered. The value should be

greater than 1.

0: no filter (default)

8 Filter mode for channel 1 1: maximum filter mode R/W 0

2: average filter mode

Range: 0–8; the bigger the number the

9 Maximum filter for channel 1 R/W 1
stronger the filter

Average weight measured Range: 1–100

10 R/W 10
times for channel 1 (for FW V1.04: 1–400 is available)

11 Floating-point format
Upper limit of the zero return
Determines the current weight as the zero R/W 10
for channel 1
12
point in the upper/lower range; when the

13 lower range is larger than the upper range,

Lower limit of the zero return
the lower range is read as the upper range R/W -10
for channel 1
14 and vice versa.

Zero point tracking time for Range: 5–500

15 R/W 10
channel 1 Unit: 100 ms

16 Zero point tracking range for Floating-point format

R/W 0
17 channel 1 Range: 0–10000; 0: disabled
_7
18 Calibration points for channel 1 Range: 2–20 R/W 2

Floating-point format

19–58 Calibrated weight for channel 1 Calibrated weight of the calibration points R/W -

1–20

0: disabled

1: gross weight
59 Display options for channel 2 R/W 1
2: net weight

3: raw data

0：1 mV/V

60 Eigenvalue for channel 2 1：2 mV/V R/W 1

2：4 mV/V

7-6
 Ch a pt er 7 L oa d Ce l l M od u l e A S 02 LC

CR# Name Description Att. Default

3：6 mV/V

4：20 mV/V

5：40 mV/V

6：80 mV/V

0：2.5 ms

1：10 ms

2：16 ms

3：20 ms

61 Sampling cycle for channel 2 4：50 ms R/W 4

5：60 ms

6：100 ms

7：200 ms

8：400 ms

Weight measured times in a

62 Range: K1–K500 R/W 5
stability range for channel 2

63 Floating-point format
Stability range for channel 2 R/W 10
64 Range: 0–100000

Floating-point format
65
Maximum measuring weight; when the
Maximum weight for channel 2 weight measured exceeds the limit, an R/W 100,000

alarm is triggered. The value should be

66
greater than 1. 7_
0: no filter (default)

67 Filter mode for channel 2 1: maximum filter mode R/W 0

2: average filter mode

Range: 0–8; the bigger the number the

68 Maximum filter for channel 2 R/W 1
stronger the filter

Average weight measured Range: 1–100

69 R/W 10
times for channel 2 (for FW V1.04: 1–400 is available)

70 Upper limit of the zero return Floating-point format

R/W 10
71 for channel 2
Determines the current weight as the zero
72 Lower limit of the zero return point in the upper/lower range; when the
R/W -10
73 for channel 2 lower range is larger than the upper range,

7-7
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

CR# Name Description Att. Default

the lower range is read as the upper range

and vice versa.

Zero point tracking time for Range: 5–500

74 R/W 10
channel 2 Unit: 100 ms

75 Zero point tracking range for Floating-point format

R/W 0
76 channel 2 Range: 0–10000; 0: disabled

77 Calibration points for channel 2 Range: 2–20 R/W 2

Floating-point format

78–117 Calibrated weight for channel 2 Calibrated weight of the calibration points R/W -

1–20

118 Decimal place for channel 1 Range: 0–4 R/W 1

119 Decimal place for channel 2 Range: 0–4 R/W 1

0: warning

1: alarm

120 Alarm Bit0: error in the power supply R/W 0

Bit1: error in the module hardware

Bit2: error in the driver board

200 State register Refer to the explanation below. R/W -

201 Instruction set Refer to the explanation below. W 0

210 The maximum peak value for Floating-point format -

R
211 channel 1 Maximum peak value for channel 1 -
_7
212 The maximum peak value for Floating-point format -
R
213 channel 2 Maximum peak value for channel 2 -

214 The minimum peak value for Floating-point format -

R
215 channel 1 Minimum peak value for channel 1 -

216 The minimum peak value for Floating-point format -

R
217 channel 2 Minimum peak value for channel 2 -

The time to record for channel Unit: 1 ms

222 50
1 Range: 1–100 (1 ms–1 s)
R/W
The time to record for channel Time to record the digital value for the
223 50
2 channels

240 The number of records for Range: 0–500; display the current records R -

7-8
 Ch a pt er 7 L oa d Ce l l M od u l e A S 02 LC

CR# Name Description Att. Default

channel 1

The number of records for

241 -
channel 2

604 -
Tare measured by channel 1 Display the tare measured by channel 1 R/W
605 -

606 -
Tare measured by channel 2 Display the tare measured by channel 2 R/W
607 -

700– Theoretical calibration for Floating-point format

R/W 0
739 channel 1 Output voltage unit: mV

740– Theoretical calibration for Floating-point format

R/W 0
779 channel 2 Output voltage unit: mV

4000 Floating-point format

Records for channel 1 R -
–4999 500 records for channel 1

5000 Floating-point format

Records for channel 2 R -
–5999 500 records for channel 2

7_

7-9
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Normal Exchange Area

Explanation

You can view the error code, the channel value, and the state code, as well as the data registers that

correspond to their instructions on the Normal Exchange Area tab of the Device Setting dialog box in the

HWCONFIG utility in ISPSoft.

C R # 2 0 0 : Codes for the state register

Explanation

Bit Code Definition Bit Code Definition

Error exists in the power Error exists in the

b0 16#0001 b1 16#0002
_7 supply. module hardware.

Error exists in the driver

b2 16#0004 b3 16#0008 Calibration disabled
board.

b4 16#0010 Reserved b5 16#0020 Reserved

The weight measured

The weight measured by CH1 by CH2 exceeds the

exceeds the maximum weight maximum weight that

b6 16#0040 b7 16#0080
that can be measured, or the can be measured, or

voltage of SEN is incorrect. the voltage of SEN is

incorrect.

The weight measured by CH1 The weight measured

b8 16#0100 b9 16#0200
exceeds the maximum weight by CH2 exceeds the

7-10
 Ch a pt er 7 L oa d Ce l l M od u l e A S 02 LC

Bit Code Definition Bit Code Definition

that can be measured. maximum weight that

can be measured.

CH1 has been adjusted CH2 has been adjusted

b10 16#0400 b11 16#0800
incorrectly. incorrectly.

CH1 is not measuring any CH2 is not measuring

b12 16#1000 b13 16#2000
weight. any weight.

The weight measured

The weight measured by CH1
by CH2 is in the
b14 16#4000 is in the stability range b15 16#8000
stability range
specified.
specified.

Note: The state is determined by the corresponding bit and it is possible to have more than 2 states at the

same time.

C R # 2 0 1 : Instruction set

Explanation

Input value Description Input value Description

Start a new recording of the peak value for

0 No action 16#0101
channel 1.

Instructions for calibrating calibration Start a new recording of the peak value for
1–20 16#0102
points 1–20 in channel 1 channel 2.

21–40
Instructions for calibrating calibration
16#010F
Start a new recording of the peak value for 7_
points 1–20 in channel 2 channels 1–2.

98 Activate the weight calibration. 16#0201 Start a new recording for channel 1.

99 Deactivate the weight calibration. 16#0202 Start a new recording for channel 2.

100 Subtract the tare measured by CH1. 16#020F Start a new recording for channels 1–2.

Do not subtract the tare measured by

101 16#0211 Stop recording for channel 1.
CH1.

Restore the weight measured by CH1 Stop recording for channel 2.

102 16#0212
to 0.

103 Subtract the tare measured by CH2. 16#021F Stop recording for channels 1–2.

Do not subtract the tare measured by Start a theoretical calibration for channel 1.
104 16#0301
CH2.

7 - 11
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Input value Description Input value Description

Restore the weight measured by CH2 Start a theoretical calibration for channel 2.
105 16#0302
to 0.

Start a theoretical calibration for Restore default settings and clear settings
16#030F 16#0501
channels 1–2. in Flash.

Restore default settings and settings

16#0502 16#6000 Read the current settings from Flash
in Flash stay intact.

16#6001 Write the current settings into Flash

7.2.5 Functions

Item Function Description

Measuring net
1 Various measuring modes to choose from
weight

When an object is put on a load cell, you can check whether the
2 Stability check
present weight of the object is in a specified stability range.

Determining zero If an object is removed from the load cell, no weight is measured.
3
point

Filter out the maximum or minimum weight measured or use an

4 Filter out weights
average weight for a more accurate value.

Multi-point
5 There are as many as 20 points for adjustment
adjustment

_7 Theoretical Calibration based on the output value of the sensor instead of the real
6
calibration weight calibration

7 Zero point tracking Zero point tracking

Limit detections for

8 Save the maximum and minimum values for channels.
channels

Records for
9 Save the analog curves for channels.
channels

7-12
 Ch a pt er 7 L oa d Ce l l M od u l e A S 02 LC

1. Measuring net weight

You can choose to measure either the net weight or the gross weight of an object. Net weight is the actual

weight of a product without its package. The weight of a package is the tare. Gross weight is the total weight:

net weight plus tare.

 Tare: the weight of a package

 Net weight: the weight of a product, that is, the actual weight of a product without its package

 Gross weight: the total weight, that is, the net weight of a product plus the tare weight of its package

 Gross weight=Net weight+Tare

Example: a product weighs 10 kg, and the carton in which the product is packed weighs 0.2 kg. The

gross weight is 10.2 kg.

Net weight=10 kg

Tare=0.2 kg

Gross weight=10.2 kg

2. Checking stability

When an object is placed on a load cell, you can check whether the present weight of the object is in a

specified stability range.

 If the weight measured is in the specified stability range, the corresponding bit is set to 1.
7_
 If the weight measured exceeds the specified stability range, the corresponding bit is set to 0 until the

number of objects weighed in the stability range reaches the setting.

Example: the measurement time set is 10 ms, the number of weights measured in a stability range is 10, and

the stability range is 1000 g. If a variation exceeds 1000 g, the corresponding bit is set to 0. If the variations

within 100 ms (10×10 ms) are within 1000 g, the corresponding bit is set to 1. You should determine whether

the present weight measured is in the stability range before you perform control actions.

7-13
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

△ : Va ri a ti on s in a ve ra g e we ig h ts
t
t: Me a su r em en t tim e se t by use rs
k
k: Sta b il i ty ra ng e se t by use r s
<k
< kk △<k
m △<
m: Num be r o f we i gh ts me a su re d i n <kk
△<
a sta bi l ity ra n g e △>
>kk
>k
△> k
A ve r ag e we i gh t
>k
△> k

△> k

△>
>kk

>k
△> k
△

△> k
>k

T ime

B it in th e sta b il it y ran g e t m

b it

3. Determining zero point

If an object is removed from the load cell, the corresponding bit is set to 1, and you can perform the next

control action. If a weight measured is in the specified zero range, the corresponding bit is also set to 1.

No o b je ct

Ch 1
L oa d ce ll

CH 2

_7 Average weight

Zero range

Time

Zero weight

7-14
 Ch a pt er 7 L oa d Ce l l M od u l e A S 02 LC

4. Filtering out weights

There are two ways to filter out weights.

 Filtering out the maximum/minimum weight measured: If there is a maximum weight or a minimum

weight, you can filter out the maximum weight or the minimum weight. The larger the value, the more

weights are filtered out. Range: K0–K8

 Averaging weights: The values recorded are averaged so that a steady value is obtained. There may be

peak values due to unavoidable external factors, and the average value obtained may change

accordingly. A maximum of 100 values can be averaged.

5. Making multi-point adjustments

Make adjustments to get the weight measured by a cell to correspond to the digital value displayed by the

load cell module. Generally, two points are adjusted. After a system is set up, put no load on the scale. The

weight measured is 0 grams when there is no load. Then place an object of a given weight on the scale, and

set a digital value corresponding to the weight. At that point, two points have been adjusted. For example, if

you have a load cell sensor which can measure a maximum weight of 10 kg, and if 1 kg corresponds to

K1000, the curve is like the one shown below.

Weight

10 kg

Point
1 kg

Digital value
K0 K1000 K10000 (LSB)
7_
Adjusting two points

In addition to this two-point adjustment, the load cell also supports adjustments of up to 20 points. A

characteristic curve is shown below.

Weight
Point 5
10 kg

Point 3
Point 4

Point 1
1 kg
Point 2

Digital value
K0 K1000 K10000 (LSB)

Adjusting multiple points

7-15
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

6. Determining theoretical calibration

Theoretical calibration is determined according to the sensor specification in order to input the voltage values

corresponding to various weights. The registers for storing the voltage values are CR#700–739 for channel 1

and CR#740–779 for channel 2. After entering the voltage values into the registers, you can use the

instruction set 16#301–302 to execute the calibration.

Example: the sensor specification is 10 kg and its eigenvalue is 2 mV/V. When the sensor is loaded with a 10

kg weight, the output is 10 mV. The theoretical calibration steps are:

Step 1: set the eigenvalue.

Step 2: set the 2-point adjustment; when the sensor is loaded with a 1 kg weight, set the value to 1000.

Step 3: set the voltage calibration for the zero point to 0 (0 mV) in the CR#700/701 registers, and to 1.0 (1
mV) in the CR702/703 registers.

_7 Step 4: enable the calibration function and enter 98 into the instruction set CR#201.

Step 5: enter 16#0301 into the instruction set CR#201 to execute a theoretical calibration for channels 1.

Step 6: do not put any load on the sensor and enter 16#102 into the instruction set CR#201 to reset the value

to 0 for channel 1.

Step 7: disable the calibration function to prevent inappropriate changes. To complete the theoretical

calibration, enter 99 into the instruction set CR#201. Put a 1 kg weight on the sensor and the load cell should

show 1000.

7-16
 Ch a pt er 7 L oa d Ce l l M od u l e A S 02 LC

Weight

Point

D igita l v alue

2 -point a djustme nt

Step 8: write 16#6001 in CR#201 to disable the calibration function to write the current settings into Flash and

have the settings in the latched area.

7. Zero point tracking

Zero point tracking refers to resetting the current value to 0. You can reset the value to 0 within a certain

duration or at a certain weight. This is especially useful when the sensor is no longer as accurate as it was

before.

8. Limit detections for channels

Save the maximum and minimum values for channels so you can determine the peak to peak values.

Valu e o f the chan nel

7_
Maximum valu e

Mini mu m va lue

Time

7-17
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

9. Recording channels

Record the input values of the cyclic sampling for each channel. The system saves up to 500 data points and

the recording time is 10 ms.

Valu e o f the chan nel

500 records o f d ata

Ti me
Instru cti on for recordi ng Recordin g e nds

7.2.6 Wiring
 External wiring

EX C+ A+5V
EX C- AGND
F our -wir e
SIG+
SIG-
CH 1
SE N+
SE N-

EX C+ A+5V
Six- wire EX C- AGND
SIG+

_7 SIG-
CH 2
SE N+
SE N-

Connected to
on a power supply m odule *1 A+5V
System 0V DC/DC
ground 24V conver ter
AGND
T hir d gr ound
( Im pedance: Less than 100 )

7-18
 Ch a pt er 7 L oa d Ce l l M od u l e A S 02 LC

 Multiple load cells connected in parallel are connected to a single load cell module.

Lo ad c ell

Lo ad c ell

Lo ad c ell

CH1
Lo ad c ell

Lo ad c ell
CH2

Lo ad c ell

Lo ad c ell

Loa d ce ll

Note 1: Please connect on the power supply module and on the load cell module to a system
ground, and then ground the system ground or connect the system ground to a distribution box.

Note 2: If multiple load cells are connected in parallel, the total impedance should be greater than 40 Ω.

7_

7-19
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

7.3 Making Adjustments

Make adjustments to get the weight measured by a cell to correspond to the digital value displayed by the

load cell module. You can make adjustments by following the instructions below or by setting up the

theoretical calibration (refer to section 7.2.5 for more details).

7.3.1 Steps to adjust points

En tering adjust ment

Sett ing th e to tal numb er of

points which need to be
adjust ed

No weight

Writing an adjus tmen t en abled

ins truc tion

YES
Writing an ad ju st ment enabled A djust ing th e nex t point
ins truc tion

NO

Writing an ad ju stme nt dis abled

ins truc tion

_7 The adjust ment is c omplet e.

7-20
 Ch a pt er 7 L oa d Ce l l M od u l e A S 02 LC

7.3.2 Adjustment settings / LC Wizard

Step 1: set the eigenvalue in the HWCONFIG utility in ISPSoft.

Step 2: set the number of adjustments and their corresponding values. The example below shows a 2-point

adjustment in which point 1 = 0 and point 2 = 1000, corresponding to 1 kg.

7_

7-21
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Step 3: after the configuration is complete, download the parameters to the module.

Step 4: right click the module and then click on LC Wizard to open the LC Wizard.

_7

7-22
 Ch a pt er 7 L oa d Ce l l M od u l e A S 02 LC

Step 5: make sure the channel and the adjusted points displayed are the same as you have set.

Step 6: put no load on the load cell (adjustment point 1) and click Next to proceed.

7_

7-23
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Step 7: Put a load on the load cell (adjustment point 2). For multi-point adjustment, repeat this step. This

example uses a 1 kg weight.

Step 8: the calibration is complete.

_7

A characteristic curve is shown below.

Weig ht

1 0 kg

Po int
1 kg

Dig ita l val ue

0 1 000 1 000 0

Ad ju sti ng two p oi nts

7-24
 Ch a pt er 7 L oa d Ce l l M od u l e A S 02 LC

7.3.3 Adjustment settings / Instructional calibration

Step 1: set the eigenvalue in the HWCONFIG utility in ISPSoft.

Step 2: set the number of adjustments and their corresponding values. The example below shows a 2-point

adjustment where point 1 = 0 and point 2 = 1000, corresponding to 1 kg.

7_

7-25
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Step 3: after the configuration is complete, download the parameters to the module.

Step 4: verify that the corresponding address the instruction is D28007 in the Normal Exchange Area.

_7

7-26
 Ch a pt er 7 L oa d Ce l l M od u l e A S 02 LC

Step 5: enter the instruction for activating the weight calibration 98 into D28007.

Step 6: put no load on the load cell (adjustment point 1) and enter 1 into D28007. 1 represents channel 1 and

2 represents channel 2.

Step 7: put a load on the load cell (adjustment point 2). For multi-point adjustment, repeat this step. This

example uses a 1 kg weight.

7_
Step 8: to complete the adjustment, enter the instruction for deactivating the weight calibration 99 into

D28007.

A characteristic curve is shown below.

Weig ht

1 0 kg

Po int
1 kg

Dig ita l val ue

0 1 000 1 000 0

Ad ju sti ng two p oi nts

7-27
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

7.3.4 LED Indicators

Number Name Description

Operating status of the module

1 RUN LED Indicator ON: the module is running.

OFF: the module is not running.

Error status of the module

ERROR LED ON: a serious error exists in the module.

2
Indicator OFF: the module is operating normally.

Blink: a minor error exists in the module.

Digital to Analog Digital-to-analog conversion status

3 Conversion Blinking: conversion is in process.

Indicator OFF: conversion has stopped.

7.4 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft

7.4.1 Initial Setting

(1) Start ISPSoft and double-click HWCONFIG.

_7

7-28
 Ch a pt er 7 L oa d Ce l l M od u l e A S 02 LC

(2) Select a module and drag it to the working area.

(3) Double-click the module in the working area to open the Device Setting page.

7_

7-29
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(4) Choose the parameter, set the values, and click OK.

(5) Click Download on the toolbar to download the parameters. Note that you cannot download the
parameters while the CPU module is running.)

_7

7-30
 Ch a pt er 7 L oa d Ce l l M od u l e A S 02 LC

7.4.2 Checking the Version of a Module

(1) On the Option menu, click Online Mode.

(2) Double-click the module to open the Device Setting page. The versions of both the firmware and the

hardware are displayed.

7_

7-31
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

7.4.3 Online Mode

(1) On the Option menu, click Online Mode.

(2) Right-click the module and click Module Status.

(3) View the module status.

_7

7-32
 Ch a pt er 7 L oa d Ce l l M od u l e A S 02 LC

7.4.4 Importing/Exporting a Parameter File

(1) Click Export in the Device Settings dialog box to save the current parameters as a CSV file (.csv).

(2) Click Import in the Device Settings dialog box and select a CSV file to import saved parameters.

7_

7-33
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

7.4.5 Parameters
(1) Settings for channel 1

(2) Adjustment for channel 1

_7

7-34
 Ch a pt er 7 L oa d Ce l l M od u l e A S 02 LC

(3) Settings for channel 2

(4) Adjustment for channel 2

7_

7-35
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(5) Alarm settings

7.5 Troubleshooting
7.5.1 Error Codes

Error A↔ D LED ERROR LED

Description
Code indicator indicator

16#1605 Hardware failure OFF ON

16#1607 The external voltage is abnormal. OFF ON

16#1801 The external voltage is abnormal. OFF Blinking

_7 16#1802 Hardware failure OFF Blinking

16#1807 The driver board is abnormal. OFF Blinking

The weight measured by CH1 exceeds the maximum weight that

16#1808
can be measured, or the voltage of SEN is incorrect.

The weight measured by CH1 exceeds the maximum weight that

16#1809
can be measured.

16#180A CH1 is adjusted incorrectly. Run: blinking

Blinking
The weight measured by CH2 exceeds the maximum weight that Stop: OFF
16#180B
can be measured, or the voltage of SEN is incorrect.

The weight measured by CH2 exceeds the maximum weight that

16#180C
can be measured.

16#180D CH2 is adjusted incorrectly.

7-36
 Ch a pt er 7 L oa d Ce l l M od u l e A S 02 LC

Error A↔ D LED ERROR LED

Description
Code indicator indicator

Blinking once

or twice and

after 2
- When power-on, the module is not detected by CPU module. OFF
seconds, it

blinks

repeatedly

7.5.2 Troubleshooting Procedure

Description Procedure

The external voltage is abnormal. Ensure the power supply is functioning correctly.

Hardware failure Return the module to the factory for repair.

The driver board is abnormal. Return the module to the factory for repair.

The weight measured by CH1 exceeds the

maximum weight that can be measured, or the Check the signal received by channel 1 and its wiring.

voltage of SEN is incorrect.

The weight measured by CH1 exceeds the Check the parameters of the related weight values for

maximum weight that can be measured. channel 1.

Check the adjusted weight value and the adjustment

CH1 is adjusted incorrectly.
steps for channel 1.

The weight measured by CH2 exceeds the

7_
maximum weight that can be measured, or the Check the signal received by channel 2 and its wiring.

voltage of SEN is incorrect.

The weight measured by CH2 exceeds the Check the parameters of the related weight values for

maximum weight that can be measured. channel 2.

Check the adjusted weight value and the adjustment

CH2 is adjusted incorrectly.
steps for channel 2.

When power-on, the module is not detected by Check if the connection between module and CPU

CPU module. module is working. If not, connect again.

7-37
 8
Chapter 8 Serial Communication Module
AS00SCM

Table of Contents
8.1 Introduction ...................................................................................... 8-3

8.2 Specification, Function and Wiring .................................................... 8-4

8.2.1 The functional specifications ................................................................. 8-4
8.2.2 Dimensions and Profile ........................................................................ 8-5
8.2.3 Wiring ............................................................................................... 8-7
8.2.3.1 AS00SCM-A Power Wiring .............................................................. 8-7
8.2.3.2 AS00SCM-A Communication Interface ............................................. 8-8

8.3 COM mode ......................................................................................... 8-9

8.3.1 Modbus.............................................................................................. 8-9
8.3.2 UD Link ........................................................................................... 8-10
8.3.2.1 TX Packets and RX Packets ........................................................... 8-11
8.3.2.2 Command .................................................................................. 8-13
8.3.3 CANopen Mode ................................................................................. 8-14
8.3.3.1 Features .................................................................................... 8-14
8.3.3.2 Corresponding Input / Output Device Range ................................... 8-15

8.4 RTU Mode ........................................................................................ 8-16

8.4.1 CANopen Mode (AS-FCOPM) ............................................................... 8-16
8.4.1.1 AS Remote Communication Mode .................................................. 8-17
8.4.1.2 Delta Special Driver & AS Remote Mode ......................................... 8-18
8.4.1.3 CANopen DS301 Mode ................................................................. 8-19
8.4.2 EtherNet/IP Mode ............................................................................. 8-20
8.4.2.1 Connecting to Delta PLC Scanner through EIP Builder ...................... 8-20
8.4.2.2 Connecting to 3rd Party PLC Scanner through EIP Builder ................ 8-23
8.4.3 Remote Module Setting................................................................. 8-27

8.5 Normal Exchange Area .................................................................... 8-29

8.6 Application ...................................................................................... 8-31

8.6.1 Modbus............................................................................................ 8-31
8.6.1.1 Modbus Slave─Connection to Delta Products .................................. 8-31
8.6.1.2 Modbus Master─Connection to Delta Products................................. 8-34
8.6.2 UD Link ........................................................................................... 8-40
8.6.3 Remote IO Application (AS-FCOPM) ..................................................... 8-55
8.6.4 Remote IO Application (AS-FEN02) ..................................................... 8-63
8.6.5 Remote IO Application (Multiple AS-FEN02).......................................... 8-65
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

8.7 Error Codes ..................................................................................... 8-67

8.7.1 Troubleshooting for Module AS00SCM-A as a Communication Module ....... 8-68
8.7.1.1 ERROR LED Indicators are ON ....................................................... 8-68
8.7.1.2 ERROR LED Indicators Blinking Every 0.5 Seconds ........................... 8-68
8.7.2 Troubleshooting for Module AS00SCM-A as a Remote Module ............... 8-69
8.7.2.1 ERROR LED Indicators Are ON ....................................................... 8-69
8.7.2.2 ERROR LED Indicators Blinking Every 0.5 Seconds ........................... 8-69
8.7.2.3 ERROR LED Indicators Blinking Every 0.2 Seconds ........................... 8-70

_8

8-2
 Ch a pt er 8 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

8.1 Introduction
Thank you for using the AS00SCM-A, a serial communication module. To ensure that your AS00SCM-A is installed
and operated correctly, read this manual carefully before using the module.

The AS00SCM-A is a serial communication module, supporting the following communication cards:

 Serial communication cards: AS-F232, AS-F422, and AS-F485 support Modbus and UD Link (user-defined
format).

 CANopen communication card AS-FCOPM (Card 2) can be used as AS series remote module and supports
CANopen DS301. AS00SCM-A should be firmware V2.00 or later.

 Ethernet communication card AS-FEN02 (Card 2) supports Modbus TCP Client/Server and EtherNet/IP
Adapter (DLR function not included). AS00SCM-A should be firmware V2.02 or later.

You can configure the AS00SCM-A by using ISPSoft. Download ISPSoft V3.06 or later from Delta’s official website. If
you use UD Link, configure it through SCMSoft, which is embedded in DCISoft. Download DCISoft V1.19 or later
from Delta’s official website. You can set up the EtherNet/IP via EIP Builder. Download EIP Builder V1.06 or later from
Delta’s official website.

RTU
COM (series COM ports)
Protocols (Remote control)
Card 1 Card 2 Card 2
AS-F232 V V -
MODBUS
AS-F485 V V -
UD Link
AS-F422 V V -

AS Remote Communication
V (Slave) (FW V2.00 or later)
Delta Special Driver & AS
AS-FCOPM - (FW V2.00 or
Remote Mode
later)
CANopen DS301 (FW V2.02 or later)

EtherNet/IP
AS-FEN02 - - (FW V2.02 or later)
MODBUS TCP

8_

8-3
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

8.2 Specification, Function and Wiring

8.2.1 The functional specifications
 RS-485/RS-422 communication interface

Item Specifications
Connector type 5- pin European-style terminal block, spring-clip connector
300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 76800 115200 and
Transmission speed
230400 bps
Stop bit: 1 bit and 2 bits
Communication
Parity bit: none, an odd parity bit, and an even parity bit
format
Data bit: 7 bits and 8 bits
Communication Modbus ASCII/RTU
protocol UD Link

 CANopen communication interface

Item Specifications
Connector type RJ45*2
Transmission speed 10k, 20k, 50k, 125k, 250k, 500k, and 1000k bps
Communication AS remote mode (RTU mode)
protocol CANopen (firmware V2.00 or later)

 Ethernet communication interface

Item Specifications
Connector type RJ45*2
Transmission speed 10M, 100Mbps
Communication
Modbus TCP, EtherNet/IP (firmware V2.02 or later)
protocol

 Electrical specifications

Item Specifications
Supply voltage 24 VDC
Electric energy
0.6 W
consumption
Approximately 169 g
_8 Weight

8-4
 Ch a pt er 8 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

8.2.2 Dimensions and Profile

SCM
1 PO WER

7 ER RO R
7
2 CA RD 1
CA RD 2

98 .3
ID 1

88
3
FOR M AT 1

4
8
ID 2

F OR MA T 2
9
5 C OM . RTU

6 75
10 56
Unit: mm

Number Name Description

1 Model Name Model name of the module
Operating status of the module
RUN LED Indicator (blue) ON: the module is running.
OFF: the module has low voltage or no power.
Error status of the module
ON: there is a hardware error.
OFF: the module is operating normally.
ERROR LED Indicator (red)
2 Blink: 1. the configuration of the module is invalid, or there is a
communication error (blinking every 1 second).
2. hardware/low voltage error (blinking every 0.2 seconds)
Function card 1 Indicator Blink: data is being transmitted to function card 1.
(orange) OFF: there is no data transmission to function card 1.
Function card 2 Indicator Blink: data is being transmitted to function card 2.
(orange) OFF: there is no data transmission to function card 2.
Switch for the Node ID and
3 2 sets, one for function card 1 and the other for function card 2
Format
Function Card 1 Slot For AS-F232, AS-F422, AS-F485
4 For AS-F232, AS-F422, AS-F485, AS-FCOPM, and AS-FEN02 (in RTU
Function Card 2 Slot
mode only)

5 Switch for the Work Mode

COM: communication mode
8_
RTU: remote control mode
6 DIN Rail Clip Secures the module onto the DIN rail
7 Module Connecting Set Connects the modules
8 Ground Clip
9 Label Nameplate
10 RTU Power Input Supplies power to the RTU module

8-5
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

 Switch for the node ID and format

1. Modbus communication (AS-F232/AS-F422/AS-F485): can be installed in Card 1 and Card 2 (in COM mode
only). Use the switch to set the node ID and its setting range is 0x01–0x0F. You can use ISPSoft (HWCONFIG)
to set up the node ID, when the switch is turned to 0. Follow the descriptions shown on the HWCONFIG for node
ID setting range.

ID Setup (AS-F232/AS-F422/AS-F485)
ID1/ID2 Node ID Setup ID1/ID2 Node ID Setup

0 Use ISPSoft (HWCONFIG) 1-F Manual Setting

2. CANopen (AS-FCOPM): can only be installed in Card 2.

COM Mode (SCM mode): use the switch to set the node ID and its setting range is 0x01–0x0F. You can use
ISPSoft (HWCONFIG) to set up the node ID, when the switch is turned to 0. Follow the descriptions shown on the
HWCONFIG for node ID setting range.

RTU Mode: the setting varies according to different CANopen communication mode; refer to section 8.4.1 for more
details.

ID Setup (AS-FCOPM in COM mode) COM. RTU

ID2 Node ID Setup ID2 Node ID Setup

0 Use ISPSoft (HWCONFIG) 1-F Manual Setting

 Switch for the communication format

1. Modbus communication (AS-F232/AS-F422/AS-F485): can be installed in Card 1 and Card 2 (in COM mode
only). Use the Format Switch to set the communication mode. You can use ISPSoft (HWCONFIG) to set up the
communication mode, when the Format Switch is turned to 0. If you need to set the communication mode to UD
Link, you need to turn the Format Switch to 0. Refer to section 8.3.2 for more details.

Modbus (AS-F232/AS-F422/AS-F485) in COM mode

COM. RTU

Baud Baud
Format 1/ Data Stop ASCII/ Format 1/ Data Stop ASCII/
rate Parity rate Parity
Format 2 (bits) (bits) RTU Format 2 (bits) (bits) RTU
(bps) (bps)
0 Software setting 8 38400 8 None 2 RTU
1 9600 7 Even 1 ASCII 9 38400 8 None 1 RTU
2 9600 8 Even 1 RTU A 38400 7 Even 1 ASCII
_8 3 9600 7 None 2 ASCII B 57600 8 None 1 ASCII
4 9600 8 None 1 RTU C 76800 8 None 1 RTU
5 19200 7 Even 1 ASCII D 115200 7 None 1 ASCII
6 19200 8 None 1 RTU E 115200 8 Even 1 RTU
7 19200 8 Odd 2 RTU F 115200 7 None 2 ASCII

8-6
 Ch a pt er 8 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

2. CANopen (AS-FCOPM): can only be installed in Card 2; the communication mode can be set to COM/RTU
mode. Refer to the following table and use switch to set up. You cannot use ISPSoft (HWCONFIG) to set up the
communication mode in this format.

CANopen (AS-FCOPM)

Format 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8-F
Bit rates (bps) 10K 20K 50K 125K 250K 500K 1000K NA
Distance (m) 5000 2500 1000 500 250 100 25 NA

 Switch for IP address (AS-FEN02)

When using the communication card AS-FEN02, it only supports RTU mode and the IP address can be edited
through FORMAT 2. The parameters of AS-FEN02 are stored in AS300 PLC or AS00SCM-A. Thus you need to set up
the IP address for AS-FEN02 or use COMMGR to scan and check for the IP address of AS-FEN02.

1. When both switches ID2 and FORMAT 2 are set to 0, IP address is set through EIP Builder (ISPSoft ->
HWCONFIG).

 When connected to Delta AS/AH series, you can open HWCONFIG and EIP Builder through ISPSoft.
Add AS00SCM (RTU) + AS-FEN02 to your network and click the scanner device from the created
network in EIP Builder to open HWCONFIG to set up.

 When the scanner is from the third party, you can open EIP Builder directly. Add AS00SCM (RTU) + AS-
FEN02 to your network and click the scanner device from the created network in EIP Builder to open
HWCONFIG to set up.

2. When either ID2 or FORMAT 2 is NOT 0, IP address is set by switches ID2 and FORMAT 2. Hexadecimal
format is used and ID2 corresponds to x161 and FORMAT 2 to x160. The possible IP address is 192.168.1.x,
x=1~FE (1~254).

8.2.3 Wiring

8.2.3.1 AS00SCM-A Power Wiring

 COM mode:

Switch the work mode to COM. Install the module on the right hand side of the AS Series CPU. To avoid problems, do
not use an external power supply for this module.

 RTU mode:
8_
Switch the work mode to RTU. This module is equipped with an independent DC power connecter.

To ensure the serial communication module functions well and reliably, the external wiring must prevent noise. Before
you install cables, follow the precautions below.

8-7
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

(1) To prevent a surge and induction, the DC cable and other power cables that are connected to the AS00SCM-
A must be separate cables. An independent power supply is recommended for the AS00SCM-A.

SCM AS Series IO

D C Power Supply
24VD C
Min 1.5A

0V 2 4V
Ground

Ground
24V
DC Power Supply
24VD C
0V

Ground

Ground

24V
DC Power Supply Ot her
24V D C devices
0V

Ground

(2) The 24 VDC cable should be twisted pair, and the shorter end should be connected to the module.

(3) The cable (110 VAC, 220 VAC, and 24 VDC) must not be installed near a main circuit, a high-voltage cable,
or a cable connected to a load that is not a PLC. In addition, the cable must not be bound to a main circuit, a
high-voltage cable, or a cable connected to a load that is not a PLC. All the cables should be wired at least
100 mm apart.

(4) Ground the power supply using a 14 AWG wire.

(5) Connect 20–14 AWG (1 mm) wires to the input/output terminals. Use only copper leads that can resist

_8 temperatures above 60° C /75° C.

8.2.3.2 AS00SCM-A Communication Interface

 COM mode:

This module comes with two function card slots, supporting AS-F232, AS-F422, and AS-F485 communication cards.
The card 2 slot also supports the AS-FCOPM communication card when the firmware is V2.00 or later. Refer to
Chapter 9 for more information about wiring the cards.

 RTU mode:

The card 2 slot supports the AS-FCOPM communication card when the firmware is V2.00 or later and supports AS-
FEN02 when the firmware is V2.02. For wiring information, refer to Chapter 9.

8-8
 Ch a pt er 8 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

8.3 COM mode

This section introduces communication modes of AS00SCM-A module (firmware V2.00) when the communication
protocol is Modbus, UD Link or CANopen.

8.3.1 Modbus
The AS00SCM-A supports standard communication protocols such as Modbus RS232, RS422, and RS485. Once
you create a data exchange table, you can exchange data with slave modules.

 You can set up communication format and node ID via HWCONFIG. Refer to section 8.2.2 for more details.

 When AS00SCM-A acts as scanner/master, you can create a data exchange table and exchange data with
slave modules. To initialize Modbus communication: Open HWCONFIG. -> Set up the node ID and
communication format. -> Create a data exchange table. -> Select a Mode (Program Control, PLC Run, or
Always Enable). -> Download HWCONFIG. -> Enable this function. Refer to section 8.3 in AS Series Operation
Manual for more details.

 When AS00SCM acts as adapter/slave, it provides a communication channel for AS series PLC to read and
write.

Supporting function codes and addresses are shown below.

Function Code Attribute Supporting addresses
16#0000~16#0063
0x03 16#0100~16#0163
Read
0x04 16#0200~16#0263
16#0300~16#0363
0x06 16#0000~16#0063
Write
0x10 16#0200~16#0263
16#0000~16#0063
16#0100~16#0163
Read
16#0200~16#0263
0x17
16#0300~16#0363
16#0000~16#0063
Write
16#0200~16#0263

Addresses and corresponding registers for function card 1 / 2

Funciton cards Address for data Address for data
Length (character) Length (character)
to be written to be read
Function card 1 16#0000 100 16#0100 100
Function card 2 16#0200 100 16#0300 100 8_

 Corresponding data registers can be obtained when AS series PLC uses AS00SCM-A for communication and
via HWCONFIG to set up. Refer to section 8.6.1 for more details.

8-9
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

8.3.2 UD Link
The UD Link provides communications with devices that communicate via RS232, RS422 or RS485. You can edit a
packet according to its communication format to send and receive packets. This section introduces the use of UD
Link communications in COM mode. Make sure the switch of SCM module is turned to 0 before operation. SCMSoft
is embedded in DCISoft. Go to www.deltaww.com to download DCISoft V1.19 or later. And after that you can use
SCMSoft in ISPSoft.

The steps for creating a UD Link protocol communication are:

 In HWCONFIG

Set up the function card. -> Set the communication protocol to UD Link. -> Set up the communication format and
baud rate. -> Download to HWCONFIG. -> Use data length 8 byte as the communication format, 8E1, 8N1, 8O2 and
so forth to ensure a complete transmission. After setting, right-click the module to open SCMSoft in HWCONFIG.

 In SCMSoft

Upload the module parameters to UD Link. -> Right-click Group List to create a group list. -> Double-click the Group
List 1 to set up the slot number on the editing window on the right -> Right-click the created group list on the node to
create groups for data mapping. -> Define the Group ID and Group Name on the editing window on the right.

The slot number in the group list is the actual placement order of AS00SCM-A on the right-side of the PLC. For
example, the slot number 2 in the group list corresponds to the second module on the right-side of the PLC. Once the
group list is assigned to a certain slot, the CARD 1 and CARD 2 of its corresponding module can trigger the group list
of the selected slot. You need to create a new group list for different module that needs to use UD Link.

After the group list is created, you can edit packets for transmission.

Edit TX and RX packets. -> Create commands. -> Download parameters to UD Link. -> Download in groups and
once a group number is trigger, the function card starts to send and receive packets according to the comment order.

_8

8-10
 Ch a pt er 8 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

8.3.2.1 TX Packets and RX Packets

You can create several TX and RX packets in a group. A packet includes messages, an address, a length, and a
checksum.

 Packet Name: enter the packet name.

 Packet View: shows the packet contents.

 Packet Segment Edit: adjust the sequence of segments and add or delete segments.

No.: the segment number. You can create no more than 64 segments.

Class: the segment class. The available classes are Message, Address, Length, and Checksum.

Format: the data format of the segment. The available data formats are Hex (hexadecimal), ASCII, and Code.

Segment View: the contents of the segment

 Message: a message may be either Constant or Variable. Messages can be applied to a header segment, a start
bit segment, an end bit segment, and a data segment. There can be several messages in a packet.
8_
 Address: an address may be either Constant or Variable. There can be only one address segment in a packet.

 Length: enter the length of a packet. There can be only one length segment in a packet.

Class: 1 byte or 2 byes

Format: select a format for the length, Hex or ASCII

Value: enter a value for the length according to the format; unit: byte

 Checksum: edit the checksum. There can be only one checksum segment in a packet.

Class: select a Class.

Format: select the Format for the checksum.
Initial value: set the initial value for the checksum.

8 - 11
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Reverse: the high byte of a one-word checksum is calculated, and the high byte (word) and low byte (byte) of the
checksum are reversed.

 Constant: enter a constant.

Format: Select Hex, ASCII, or Code in the Format box. If you select Code, the data is a control code.

Value: enter a constant .

 Variable: a variable data to read or write. Specify either an internal register in AH10SCM-A or a register in a CPU
module.
 Format: select the format for the data.
Null: data is not processed.
_8 Hex: ASCII data is converted into hexadecimal data. ASCII data that cannot be converted into hexadecimal data is
converted into 0.
ASCII: Hexadecimal data is converted into ASCII data. Hexadecimal data that cannot be converted into ASCII
data is converted into 0.
 Reverse: the high byte of a one-word checksum which is calculated, and the low byte of the checksum are
reversed.
 Variable Property:
Function: for a TX packet, select Read R() for the Function. For an RX packet, select Read R(), Write W(), or *
for the Function.
Mapping Register: select a register in the PLC.

8-12
 Ch a pt er 8 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

 Length Property:
Function: Select Read R ( ) for a variable. And then you can select its corresponding register. The
value here is the length. Select Constant and then you can define the data length. You can also
select to determine the length (*) automatically. The data length can be specified between the packet
interval (around 4 character time length).
For a TX packet, you can select the variable and the constant length. For a RX packet, you can select
a variable, constant and determine the length (*) automatically.

8.3.2.2 Command
After creating several TX and RX packets, create commands to select packets to be sent and packets to be received.
Also create a sequence to execute the commands.

 Command No.: every command has a number. The Command Number indicates the execution order. You can
also use this Command Number to appoint a certain packet for transmission when using Goto function.

 Command Type: select Send, Receive, or Send & Receive for the Command Type. Once the type Send is
selected, when the packet is sent, the transmission is considered successful. Once the type Send & Receive is
selected, AS00SCM-A checks if the received data met the definition of RX packet. When they are matched, the
transmission is considered successful.

 Send Packet: select a packet to send.

 Receive Packet: select a packet to receive.

 Success: specify the action to follow the successful execution of the command: Next, Goto, or End.
8_
 Next: the next command is executed based on Command Number. If the command that is being executed
is command 1, the next command that will be executed is command 2.

 Goto: specify a later command to be executed based on its Command Number.

 End: end the sequence of commands.

 Fail: specify the action to follow the failure of the command: Next, Goto, or Abort.

 Next: the next command is executed based on Command Number. If the command that is being
executed is command 1, the next command that will be executed is command 2.

 Goto: specify a later command to be executed based on its Command Number.

 Abort: end the sequence of commands.

8-13
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

 Retry: set the number of times the command will be retried after a failure.

 Repeat: set the number of times the command will be repeated after successful execution.

 Send Wait: set an interval in milliseconds for the sequence to wait between commands. The default is
0
milliseconds, which causes the next command to be executed immediately after a reply is received.

 Timeout: set the amount of time in milliseconds for the system to wait for the command to be
executed before the system reports a communication timeout. The default is 50 milliseconds. When it
is set to 0, there is no timeout message and the module is at the status of waiting to receive.

8.3.3 CANopen Mode

The AS00SCM-A (firmware V2.00 or later) can be connected to an AS-FCOPM module through the card 2 slot. It can
then be used as a slave for other master modules in the CANopen network environment.

8.3.3.1 Features
When using the AS00SCM-A as a slave module, it has the following features:

 Complies with CANopen DS301 V4.02

 Supports NMT Slave

 Error-controlled; supports Heartbeat and Node-Guarding Protocols

 Supports PDO; up to 8 TxPDO and 8 RxPDO can be configured for every slave.

 Supports SDO:
Server: 1
User: 0
Supports SDO (expedited SDO) transmission mode

 Supports Emergency Protocol

_8

8-14
 Ch a pt er 8 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

8.3.3.2 Corresponding Input / Output Device Range

When the AS00SCM-A module acts as a CANopen slave, the CPU PLC assigns the input/output device ranges
according to the placement of the AS00SCM-A. The corresponding input/output device ranges from the right hand
side of the CPU PLC are shown in the example below from the HWCONFIG utility.

8_

8-15
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

8.4 RTU Mode

8.4.1 CANopen Mode (AS-FCOPM)
When the function card AS-FCOPM works with an AS series PLC, it supports three kinds of RTU modes, including AS
Remote Communication, CANopen DS301 Mode and Delta Special Driver & AS Remote Mode. Use the switch
FORMAT 1 to switch among three RTU modes.

A. RTU Communication Mode Setup Switch “FORMAT 1”

FORMAT1 Description
0 AS Remote Communication
4 CANopen DS301
8 Delta Special Driver & AS Remote Mode

B. Node ID Setup Switch “ID1/ID2”

 ID1: 0 (recommended)

 ID2: 0 (the switch is no function; set up through ISPSoft); see the table below for the switch setting
range.

RTU mode ID2 setting range

1~F
AS Remote Communication
(by the number of slaves)
1~F
Delta Special Driver & AS Remote Mode
(by the number of slaves)
1~F
CANopen DS301 (if the switch is at 0, the setting range is set by
HWCONFIG)

C. RTU Communication Speed Setup Switch “FORMAT 2”

Use the switch for setting. You cannot use ISPSoft (HWCONFIG) to set up the communication mode in this
format.

FORMAT2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8-F
Byte (bps) 10K 20K 50K 125K 250K 500K 1000K NA
Distance (m) 5000 2500 1000 500 250 100 25 NA

_8

8-16
 Ch a pt er 8 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

8.4.1.1 AS Remote Communication Mode

 Double-click the AS Series PLC, then in Device Setting click Function Card 2 Setting and set the function card
2 to AS-FCOPM, set to working mode to AS Remote Communication Mode, enter the number of the AS remote
module and set up the baud rate. After the setting is done, download the parameters.

Turn the FORMAT1 switch to 0 and it is in AS Remote Communication Mode. In AS Remote Communication mode,
an AS series CPU PLC can connect to as many as 15 AS00SCM-A modules, as long as they are all in RTU mode.
The RTU station number should be set from 1 to 15 in numerical order. RTU mode and baud rate cannot be set via
ISPSoft (HWCONFIG). Use the switch ID2 to set up Node ID and use the switch FORMAT2 to set up the baud rate.
(The baud rate should be the same as the PLC’s baud rate.)

8_

8-17
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Steps for a quick setup

1. Set up the PLC: AS Remote Communication mode, number of the device: 1; baud rate: 1000kbps;
download the parameters.

2. Set up AS00SCM-A; set the ID1 switch to 0 and FORMAT1 to 0; ID2 switch to 1 and FORMAT2 to 7.
3. Supply power to AS00SCM-A and connect AS00SCM-A to the PLC with a CANopen cable.

4. Resupply power to the PLC and the indicator of CARD2 should keep blinking. That indicates
AS00SCM-A and the PLC are connected. The PLC error indicator should be blinking too, since the
setting is not done yet.

5. Use HWCONFIG to scan the connected devices to see if AS00SCM-A is connected.

6. Download the parameters and check if the PLC error indicator has stopped blinking. Then the setting
of one RTU device is complete.

8.4.1.2 Delta Special Driver & AS Remote Mode

 Double-click the AS Series PLC, then in Device Setting click Function Card 2 Setting and set the function
card 2 to AS-FCOPM, set to working mode to Delta Special Driver & AS Remote Mode and enter the number of
the AS remote module and set up the baud rate. After the setting is done, download the parameters.

_8

8-18
 Ch a pt er 8 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

Turn the FORMAT1 switch to 8, and it is in Delta Special Driver & AS Remote Mode. In this mode, an AS series CPU
PLC can connect to as many as 7 AS00SCM-A modules, as long as they are all in RTU mode. The RTU station
number should be set from 9 to 15 in numerical order. RTU mode and baud rate cannot be set via ISPSoft
(HWCONFIG). Use the switch ID2 to set up Node ID and use the switch FORMAT2 to set up the baud rate. (The
baud rate should be the same as the PLC’s baud rate.)

Steps for a quick setup

1. Set up the PLC: Delta Special Driver & AS Remote Modem mode, number of the device: 1; baud rate:
1000kbps; download the parameters.
2. Set up AS00SCM-A; set the ID1 switch to 0 and FORMAT1 to 8; ID2 switch to 9 and FORMAT2 to 7.

3. Supply power to AS00SCM-A and connect AS00SCM-A to the PLC with a CANopen cable.
4. Resupply power to the PLC and the indicator of CARD2 should keep blinking. That indicates
AS00SCM-A and the PLC are connected. The PLC error indicator should be blinking too, since the
setting is not done yet.

5. Use HWCONFIG to scan the connected devices to see if AS00SCM-A is connected.

6. Download the parameters and check if the PLC error indicator has stopped blinking. Then the setting
of one RTU device is complete.

8.4.1.3 CANopen DS301 Mode

 This mode supports AS Series PLC acts as the CPU and the 3rd party CANopen DS301 devices (non-AS series
devices and non-Delta PLC). When using Delta PLC as the CPU, you need to use CANopen Builder to set up.

 Before using a 3rd party PLC, use AS Series PLC as the CPU and select the AS Remote Communication Mode.
8_
 Before connecting to CANopen DS301, turn the AS00SCM-A FORMAT1 switch to 4, and the adjustable range
for station knob ID2 becomes 0x1h~0xFh. This mode is used to communicate with a Master PLC from other
brand. See the detail in section 8.6.3. when the PDO data is mapped, AS00SCM-A can control the IO modules
from its right side.

 Double-click the AS Series PLC, then in Device Setting click Function Card 2 Setting and set the function card
2 to AS-FCOPM, set to working mode to CANopen DS301.

8-19
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Steps for a quick setup

1. Set up the PLC: in AS Remote Communication Mode, connect AS series PLC to AS00SCM-A, refer
to section 8.4.1.1 for more details.

2. Use AS series PLC to scan the I/O modules installed on the right-side of AS00SCM-A and download the
parameters.

3. If using HWCONFIG to set up the node ID, you can use COM mode to connect AS00SCM-A to the right-side of
AS series PLC directly and no I/O module behind it. Use AS series PLC’s HWCONFIG to scan and add
AS00SCM-A in and then double-click the module to set up its node ID and then download the parameters. After
that, switch ID2 to 0.

4. Install the I/O module to the right side of AS00SCM-A and switch the working mode to RTU.

5. Switch FORMAT1 to 4 and use the CANopen cable to connect to the PLC, and then supply power to AS series
PLC.

6. Follow master’s CANopen setting method to install the slaves.

Refer to section 8.6.3 PDO examples, if you are using AH10COPM-5A as the CPU.

8.4.2 EtherNet/IP Mode

AS00SCM-A (firmware V2.02 or later) can be installed on AS-FEN02. However it can only be used in RTU mode and
you can use Delta PLC or the 3rd party EtherNet/IP device to control the right-side modules of the AS00SCM-A. Refer

_8
to section 9.2.7 for more details on the operations of AS-FEN02 installed on AS Series PLC.

8.4.2.1 Connecting to Delta PLC Scanner through EIP Builder

Through EIP Builder, an AS Series PLC (when acting as a scanner) can create an EtherNet/IP connection to
AS00SCM-A (when installed) on AS-FEN02. Below shows an example of AS Series PLC acting as a scanner to
create an EIP connection.

8-20
 Ch a pt er 8 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

1. An AS Series PLC, AS-FEN02 and a computer can be connected together through an Ethernet switch. Configure
the parameters in HWCONFIG and right-click the CPU to open EIP Builder.

2. Scan the network to add AS-FEN02 (AS RTU) in EIP Builder. Drag the red block and drag it to the same network
(Network_0) as the AS Series PLC does. Double-click AS-FEN02 to open HWCONFIG and set the parameters
for AS-FEN02.

8_

8-21
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

3. If the PLC is not connected to any module, you can drag and drop AS-FEN02 (AS RTU) from the Product List on
the right to add it into the Network View.

_8

8-22
 Ch a pt er 8 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

4. After the settings are complete, click the Downloader icon and then select the parameters that you’d like to
download. Parameters include:

 RTU parameters: all the parameters set in the previous step

 Data Exchange: data mapped from the RTU right-side modules of AS00SCM-A to the PLC

5. While downloading, the connection of PLC and RTU is off. After the downloading is complete, the connection will
be re-established. Refer to section 8.4.3 for more details on the connection establishment of AS00SCM-A RTU
modules.

8.4.2.2 Connecting to 3rd Party PLC Scanner through EIP Builder

Through EIP Builder, a 3rd party PLC (when acting as a scanner) can create an EtherNet/IP connection to AS00SCM-
A (when AS-FEN02 is installed). Use the 3rd party PLC to connect to the computer and open EIP Builder to edit the
right side modules of AS00SCM-A. You can manually or scan the network to add the AS00SCM(RTU) + AS-
FEN02 to the network. Click the remote module to open HWCONFIG to scan and download the
parameters of the right side modules of AS00SCM-A.

8_

8-23
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

 Go to www.deltaww.com to download EDS file and install the downloaded EDS file to the software of the 3rd
party scanner. Refer to section 9.7 of AS Operation Manual for an operational example of Rockwell Studio
5000.

 The following example uses Rockwell PLC.

1. After the installation is done, you can see AS00SCM(RTU) + AS-FEN02 in the list. Click it to see the
module information page.

_8

8-24
 Ch a pt er 8 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

2. Select Multicast in the field of Input Type in the Connection sheet.

3. Click Change in the General sheet to change the data length. To set up the data length, refer to the
8_
register length that a module occupies in HWCONFIG. The following uses a 16-point digital output module
as an example. The output point of this module occupies 2 words. If the data type is SINT, the length unit is
byte. Add 2 to the output default value 40.

8-25
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

4. The first module on the right side can start data mapping from the 41st byte (Data[40]). See the image
below. bit0~bit7 of O.Data[40] are mapping to Y0~Y7 and bit0~bit7 of O.Data[41] are mapping to Y8~Y15. If
the module is an input module, you need to edit the input length and use I.Dat mapping to a.

_8

8-26
 Ch a pt er 8 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

8.4.3 Remote Module Setting

1. Double-click AS00SCM-A -> AS remote module in Device Setting and click AS Serial Remote Module. To set up
the remote module in RTU mode, set the function card type 2 to AS-FCOPM or AS-FEN02:

8_

8-27
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

For the following four situations, you can either stop I/O module (all I/O modules stop running) or keep I/O module
running (all I/O modules keep the same state).
1) When a Master connection is lost

 I/O modules stop running: all I/O modules stop running

 I/O modules keep the same state: all modules keep running

2) When a Scanner has reconnected after the connection lost

 I/O modules stop running: all I/O modules stop running

 I/O modules keep the same state: all modules keep running

3) When an alarm occurs in an I/O module

 I/O modules stop running: all I/O modules stop running (after resupply power to resume running)

 I/O modules keep the same state: all modules keep running

4) When an I/O connection is lost

 I/O modules stop running: all I/O modules stop running (after resupply power to resume running)

 I/O modules keep the same state: all modules keep running

Analog Output Module

Digital & Analog Digital Output
Procedure Settings (RTU) (I/O Module Settings)
Input Modules Modules
Clear Keep

No change to
I/O module stops Output value
Master Output value = 0 the output
running Cannot update data =0
connection value
on the master
lost
I/O module keeps
No change to the output value
the same state

Master has No change to

I/O module stops Output value
reconnected Output value = 0 the output
running Keep updating data =0
after value
on the master
connection
lost. I/O module keeps
Output value = output value of the master
the same state
No change to
I/O module stops No change to the Output value
Output value = 0 the output
Alarm in I/O running output value =0
value
module
Other functional
_8 (Ex. module
I/O module keeps modules: keep Other functional modules:
is broken)
the same state updating data on the output value = output value of the master
master
No change to
I/O module stops No change to the Output value
I/O Output value = 0 the output
running output value =0
connection value
lost Other functional
(Ex. unstable I/O module keeps modules: keep Other functional modules:
connection) the same state updating data on the output value = output value of the master
master
 Module configurations: refer to Section 8.1.2 in the AS Series Operation Manual.

 Module setups: refer to other chapters in the AS Series Module Manual.

8-28
 Ch a pt er 8 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

8.5 Normal Exchange Area

1) COM mode

In the examples above, note that the Normal Exchange Area shows the corresponding data registers of the module 8_
and the PLC.

1. Module Status: 0 = stop, 1 = run

2. Error Code: refer to Section 8.7 for more information.

3. Card 1 & Card 2 Data Exchange State: occupies 4 data registers (32-bit data); each bit 1–32 represents the
state of the corresponding data point 1–32 to be exchanged: 0 = none/fail, 1 = success

4. Card 1 & Card 2 Data Exchange Mode Control: set the data register to 0: none, 1: once, 2: always.

5. Card 1 & Card 2 Data Exchange Trigger: occupies 4 data registers; each bit 1–32 represents the state of the
corresponding data point 1–32 to be exchanged: 0 = no trigger, 1 = trigger

6. Card 1 & Card 2 UD Link Group ID Trigger: set the group ID to be triggered.

8-29
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

2) RTU Mode: (AS Series PLC acting as a Scanner)

 RTU Module Status: 0 = communication module stop, 1 = communication module run

 Module Error Code: refer to Section 8.7 for more information.

 Power Status:０= power error, 1 = power normal

 I/O Module Status: each I/O module uses 1 bit to show its status (0 = normal , 1 = not running normally)

 I/O Module Error Code: refer to the I/O module manual for more information.

_8

8-30
 Ch a pt er 8 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

8.6 Application

8.6.1 Modbus
This section introduces how to use the Modbus protocol to connect the AS00SCM-A to other Delta industrial products
such as human-machine interfaces, temperature controllers, programmable logic controllers, AC motor drives, and
servo motors.

8.6.1.1 Modbus Slave─Connection to Delta Products

The following table shows the slave station supports the following function codes and their corresponding addresses.

Function Code Attribute Addresses Supported

16#0000–16#0063

0x03 16#0100–16#0163
Read
0x04 16#0200–16#0263
16#0300–16#0363

0x06 16#0000–16#0063
Write
0x10 16#0200–16#0263

16#0000–16#0063
16#0100–16#0163
Read
16#0200–16#0263
0x17
16#0300–16#0363

16#0000–16#0063
Write
16#0200–16#0263

The structures:

Example of a slave structure: HMI (master station)  AS-F485 + AS00SCM-A COM1 (slave station)

Device from Register in Device into Register in

Slave Communication
Product which data is the CPU which data is the CPU
ID protocol
read module written module
HMI 5 9600, RTU, 8, E, 1 16#0100 D26100 16#0000 D26000 8_

If the AS00SCM-A functions as a Modbus slave, you need to set a slave ID and baud rate.

1) Drag to add AS00SCM-A in the system configuration area. Make sure the switch of AS00SCM-A is turned to
COM mode and no power connected to it.

8-31
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

2) Click the I/O Scan button to make the system read the module’s current configuration. The PLC assigns the input
and output device ranges.

_8

Device from which Register in the Device into which Register in the
Function card
data is read CPU module data is written CPU module
Function card 1 16#0000 D26000 16#0100 D26100
Function card 2 16#0200 D26200 16#0300 D26300

8-32
 Ch a pt er 8 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

3) Double-click the SCM module to open the configuration settings.

4) Set the communication protocol values for COM1 using the HMI settings.

8_

5) Click the Download button to download the parameters to the AS00SCM-A.

NOTE: Double-click the module to open the Device Setting dialog box to configure the parameters.

8-33
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

8.6.1.2 Modbus Master─Connection to Delta Products

This section introduces how to use COM2 to connect the AS00SCM-A to other Delta industrial products such as
programmable logic controllers, AC motor drives, and servo motors.

The structures:

Example of a master structure: AS-F485 + AS00SCM-A COM2 (master station)  VFD, ASDA, and DVP series PLC

Device from Register in Device into Register in

Slave Communication
Product which data is the CPU which data is the CPU
ID protocol
read module written module
16#2000 D26300-
VFD 10 38400, ASCII, 7, E, 1 16#2103 D26200
16#2001 D26301
ASDA 11 38400, ASCII, 7, E, 1 16#0101 D26210 16#0101 D26310
D26220- D26320-
PLC 12 38400, ASCII, 7, E, 1 D100-D109 D200-D204
D26229 D26324

If the AS00SCM-A is functioning as a Modbus master, you need to set a slave ID and baud rate.

1) Drag to add AS00SCM-A in the system configuration area. Make sure the switch of AS00SCM-A is turned to
COM mode and no power connected to it.

_8

8-34
 Ch a pt er 8 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

2) Double-click COM2 Setting and set the Function Card Type to AS-F485.

3) Click the I/O Scan button to make the system read the module’s current configuration. The PLC assigns the input
and output device ranges.

8_

8-35
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

4) Double-click the SCM module to open the configuration settings.

5) Set the communication protocol values for COM2:

_8

8-36
 Ch a pt er 8 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

6) Set up the data exchange table: select Data Exchange – COM2 and click Add to create a new Data Exchange
Setup table.

7) In the Data Exchange Setup table double-click an item to edit its settings.

8_
 Select Standard Modbus Device as the Remote Device Type, enter the parameters, and check Enable.

Device from Register in Device into Register in

Slave Communication
Product which data is the CPU which data is the CPU
ID protocol
read module written module
16#2000 D26300-
VFD 10 38400, ASCII, 7, E, 1 16#2103 D26200
16#2001 D26301

8-37
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

 Select Standard Modbus Device as the Remote Device Type, enter the ASDA parameters, and check
Enable.

Device from Register in Device into Register in

Slave Communication
Product which data is the CPU which data is the CPU
ID protocol
read module written module
ASDA 11 38400, ASCII, 7, E, 1 16#0101 D26210 16#0101 D26310

_8

 Select PLC devices as the Remote Device Type, enter the PLC parameters, and check Enable.

Device from Register in Device into Register in

Slave Communication
Product which data is the CPU which data is the CPU
ID protocol
read module written module
D26220- D26320-
PLC 12 38400, ASCII, 7, E, 1 D100-D109 D200-D204
D26229 D26324

8-38
 Ch a pt er 8 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

8) Select Always Enable in the Mode.

NOTE: If the Data Exchange Mode Control is set by the program, you can check and control the register address
on the Normal Exchange Area page. The following example shows when writing “2: always” to D28021, it
indicates Card 2 is always the one to perform data mapping.
8_

8-39
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

9) Download the parameters to the AS00SCM-A.

If you set Mode to Always Enable, the data exchange begins immediately after downloading the parameters.

If you set Mode to Program Control, the program starts the data exchange after downloading the parameters.

8.6.2 UD Link
This section introduces how to use a non-Modbus RS485 communication port on the AS00SCM-A to connect to other
industrial products.

AS00 SCM COM1

Mas ter Slav e

RS 485 9600, 7, E, 1
Communication with a slave

Packet to Send Packet to Receive

Description
() ()

POS, xxx, yyy POS, ACT xxx and yyy are coordinates (0–999)

1) Drag to add AS00SCM-A in the system configuration area. Make sure the switch of AS00SCM-A is turned to
COM mode and no power connected to it.

_8

8-40
 Ch a pt er 8 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

2) Double-click the SCM module to open the configuration settings.

3) Select AS-F485 as the Function Card Type for COM1.

8_

8-41
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

4) Select UD Link as the Protocol, set the Baud Rate and Format, and click OK.

5) Right-click the AS00SCM-A and click Communication Software and then click SCMSoft.

_8

8-42
 Ch a pt er 8 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

6) Right-click Group List and then click Create Group List to create a group list.

7) You can find a created Group List1. Double-click it to open an editing window to edit the Group List Name and
the Slot.

Give the group list a Name (this example uses “Slave_Simulation”) and select 1 (COM1) as the Slot number.

8_

8-43
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

8) Right-click Slave_Simulation and click Create Group List to create a group list for the Slave_Simulation group.

9) You can find a created Group List1. Double-click it to open an editing window to edit the Group List Name and
the Slot.

Create a group and name it “Master Send”.

_8

8-44
 Ch a pt er 8 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

10) Right-click TX Packet and click TX Packet to create a TX Packet1.

8_

8-45
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

11) Double-click TX Packet1 to open the Packet Edit form.

12) Give the Packet a Name (This example uses “TX POS Send”)

_8

8-46
 Ch a pt er 8 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

13) Edit the TX packet, “POS, xxx, yyy” (The example below uses POS, 123, 123)

14) Click Constant in the Message area.

Enter “POS” in the Value area. Click OK and verify the packet contents in the Packet View.

8_

8-47
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

15) [xxx] is a variable, so click Variable in the Message area to edit it. Use ISPSoft to get the value from data
registers D26100–D26101. The example below uses D26100: 16#3132 and D26101: 16#3300 and the value is
123.

16) Enter the data register that contains the value you want to find. The example below uses D26100 and the value
returned is 3. Use ISPSoft to get the value from data registers D26100–D26199.

_8

8-48
 Ch a pt er 8 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

）in the Packet View.

Click OK and verify the values (”POS,”+（R（D Register [26100], 3）

17) [，]: Use Address Constant to enter this Value and set the Format to ASCII.

）in the Packet View.

Click OK and verify the values (”POS,”+（R（D Register [26100], 3）

18) [yyy] is a variable, so click Variable in the Message area to edit it. Use ISPSoft to get the value from data
registers D26102–D26103. The example below uses D26102: 16#3132 and D26103: 16#3300 and the value is
123.

8_

8-49
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

19) Enter the data register that contains the value you want to find. The example below uses D26102 and the value
returned is 3. Use ISPSoft to get the value from the data registers D26100–D26199.

）in the Packet View.

Click OK and verify the values (”POS,”+（R（D Register [26102], 3）

_8 20) Edit the packet: Create a packet and name it “RX Result”. Double-click it to open the editing window.

8-50
 Ch a pt er 8 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

Enter the sending packet into the D26000 register of the AS300 CPU. “*” indicates that the length is not
specified.

The packet should look like the example below.

21) Create a command: Right-click Master Send and click the Create Command. 8_

8-51
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

22) Double-click the new command on the list to open the Command Edit window.

23) Set Send Packet to “TX POS Send” and set Recv Packet (received contents) to “RX Result”.

_8

8-52
 Ch a pt er 8 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

24) Make sure the Group is in slot 1 (COM1).

25) Click the Download button to download the parameters to the AS00SCM.

8_

8-53
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

26) Set up the devices for the UD Link Group ID Trigger in HWCONFIG. Once you create the AS00SCM-A module,
the system automatically assigns the corresponding addresses.

27) Double-click AS00SCM-A to open the Device Setting page. Verify that the Card 1 UD Link Group ID Trigger is set
to D28030. Use ISPSoft to enter 1 into register D28030 to start the data exchange.

_8

8-54
 Ch a pt er 8 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

28) Use the monitor function in ISPSoft to verify that the transmission is working correctly.

29) In SCMSoft, right-click the item COM PORT History on the left and click the option “Upload COM History Data” to
see the transmission history of COM1 and COM2 respectively. Under the item COM1 and COM2, you can view
recent transmission history; however the shown recent history cannot be deleted or saved.

30) Select Tools -> Return to Default to clear the previous settings and have all the settings back to defaults. After
this, turn the power off and on again.

8.6.3 Remote IO Application (AS-FCOPM)

This example shows other series PLC, AH10COPM-5A, as a CANopen Master that controls four IO modules on the
right side of AS00SCM-A that acts as a CANopen Slave. (You can use this method to connect to a 3rd party PLC.)

Device Function
Scan and download AS00SCM-A (RTU mode),
AS300
right side module configurations
AS00SCM-A + AS-FCOPM CANopen Slave
AHCPU530-EN + AH10COPM-5A CANopen Master
AS16AN10R-A 16 Digital outputs
AS16AM01N-A 16 Digital inputs
AS04DA-A 4 Analog channels for output
AS04AD-A 4 Analog channels for input

8_

8-55
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Step 1

Use AS300 to connect to AS00SCM-A through AS Remote Communication (RTU mode) and then use HWCONFIG to
scan and download the parameters. If the Card 2 LED is blinking normally, with no error messages, and no need to
download the PLC programs, the device power can be turned off. Refer to Section 8.4.1.1 for reference.

_8

8-56
 Ch a pt er 8 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

Step 2

Switch the Format 1 of AS00SCM-A to 4 (using CANopen DS301 mode) and switch Format 2 to 7 (setting the bit rate
to 1000kbps) and then turn the power off and on again. After that wiring AH10COPM-5A and set the node ID to 2 and
set the bit rate to 1000kbps. Use ISPSoft (V3.04 or later) and HWCONFIG to scan and download the parameters to
AH500. Right click AH10COPM-5A and open Intelligent Module Configuration (CANopen Builder) from the menu.

Step 3

Use CANopen Builder to scan the network. You should find Node ID 1 and its name to be AS00SCM-A RTU.

If not, check if you follow the first two steps right. And repeat the previous steps. Recommended to set the value in
cycle period to 50 ms to ensure a more complete module functions. Double click the module to open the Node
Configuration window and set up the PDO manually. RPDO is for DO/AO and TPDO is for DI/AI and error codes of
RTU/IO.

8_

8-57
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Step 4

Here uses a first right side digital output module (16 points) as an example.

1. Since it is the first one, here it corresponds to Receive PDO1 (index: 1400), indicating RTU receives data from
Master through CANopen communication. (If this is an input module, it sends data to Master through CANopen
communication.) Double click to add it in the table. Double click the table to open the PDO setting window.

2. Since it is the first one, here it corresponds to Rx_Module 1. It is a 16-point digital output module so that only
the object of one word Rx_Module1_EDO0 (Index: 2000) should be selected. Click the arrow to add it into the
data mapping parameter table and you have set up a PDO for the first module. If t is a 32-point digital output
module, objects of 2 words Rx_Module1_EDO0 and Rx_Module1_EDO1 should be selected in numerical
order.

_8

8-58
 Ch a pt er 8 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

3. Follow the previous steps to set up more modules.

Mapping
Device Function PDO PDO Mapping
Registers
AS16AN01R-A 16 digital outputs RxPDO1 Rx_Module1_EDO0 D6000
AS16AM01N-A 16 digital inputs TxPDO2 Tx_Module2_EDI0 D5000
4 Analog Rx_Module3_EDO0 D6001
channels for Rx_Module3_EDO1 D6002
AS04DA-A RxPDO3
output Rx_Module3_EDO2 D6003
(Integer format)* Rx_Module3_EDO3 D6004
4 Analog Tx_Module4_EDI0 D5001
channels for Tx_Module4_EDI1 D5002
AS04AD-A TxPDO4
input Tx_Module4_EDI2 D5003
(Integer format)* Tx_Module4_EDI3 D5004
Tx_Module1_error_code D5005
IO Module Tx_Module2_error_code D5006
- TxPDO5
Error Code Tx_Module3_error_code D5007
Tx_Module4_error_code D5008
RTU Error Code - TxPDO6 Tx_RTU_error_code D5009
* Here the analog module uses integer format; if you need to use floating point format, two PDOs will be used per 8_
channel.

* Index 2002 to Index 200d are for system internal use only. Avoid using this range, when PDO is used.

* Only synchronization cycle is supported.

8-59
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Step 5

Double click the PLC icon and select Node ID 001 from the available nodes and then use the Right arrow to add the
selected one into the Node List. Output and Input tables are mapping registers for PDOs.

_8

8-60
 Ch a pt er 8 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

Step 6

Double click the module icon and the Node Configuration window appears. Click Error Control Protocol and then
Error Control Setting windows appears. Select Heartbeat and set values for the Master Consumer Timeout and
Node Heartbeat Producer Timer. Select AH10COPM Master from the Node List and click the Down arrow to add it
to the list of Heart Consumer and then disconnection detection is now available for AS00SCM-A (RTU mode).

Click OK to confirm the setting. Download the parameters to the PLC. And then PLC can control the input/output of
the IO module remotely.

8_

8-61
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

An example of using PLC to control the input/output of the IO module remotely:

Start ISPSoft and download the program from AH series PLC. Switch digital output module between 1 and 0 in every
0.5 seconds; change output values of the analog output module. Wire DI/DO modules to AI/AO modules and then
you can see the changes of D6000 from D5000 and D6001-D6004 from D5001-D5004 as the example below shown.
The module error codes are stored in D5005-D5009. Refer to relevant module manuals for error code definitions.

_8

8-62
 Ch a pt er 8 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

8.6.4 Remote IO Application (AS-FEN02)

When the firmware is V2.02 or later, AS-FEN02 can be installed on AS00SCM-A (RTU mode) and then PLC can
monitor right side IO modules remotely.

Device Function IP Address / Location Data Mapping Range

AS300 EtherNet/IP Master 192.168.1.5
D29000~D29019
AS00SCM-A + AS-FEN02 EtherNet/IP Slave 192.168.1.3
AS08AM10N Digital Input right side of AS00SCM-A X1.0~X1.15
AS08AN01T Digital Output right side of AS00SCM-A Y1.0~Y1.15
AS04AD-A Analog Input right side of AS00SCM-A D29060~D29079
AS04DA-A Analog Output right side of AS00SCM-A D29080~D29099

Step 1

After setting up AS300 in ISPSoft and HWCONFIG. Open EIP Builder and scan the network to add AS00SCM-A
(RTU) + AS-FEN02 to the Network. Double-click RTU module to open HWCONFIG and scan to obtain the
configuration and mapped register addresses of the I/O module on the right side of AS00SCM-A. You can also edit
the module configurations and write down the mapped register addresses. After saving, close HWCONFIG. Refer to
Section 8.4.2.1 for more details.

8_

8-63
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Step 2

You can see the IP address and the data length from the data mapping table in EIP Builder. The data mapping table
can be downloaded and upload the mapped data to the device.

Step 3

An example of using PLC to control the input/output of the IO module remotely:

Start ISPSoft and switch digital output module between 1 and 0 in every 0.5 seconds and shift output values of the
analog output module between 10 V and 5V. Wire DI/DO modules to AI/AO modules. Refer to Chapter 2 and 3 in this
manual for more details on module operation.

_8

8-64
 Ch a pt er 8 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

8.6.5 Remote IO Application (Multiple AS-FEN02)

When AS-FEN02 is installed on AS Series PLC, it can be used as the Ethernet port of the CPU.

The following example shows how to add multiple AS00SCM-A (RTU) + AS-FEN02 (hereafter referred to as the
“RTU”) to an AS Series PLC in EIP connection. All IP addresses of RTU are set by the software.

Device Function IP Address Data Mapping Area

EtherNet/IP
AS200 192.168.1.5
master/scanner
AS00SCM-A + AS-FEN02 EtherNet/IP slave/adapter 192.168.1.30 D29540~D29559
AS00SCM-A + AS-FEN02 EtherNet/IP slave/adapter 192.168.1.31 D29180~D29199
AS00SCM-A + AS-FEN02 EtherNet/IP slave/adapter 192.168.1.32 D29360~D29379
AS08AN01T Digital output The right side of RTU Y1.0~Y1.15
AS16AM10N-A Digital input The right side of RTU X1.0~X1.15
AS08AM10N-A Digital input The right side of RTU X2.0~X2.15

Step 1 Set up an IP address for the RTU

Turn all the switches of the FORMAT 2 of the 3 new RTUs to 0. The default IP address of the 3 new RTUs is
192.168.1.3. Since different IP addresses are essential for devices to be in the same network, you need to use EIP
Builder to set up the IP addresses to have the 3 new RTUs in the same network. Connect one RTU to your computer
and open EIP Builder to scan the network to add the first RTU with the IP address 192.168.1.3 in.

8_

8-65
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

Before setting up the EIP network, you can double-click the RTU to open HWCONFIG and set up its IP address to
192.168.1.30 and other parameters. After the setting is complete, download the parameters to the connected module
and the new IP address is reflected in the module. To minimize the risks of wrong operation, you can remove the
module icon from the network and add another new RTU in. Repeat the previous steps to set up the IP address of the
2nd and 3rd RTU. For the setups of the right-side modules, you can leave them to the 3rd step.

Step 2

After the IP addresses of the 3 new RTUs are set, you can scan and add them in the network and connect to the AS
Series PLC. Do not download the project before uploading the already set RTU values to the network.

_8

8-66
 Ch a pt er 8 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

Step 3

Now you can set up the right-side module of RTU. Refer to section 8.6.4 for more details. Scan all the RTU and save
the parameters. Make sure the data mapping table is updated and then download the project, including the
parameters, configurations, and data mapping table to the AS Series PLC and the RTUs.

8.7 Error Codes

The error flags and the UD Link status codes are stored in data registers. You can modify the input device range as
needed.

8_

8-67
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

8.7.1 Troubleshooting for Module AS00SCM-A as a Communication

Module

8.7.1.1 ERROR LED Indicators are ON

The following error codes indicate possible errors when the AS00SCM-A module is installed on the right side of the
CPU module and is acting as a communication module.

Error
Description Solution
Code
1. Check that the module is securely installed.
16#1605 Hardware failure
2. Install a new AS00SCM-A or contact the factory.
1. Check if the function card is securely installed.
2. Install a new function card or contact the factory.
16#1606 The function card setting is incorrect. 3. Check if the setting in HWCONFIG is consistent
with the function card setting.
4. Install a new AS00SCM-A or contact the factory.

8.7.1.2 ERROR LED Indicators Blinking Every 0.5 Seconds

The following error codes identify possible errors when the AS00SCM-A module is installed on the right side of the
CPU module and acts as a communication module.

Error
Description Solution
Code
Check the parameter in HWCONFIG. Download the
16#1802 Incorrect parameters
parameter again.
1. Check whether the communication cable is
properly connected.
2. Check if the station number and the
16#1803 Communication timeout
communication format are correctly set.
3. Check if the connection with the function card is
working correctly.
1. Check the settings of the UD Link.
16#1804 The UD Link setting is incorrect.
2. Check the warning settings in the PLC.
The following error codes can only be viewed with SCMSoft; when the following errors occur, they are not shown on
the LED indicators and the system does not send the error messages to the CPU module.

Error
Description Solution
Code
_8 The settings in HWCONFIG and manual Check the settings in HWCONFIG and manual
16#0107 settings are not consistent with function settings for function card 1.
card 1.
The settings in HWCONFIG and manual Check the settings in HWCONFIG and manual
16#0108 settings are not consistent for function settings for function card 2.
card 2.
Check the parameter in HWCONFIG. Download the
16#0201 Incorrect parameters
parameter again.
1. Check if the station number and the
communication format are correctly set.
16#0301 Function card 1 communication timeout
2. Check if the connection with the function card is
working correctly.

8-68
 Ch a pt er 8 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

Error
Description Solution
Code
1. Check if the station number and the
communication format are correctly set.
16#0302 Function card 2 communication timeout
2. Check if the connection with the function card is
working correctly.
Invalid UD Link Group ID for function card 1. Check the UD Link settings.
16#0400
1 2. Check the warning settings in the PLC.
Invalid UD Link Group ID for function card 1. Check the UD Link settings.
16#0401
2 2. Check the warning settings in the PLC.
Invalid UD Link Command for function card 1. Check the UD Link settings.
16#0402
1 2. Check the warning settings in the PLC.
Invalid UD Link Command for function card 1. Check the UD Link settings.
16#0403
1 2. Check the warning settings in the PLC.

8.7.2 Troubleshooting for Module AS00SCM-A as a Remote Module

Errors from the remote modules are regarded as warnings for AS Series CPU modules. The LED indicator of the
CPU module blinks and the CPU module can still operate. Use flag SM30 to manage error presentation in the remote
modules.

8.7.2.1 ERROR LED Indicators Are ON

Error codes:

Error
Description Solution
Code
1. Check if the module is securely installed.
16#1301 Hardware failure 2. Change and install a new AS00SCM-A or contact
the factory.
1. Check if the function card is securely installed with
the AS-FCOPM card.
2. Change and install a new function card or contact
16#1302 The function card setting is incorrect. the factory.
3. Check if the setting in HWCONFIG is consistent
with the function card setting.
4. Install a new AS00SCM-A or contact the factory.

8.7.2.2 ERROR LED Indicators Blinking Every 0.5 Seconds 8_

Error codes:

Error
Description Solution
Code
16#1502 Remote module communication timeout Make sure the communication cable is well connected
Check the parameter in HWCONFIG. Download the
16#1502 Incorrect parameters
parameter again.
Make sure the communication cable is well connected
Remote extension module communication
16#1503 and the module is properly connected to the CPU
timeout
module and turn the modules on again.
The actual placement of the extension Check if the parameter in HWCONFIG is the same as
16#1502
modules is NOT the same as it is set. the actual placement.

8-69
 A S S er i es Mo d u le Ma n ua l

8.7.2.3 ERROR LED Indicators Blinking Every 0.2 Seconds

This happens when the 24 VDC power supply for the remote module is not sufficient. Check the power supply. If the
power supply is normal, remove the extension module from the CPU module and then check if the SCM remote
module is out of order. Error codes:

Error
Description Solution
Code
24VDC power supply is not sufficient and Check whether the 24 V power supply to the module is
16#1303 then recovered from low-voltage for less normal.
than 10 ms.

_8

8-70
Ch a pt er 8 S er ia l C o m m unic a t io n M o du l e A S 00 S CM

MEMO

8_

8-71
 9
Chapter 9 Function Cards
Table of Contents
9.1 Introduction ...................................................................................... 9-3

9.2 Specification and Function................................................................. 9-3

9.2.1 AS-F232 ...................................................................................... 9-3
9.2.2 AS-F422 ...................................................................................... 9-3
9.2.3 AS-F485 ...................................................................................... 9-3
9.2.4 AS-F2AD ..................................................................................... 9-4
9.2.5 AS-F2DA ..................................................................................... 9-5
9.2.6 AS-FCOPM ................................................................................... 9-5
9.2.7 AS-FEN02 .................................................................................... 9-6
9.2.7.1 Supported Software and Firmware Versions ..................................... 9-6
9.2.7.2 Features ..................................................................................... 9-6
9.2.7.3 Specifications .............................................................................. 9-6
9.2.7.4 Topology ..................................................................................... 9-8
9.2.7.5 SM/SR........................................................................................ 9-9
9.2.7.6 Data Mapping through EtherNet/IP Adapter ................................... 9-11
9.2.7.7 Example of Connecting to 3rd Party PLC Scanner through EIP Builder 9-13
9.2.7.8 Data Mapping through Modbus TCP .............................................. 9-17
9.2.7.9 Webpage .................................................................................. 9-19
9.2.8 AS-FPFN02 ................................................................................ 9-23
9.2.8.1 Supported Firmware Versions ...................................................... 9-23
9.2.8.2 Features ................................................................................... 9-23
9.2.8.3 Specifications ............................................................................ 9-23
9.2.8.4 LED Indicators ........................................................................... 9-24
9.2.8.5 Configuring the Data Length for I/O ............................................. 9-25
9.2.8.6 Status Register .......................................................................... 9-26
9.2.8.7 Topology................................................................................... 9-28
9.2.8.8 PROFINET Device Example (Adapter) ............................................ 9-28

9.3 Profiles and Dimensions .................................................................. 9-41

9.3.1 AS-F232 .................................................................................... 9-41
9.3.2 AS-F422/AS-F485/AS-F2AD/AS-F2DA ............................................ 9-41
9.3.3 AS-FCOPM ................................................................................. 9-41
9.3.4 AS-FEN02 .................................................................................. 9-42
9.3.5 AS-FPFN02 ................................................................................ 9-43

9.4 Wiring ............................................................................................. 9-44

9.4.1 AS-F2AD ................................................................................... 9-44
9.4.2 AS-F2DA ................................................................................... 9-45

9-1
 9.5 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft ..................................................................... 9-45
9.5.1 Initial Setting .............................................................................. 9-45

_9

9-2
 Ch ap te r 9 Fu nc ti on Ca rds

9.1 Introduction
Function cards are extension cards such as analog input/output (AI/AO) and communication cards for the AS Series
PLC.

9.2 Specification and Function

9.2.1 AS-F232
The AS Series PLC is built with COM1 (RS-485) and COM2 (RS-485) ports. You can use the AS-F232 extension card for
communication other interfaces such as RS-232, PC, and so on. Except for the communication interface, however, the
communication functions are the same as the built-in ones. You can set up the communication port as either a slave or a
master node. After installing the extension card, use HWCONFIG in ISPSoft to configure the communication.

 Wiring example

AS-F232
(DB9 female) + + Superior
machine

DB9 male to DB9 female (standard cable)

9.2.2 AS-F422
Use the AS-F422 extension card to communicate with Delta HMI devices or other devices that use an RS-422
communication port. Other than the different communication interface, the communication functions remain the same as
the built-in ones. You can set the communication port as either a slave or a master node. After installing the extension
card, use HWCONFIG in ISPSoft to configure the communication.

 Wiring example for communication with Delta HMI DOPA series via COM2

AS-F422 Delta HMI DOPA series

1 R+ Tx+ 3 6 RT S-
2 R- Tx- 4 7 RT S+
3 T+ Rx+ 2 8
4 T- Rx- 1 9 CT S+
CT S-
COM2/DB-9
9.2.3 AS-F485
With its own standalone communication port, the AS-F485 card can work independently and can be either a slave or a
master node. After installing the extension card, use HWCONFIG in ISPSoft to configure the communication.

 Wiring example
Master node Slave node Slave node
D+ D- SG D+ D- SG SG D+ D- 9_
Terminal Terminal
resistor resistor
(120 ohm) (120 ohm)
Shielded Shielded
cable cable

9-3
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

9.2.4 AS-F2AD
2 DC analog signal input channels:

Item Voltage Input Current Input

Rated Input Range 0 V - 10 V 4 mA - 20 mA

Resolution 12-bit 11-bit

Digital Conversion
0 - 4000 0 - 2000
Range
Hardware Input 4mA ~ 20.37mA (FW V1.00)
0V ~ +10.24V
Limit*1 3.63mA ~ 20.37mA (FW V1.20 or later)
Digital Conversion 0 ~ 2047 (FW V1.00)
0 ~ 4095
Limit*2 - 48 ~ 2047(FW V1.20 or later)

Error Rate room temperature: ±0.5% ; full temperature range: ±1.0%

Input Impedance 2 MΩ 250 Ω

Conversion Time*3 3 ms / CH
Digital Value Output

4000

Digital Value O utput

2000

Characteristic
Curve
0 10V 4 20mA
Curr ent input
Voltage input

Digital Value Card 1 SR168 (CH1), SR169 (CH2)

Output*4 Card 2 SR170 (CH1), SR171 (CH2)
*1: The input signal should NOT exceed the limit. If exceeding the limit, damage may occur.

*2: If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, the module only shows the maximum value. If the input signal is
below the lower limit, it only shows the minimum value. If the input signal exceeds the hardware input limit, it also
exceeds the digital conversion limit and a conversion limit error appears. For example in the current input mode (4 mA to
20 mA), when the input signal is 0 mA, exceeding the hardware lower limit, it also exceeds the conversion lower limit.
The module uses the lower limit value (-48) as the input signal. If a disconnected analysis is required, you can check if
the digital conversion value is -48.

*3: The conversion time is the time for each channel to convert signals to hardware input signals. If you need to calculate
a complete conversion time, you need to add the PLC scan time.

*4: Use the program to read the values in SR to obtain the corresponding A/D conversion value for the channel.

_9

9-4
 Ch ap te r 9 Fu nc ti on Ca rds

9.2.5 AS-F2DA
2 DC analog signal output channels:

Item Voltage Output Current Output

Analog Signal 0 V - 10 V 4 mA - 20 mA

Resolution 12-bit 12-bit

Digital Conversion
0 - 4000 0 - 4000
Limit

Error Rate room temperature: ±0.5% ; full temperature range: ±1.0%

Impedance
≥1 kΩ ≤500 Ω
Allowance

Conversion Time*1 2ms / CH

10V
Voltage Output

20mA

Curr ent Output

Characteristic
Curve
4 4000
0 4000 Digital Value Input
Di gital Value Input

Digital Value Card 1 SR172 (CH1) SR173 (CH2)

Output*2 Card 2 SR174 (CH1) SR175 (CH2)
*1: The conversion time is the time for each channel to convert signals to hardware input signals. If you need to calculate
a complete conversion time, you need to add the PLC scan time.

*2: Use the MOV instruction to move the value to the SR to obtain the corresponding voltage output value.

9.2.6 AS-FCOPM
With its own standalone communication port, the AS-FCOPM card can work independently and can be either a slave or a
master node. After installing the extension card, use HWCONFIG in ISPSoft to configure the communication.

 Wiring example

Master node Slave node Slave node

CAN _H CAN _L GND CAN _H C AN _L G ND GN D C AN _H C AN_ L
ON
12 0
O FF

Terminal Terminal
resistor Shielded resistor
(120 ohm) cable (120 ohm)

9_

9-5
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

9.2.7 AS-FEN02
9.2.7.1 Supported Software and Firmware Versions
 The firmware of AS300 Series PLC should be V1.06 or later for AS-FEN02 to be installed on it.

 The firmware of AS00SCM-A module (in RTU mode) should be V2.02 or later for AS-FEN02 to be installed
on it.

 ISPSoft version should be V3.06 or later.

 EIP Builder version should be V1.06 or later.

9.2.7.2 Features
 AS-FEN02 can be installed on AS300 Series PLC and AS00SCM-A (in RTU mode). This section introduces
the operations when it is installed on AS300 Series PLC. For the operations when it is installed on
AS00SCM-A and acting as remote module for AS/AH Series PLC, refer to section 8.4.2 for more details.

 When AS-FEN02 is installed on AS300 Series PLC, it acts as a Master or a Slave for Modbus TCP
connection. The operation is the same as using the built-in connection port for communication, refer to
section 8.3.1.2 of AS Series Operation Manual for more details.

 When AS-FEN02 is installed on AS300 Series PLC, it acts as a EthernNet/IP Adapter but not EtherNet/IP
Scanner for EtherNet/IP connection. The operation is the same as the EtherNet/IP port on AS Series PLC,
refer to Chapter 9 of AS Series Operation Manual for more details.

9.2.7.3 Specifications
 System Specifications
Item Specification
Device type Master, Slave and RTU
Star, linear, ring topologies are supported. (FW
Topology
V1.04 or later to support DLR function)
Software: switch the ID2 and FORMAT2 to 00
General
IP Settings Hardware: set the IP address to 192.168.1.X
(X=1~254) for ID2 and FORMAT2
AS300 Series PLC
Availability
AS00SCM-A (available only for RTU mode)
Max. connection number 8
View device information
Account management
Web
Functions AS-FEN02 firmware update
Module monitoring (when installed in AS00SCM-A,
and in RTU mode)

_9

9-6
 Ch ap te r 9 Fu nc ti on Ca rds

 MODBUS TCP Specifications (only available for CPU modules)

Item Specification
General Device type Server, Client
Max. connection number 8
MODBUS TCP
Max. data length/per
Server 200 words
transmission
Max. connection number 8
MODBUS TCP
Max. data length/per
Client 200 words
transmission
Note: The connection numbers of Server and Client are counted separately.

 EtherNet/IP Specifications
Item Specification
General Device type Adapter
CIP connection number 8
TCP connection number 8 (Servers)
Requested Packet Interval
CIP Network I/O 1 ms~1000ms
(RPI)
Connection
Max. Transmission Speed 10,000 pps
Max. data length/per
400 bytes
transmission
Class 3
(Connected Type)
Total 8 (Servers)
UCMM
(for both class 3 and UCMM connection types)
(Non-Connected Type, only
uses TCP connections)
Identity Object (16#01)
CIP Network
Message Router Object (16#02)
Explicit Message
Assembly Object (16#04)
Connection Manager Object (16#06)
CIP Objects
Port Object (16#F4)
TCP/IP Interface Object (16#F5)
Ethernet Link Object (16#F6)
Not supporting self-defined objects

9_

9-7
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

9.2.7.4 Topology
With its own standalone communication port, the AS-FEN02 card can work independently and can be MODBUS TCP
Server, Client and EtherNet/IP Adapter. After installing the extension card, use HWCONFIG in ISPSoft to configure the
communication.

 Linear Topology

 Star Topology

 Ring Topology
A DLR function is required to create a ring topology. When a switch is needed for topology, the switch
should support the DLR function. If not, the
(AS-FEN02 with firmware V1.04 or later to support
connection might fail.
DLR function)

_9

9-8
 Ch ap te r 9 Fu nc ti on Ca rds

9.2.7.5 SM/SR
 Special Auxiliary Relays (SM)

AS300 Series

AS200 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SM Function   
ON RUN STOP

SM1006 Data exchange through AS-FEN02 enabled by ISPSoft. ○ – OFF – OFF N R/W OFF
Connection 1 for data exchange through AS-FEN02
SM1008 ○ – OFF – – N R/W OFF
started
Connection 2 for data exchange through AS-FEN02
SM1009 ○ – OFF – – N R/W OFF
started
Connection 3 for data exchange through AS-FEN02
SM1010 ○ – OFF – – N R/W OFF
started
Connection 4 for data exchange through AS-FEN02
SM1011 ○ – OFF – – N R/W OFF
started
Connection 5 for data exchange through AS-FEN02
SM1012 ○ – OFF – – N R/W OFF
started
Connection 6 for data exchange through AS-FEN02
SM1013 ○ – OFF – – N R/W OFF
started
Connection 7 for data exchange through AS-FEN02
SM1014 ○ – OFF – – N R/W OFF
started
Connection 8 for data exchange through AS-FEN02
SM1015 ○ – OFF – – N R/W OFF
started
Successful data exchange connection 1 through AS-
SM1016 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02
Successful data exchange connection 2 through AS-
SM1017 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02
Successful data exchange connection 3 through AS-
SM1018 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02
Successful data exchange connection 4 through AS-
SM1019 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02
Successful data exchange connection 5 through AS-
SM1020 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02
Successful data exchange connection 6 through AS-
SM1021 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02
Successful data exchange connection 7 through AS-
SM1022 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02
Successful data exchange connection 8 through AS-
SM1023 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02
Error in data exchange connection 1 through AS-
SM1024 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02
Error in data exchange connection 2 through AS-
SM1025 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02

SM1026
Error in data exchange connection 3 through AS-
○ – OFF – – N R OFF
9_
FEN02
Error in data exchange connection 4 through AS-
SM1027 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02
Error in data exchange connection 5 through AS-
SM1028 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02
Error in data exchange connection 6 through AS-
SM1029 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02

9-9
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

AS300 Series

AS200 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SM Function   
ON RUN STOP

Error in data exchange connection 7 through AS-

SM1030 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02
Error in data exchange connection 8 through AS-
SM1031 ○ – OFF – – N R OFF
FEN02

Special auxiliary
Refresh time
relay
SM1006 After the parameters of data exchange are downloaded, you set the flag to ON or OFF.
SM1008~SM1015 After the parameters of data exchange are downloaded, you set the flag to ON or OFF.
SM1016~SM1031 The flag is ON, when the system is refreshed automatically.

 Special Data Registers (SR)

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
AS300

AS200
Series

Series
SR Function   
ON RUN STOP

Actual connection time for data exchange through the

SR1520 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
AS-FEN02 connection 1
Actual connection time for data exchange through the
SR1521 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
AS-FEN02 connection 2
Actual connection time for data exchange through the
SR1522 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
AS-FEN02 connection 3
Actual connection time for data exchange through the
SR1523 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
AS-FEN02 connection 4
Actual connection time for data exchange through the
SR1524 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
AS-FEN02 connection 5
Actual connection time for data exchange through the
SR1525 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
AS-FEN02 connection 6
Actual connection time for data exchange through the
SR1526 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
AS-FEN02 connection 7
Actual connection time for data exchange through the
SR1527 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
AS-FEN02 connection 8
The error code for data exchange through the AS-
SR1528 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
FEN02 connection 1
The error code for data exchange through the AS-
SR1529 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
FEN02 connection 2
The error code for data exchange through the AS-
SR1530 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
FEN02 connection 3
_9 SR1531
The error code for data exchange through the AS-
○ – 0 – – N R 0
FEN02 connection 4
The error code for data exchange through the AS-
SR1532 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
FEN02 connection 5
The error code for data exchange through the AS-
SR1533 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
FEN02 connection 6
The error code for data exchange through the AS-
SR1534 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
FEN02 connection 7

9-10
 Ch ap te r 9 Fu nc ti on Ca rds

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
AS300

AS200
Series

Series
SR Function   
ON RUN STOP

The error code for data exchange through the AS-

SR1535 ○ – 0 – – N R 0
FEN02 connection 8
SR1536 AS-FEN02 TCP current connection number ○ – 0 – – N R 0
SR1537 AS-FEN02 MODBUS/TCP Server connection number ○ – 0 – – N R 0
SR1538 AS-FEN02 MODBUS/TCP Client connection number ○ – 0 – – N R 0
SR1539 AS-FEN02 EtherNet/IP Adapter connection number ○ – 0 – – N R 0

Special data
Refresh time
register
SR1520~SR1535 Refresh after AS-FEN02 communication is done.
SR1536~SR1539 The flag is ON, when the system is refreshed automatically.

9.2.7.6 Data Mapping through EtherNet/IP Adapter

When AS-FEN02 is installed on AS Series PLC, you can create a connection through EIP Builder and make it act as an
EtherNet/IP adapter. The below example uses two AS Series PLCs (one with AS-FEN02) to connect to each other and
perform data mapping through EtherNet/IP connection. Refer to Chapter 9 in AS Series Operation Manual for more
details on AS Series PLC acting as EtherNet/IP Scanner.

Device Function IP Address Data Mapping Area

AS300 EtherNet/IP Scanner 192.168.1.5 D100, D200
AS300+ AS-FEN02 EtherNet/IP Adapter 192.168.1.3 D200, D300

Step 1

Double click AS Series PLC in HWCONFIG and the Device Setting window appears. Set up the IP Address of the AS-
FEN02 to 192.168.1.3 and then connect the scanner EtherNet/IP port to the AS-FEN02 through a network cable. Right-
click the AS300 Series PLC to open EIP Builder and then scan the network or drag and drop the ASCPU (AS-FEN02) to
add it to the same network as the scanner’s.

9_

9 - 11
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

Step 2

Right click the Scanner’s communication port (red spot) and select Data Mapping from the menu. Data mapping table
appears for editing.

Step 3

Editing the data mapping table. You can enter the starting register address and the data length for data mapping between
the scanner and adapter. The unit for data length is byte. As the below example shows the value in the scanner’s D200 is
written by the data from the adapter’s D300. Read data from the adapter’s D200 and store the data in the scanner’s
D100.

_9

9-12
 Ch ap te r 9 Fu nc ti on Ca rds

Step 4

Click the Downloader icon and then select the parameters that you’d like to download. After the scanner starts to run,
check if the data stored in the adapter D300 and D200 increment by 1 every second to determine if the data mapping is
going well.

9.2.7.7 Example of Connecting to 3rd Party PLC Scanner through EIP Builder
Through EIP Builder, a 3rd party PLC (when acting as a scanner) can create an EtherNet/IP connection to AS300 Series
PLC (when AS-FEN02 is installed). The following example uses Rockwell PLC as a scanner to perform data mapping
with a Delta PLC.

(1) Install the EDS file. After the installation is done, you can see the device information.

9_

9-13
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

(2) Set up the network parameters. Make sure to set the Input Type to Multicast. For basic operation, you
can use the default EDS file directly. No need to edit the EDS file.

_9

9-14
 Ch ap te r 9 Fu nc ti on Ca rds

(3) Setting up the data mapping table

I: Input data (TO), Ex. Connection 1 is corresponding to PLC D3000~D3099.

O: Output data (OT), Ex. Connection 1 is corresponding to PLC D2000~D2099.

C: here corresponds to the configurations. You can edit the corresponding PLC addresses of input and output. After
editing, you need to download the parameters to Rockwell PLC.

I/O Message Connection

Instance
Connection No. Function Length Defaults
Attribute
Input (TO) 0x65 100 words D3000~D3099
Connection 1 Output (OT) 0x64 100 words D2000~D2099
Configuration 0x80 8 words Refer to the table below
Input (TO) 0x67 100 words D3100~D3199
Connection 2 Output (OT) 0x66 100 words D2100~D2199
Configuration 0x81 8 words Refer to the table below

9_
Input (TO) 0x69 100 words D3200~D3299
Connection 3 Output (OT) 0x68 100 words D2200~D2299
Configuration 0x82 8 words Refer to the table below
Input (TO) 0x6B 100 words D3300~D3399
Connection 4 Output (OT) 0x6A 100 words D2300~D2399
Configuration 0x83 8 words Refer to the table below
Connection 5 Input (TO) 0x6D 100 words D3400~D3499

9-15
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

I/O Message Connection

Instance
Connection No. Function Length Defaults
Attribute
Output (OT) 0x6C 100 words D2400~D2499
Configuration 0x84 8 words Refer to the table below
Input (TO) 0x6F 100 words D3500~D3599
Connection 6 Output (OT) 0x6E 100 words D2500~D2599
Configuration 0x85 8 words Refer to the table below
Input (TO) 0x71 100 words D3600~D3699
Connection 7 Output (OT) 0x70 100 words D2600~D2699
Configuration 0x86 8 words Refer to the table below
Input (TO) 0x73 100 words D3700~D3799
Connection 8 Output (OT) 0x72 100 words D2700~D2799
Configuration 0x87 8 words Refer to the table below

Configuration Defaults
Data type Description
address (Connection 1)
Input corresponding device
Word[0] UINT 0
0: D, 1: X, 2: Y
Word[1] UINT Reserved 200
Word[2-3] DWORD Input corresponding device number 3000
Output corresponding device
Word[4] UINT 0
0: D, 2: Y
Word[5] UINT Reserved 200
Word[6-7] DWORD Output corresponding device number 2000

_9

9-16
 Ch ap te r 9 Fu nc ti on Ca rds

9.2.7.8 Data Mapping through Modbus TCP

When AS-FEN02 is installed on AS Series PLC, you can create a connection by configuring the IP address and some
relevant parameters to make it act as a Modbus TCP Slave device.

The following example shows two AS Series PLCs (one with AS-FEN02) to connect each other and one as Master and
the other as Slave (AS-FEN02) to perform data mapping through the Modbus TCP connection. For the support function
codes and corresponding addresses, refer to AS Series Operation Manual for more details.

Device Function IP Address Data Mapping Area

AS300 Modbus TCP Master 192.168.1.5 D100, D200
AS300+ AS-FEN02 Modbus TCP Slave 192.168.1.3 D200, D300

Step 1

Double click AS Series PLC in HWCONFIG and the Device Setting window appears. Set up the IP Address of the A to
192.168.1.3 and then connect Master and Slave AS-FEN02.

9_

9-17
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

Step 2

Create a data mapping table in the Master and then perform data mapping with the Slave (AS-FEN02).

Step 3

Click the Downloader icon and then select the parameters that you’d like to download.

_9

9-18
 Ch ap te r 9 Fu nc ti on Ca rds

9.2.7.9 Webpage
When AS-FEN02 is installed on AS300 Series PLC or AS00SCM-A (RTU mode), you can enter AS-FEN02 IP address in
the search bar of your browser to connect to your device. After that you can set up, update firmware and monitor AS-
FEN02. The webpage displays differently, when AS-FEN02 is installed on AS300 Series PLC or AS00SCM-A (RTU mode).
They will be explained in different sections.

List of browsers that support AS-FEN02 webpage:

Provider Browser Supported versions

Microsoft Internet Explorer V10.0 and later

Microsoft Edge V20 and later

Google Chrome V14 and later

Mozilla Firefox V17 and later

Apple Safari V5.1 and later

 When AS-FEN02 is installed on AS300 Series PLC

a. After the setting IP address in HWCONFIG of ISPSoft. Open your browser and enter AS-FEN02 IP address in
the search bar to connect to AS-FEN02. After the webpage appears, enter “Admin” in the User section and
click Login without entering any password. You can set up the password after login.

9_

9-19
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

b. After login, you can setting items on the left section.

c. The menu shows data based on the permission of the current user.

Permission
Nodes
Administrator Read

Device information V V

Account management V X

Firmware update V X

DLR status V V

Save configuration V X

d. Account Management: You can set 2 kinds of access types, Administrator and Read. After the setting is done,
click Apply and save the settings in Save configuration.

_9

9-20
 Ch ap te r 9 Fu nc ti on Ca rds

e. Firmware Update: You can update the firmware of AS-FEN02 via the webpage.

f. DLR Status: You can view the current DLR status and edit the refresh cycle. It is required to use AS-FEN02
with firmware V1.04 or later for DLR function.

g. Save Configuration: After any setting is done, save the settings in Save Configuration to reflect the changes.

9_

9-21
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

 When AS-FEN02 is installed on AS00SCM-A

a. Use the switches on AS00SCM-A to set the AS-FEN02 IP address. Open your browser and enter AS-FEN02
IP address in the search bar to connect to AS-FEN02. After the webpage appears, enter “Admin” in the User
section and click Login without entering any password. You can set up the password after login.

b. The menu shows data based on the permission of the current user. When it is installed on AS00SCM-A, you
can monitor the Hardware Status.

Permission
Nodes
Administrator Read

Device information V V

Account management V X

Firmware update V X

Hardware status V V

DLR status V V

Save configuration V X

c. Hardware Status: you can monitor the connected right-side I/O modules, including their module names, the
current values, statuses and error codes. You can edit the values in the Refresh Cycle to update the cycle.

_9

9-22
 Ch ap te r 9 Fu nc ti on Ca rds

9.2.8 AS-FPFN02
AS-FPFN02 can act as a PROFINET adapter and connect to a PROFINET scanner to exchange data on the PROFINET
network. Use PROFINET Congifuator to set up the communicaiton settings and download the parameters to the scanner
and then the scanner transfer the settings to AS-FPFN02.

9.2.8.1 Supported Firmware Versions

 The firmware of AS300 Series PLC should be V1.08 or later for AS-FEN02 to be installed on it.

 The firmware of AS-FPFN02 should be V1.00 or later.

9.2.8.2 Features
 When AS-FPFN02 is installed on AS300 Series PLC, it acts as a PROFINET adapter and exchanges data
with PN Controller.

 Architecture

You can use PC and PROFINET Configurator to download the parameters to the PN Controller. And then
the PN Controller can start looking for any PN Device and make connections on the PROFINET network.

9.2.8.3 Specifications
Item Specification
Communication Protocol PROFINET RT
EtherNet/IP Interface 100 Mbit with 2 x RJ45
Fieldbus PROFINET Devices
Network Cable Length 100 meter
Error Indicator System Fail (SF): Red; Bus Fail (BF): Red
Max. Connection Number 16

Register to Read and Write AS300 series data registers are supported to read and write

Minimum Time for Data Exchange to Operate 10 ms

Input: 250 words
9_
Maximum Data Length/Per Transmission
Output: 250 words
PROFINET Configuration Download PROFINET Configurations from PN Controller

9-23
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

9.2.8.4 LED Indicators

Number Name Description
System Fail Indicator
Red light ON: an error occurs in the system
1 SF indicator Example: the parameters downloaded to the Controller are different from
the actual placement, connecting port 2, instead of connecting to port 1
OFF: no system error
Bus Fail Indicator
Red light ON: the connection with PROFINET Controller is OFF.
2 BF indicator Red light BLINKING: the connection is working fine but the communication
with PROFINET Controller is NOT normal.
OFF: the connection with PN-Controller is working fine.
3 RJ-45 port X1/X2 Uses for network connections
Indicates the status of Ethernet connection
4 LINK indicator X1/X2 Green light ON: a network connection is established
OFF: a network connection is not established
Indicates the status of Ethernet communication
5 ACT indicator X1/X2 Orange BLINKING: data transmission
OFF: no data transmission
6 Clip ring Secures AS series

RJ-45 Pin Definition

1 TX+ 2 TX- 3 RX+ 4 N/C

5 N/C 6 RX- 7 N/C 8 N/C

_9

9-24
 Ch ap te r 9 Fu nc ti on Ca rds

9.2.8.5 Configuring the Data Length for I/O

You can use PN Controller’s Software to set up the data length for each I/O. The example below uses Siemens S7-1500
as the PN Controller and uses Siemens’ TIA Portal software for configuration.

Up to 500/500 bytes of I/O address area are available for I/O of AS-FPFN02. Use PN Controller’s Software to set up the
data length for each I/O. The total usage of I/O address area should also include the bytes for information (e.g. IOPS and
IOCS) of each module.

Module Type Data Length

Slot 0 (DAP) 4 bytes

Input module 1 byte

Output module 1 byte

9_
I/O module 2 bytes

9-25
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

Example:

The address area is already used with data of 500/500 bytes and when adding the 6*2 bytes (six I/O modules) and
adding a fixed 4 bytes (Slot 0) in, the data exceeds the total maximum permitted data length of 500/500 bytes. An error
message is shown by TIA Portal.

9.2.8.6 Status Register

When AS-FPFN02 is installed on AS300 Series PLC, 8 bytes of status registers are used for displaying the status of PN
Device. See the example below.

_9

9-26
 Ch ap te r 9 Fu nc ti on Ca rds

 Determine whether the input data is valid.

You can determine if the input data is valid by checking %I0.0 (device register). If it says TRUE, the input data is
valid and data exchange can begin.

 Determine if the Slot is with a working PN connection.

You can check the corresponding registers %I4.0~%I4.7 and %I5.0~%I5.7 to see if the Slot 1~8 and Slot 9~16 is
with a working PN connection.
The following example shows the values in the corresponding registers %I4.0~2 are TRUE and that indicates Slot
1~3 are with PN connections respectively.

Status Register
Description
(Siemens S7-1500)

Input Data Available If the value is TRUE, the input data is valid.
%I0.0 If the value is 0, the input data is invalid.

9_
Indicates PN connection status of Slot 1 ~ Slot 8.
Connection Status
If the value is TRUE, the Slot is with a working PN connection (with IO module)
%I4.0 - %I4.7
If the value is FALSE, the Slot is without a working PN connection.

Indicates PN connection status of Slot 9 ~ Slot 16.

Connection Status
If the value is TRUE, the Slot is with a working PN connection (with IO module)
%I5.0 - %I5.7
If the value is FALSE, the Slot is without a working PN connection.

9-27
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

9.2.8.7 Topology
 Linear Topology

 Star Topology

9.2.8.8 PROFINET Device Example (Adapter)

This section shows using Siemens TIA-Portal software to create a PROFINET IO from upper Siemens S7-1500 and
lower PLC and uses the function card AS-FPFN02 to read data registers in Delta AS300 Series PLC.

1. The arrangement is as the image shown below. The connection is established by using RJ45 connectors through
Ethernet communication.

2. Connect your PC to the same network as the relevant PROFINET devices (PN controller and PN device).

_9

9-28
 Ch ap te r 9 Fu nc ti on Ca rds

3. Create a new TIA-Portal project.

 Add a new device

9_

9-29
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

 Select a PN Controller Model

 Select the Project View or click Device & Network to enter the Project View.

_9

9-30
 Ch ap te r 9 Fu nc ti on Ca rds

4. Click Manage general station description files (GSDML) to install the GSD files.

9_

9-31
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

 After the installation is complete, select Device Configuration and Network View.

 Find and select the just-installed device from the Catalog on the right and drag and drop the selected device to
Device View on the left.

_9

9-32
 Ch ap te r 9 Fu nc ti on Ca rds

 Connect S7-1500 and AS-FPFN02 together with an Ethernet connection and edit their IP addresses.

9_

9-33
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

5. Assign a new PROFINET Device Name

 Under the option of Online access, you can find the name of the function card and that is the PROFINET device
name.

 Click Online & diagnostics and select Assign PROFINET device name. You can enter a new PROFINET device
name and after that click Assign name to save the change.

_9

9-34
 Ch ap te r 9 Fu nc ti on Ca rds

 Go back to the Network View and enter the new device name again in the red box as shown below.

6. Compile and download the project.

9_

9-35
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

_9

9-36
 Ch ap te r 9 Fu nc ti on Ca rds

7. If the project is downloaded successfully and the operation is normal, after you click Go Online, you can see a
similar view as the image shown below. And the basic configurations are complete.

8. Data Exchange
The range of data registers in AS300 Series PLC that an AS-FPFN02 can read/write is between D0 and D29999.

9_

9-37
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

a. Configuring the data length for I/O

Select a module and configure the data length for it, as the image shown below.

Up to 250/250 Words of I/O address area are available for I/O of AS-FPFN02. If exceeding the limit, an error message
shows up. Refer to Section 9.2.8.5 for more details.

b. Setting up the starting address of the data register to exchange data.

Enter the starting address in Module Parameters for data exchange. When entering 100 in Input D Register and 200 in
Output D Register and using a 8 Word In/Out module, the PN Controller reads values starting from D100 to D115 and
writes the values in the data register starting from D200 to D215.

_9

9-38
 Ch ap te r 9 Fu nc ti on Ca rds

 PN Controller transmits 8 Words of data (Q0~Q15) to the data register D200~D207 in AS300 Series PLC.

 AS-FPFN02 transmits 8 Words of data (D100~D107) to the data register I0~I15 in S7-1500.

To determine if the data exchange is successful, you can check the program in Siemens TIA-Portal software. With a
created PLC program, when clicking Main [OB1], the value in the register QW0 increments every second and that
indicates the data exchange is successful.

The data exchange can only begin when the Bit Input Data Available is TRUE. Refer to Section 9.2.8.6 for more details.

To determine if the data exchange is successful, you can check the program in ISPSoft. Use the MOVE instruction, you
can see the value in D200 moves to D100 and PN Controller can read the data and that indicates the data exchange is
successful.

9_

9-39
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

Check if the monitor values of registers QW0 and IW0 in the Watch Table are the same to determine the data exchange
is successful and if the exchanged data is accurate.

_9

9-40
 Ch ap te r 9 Fu nc ti on Ca rds

9.3 Profiles and Dimensions

9.3.1 AS-F232

66.3
59.3
37 23.9
Unit: mm

9.3.2 AS-F422/AS-F485/AS-F2AD/AS-F2DA
59.3
60.8

37 23.9
Unit: mm

9.3.3 AS-FCOPM
61.3
59.3

9_

37 23.9
Unit: mm

9-41
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

9.3.4 AS-FEN02
42 25.2

1
2

88
3
4

61.5 6

Number Name Description

Indicates if the module has been set
ON: the setting is complete
1 MS indicator
Blinking: the setting is not complete
OFF: no power
Indicates the status of Ethernet connection
Green lignt ON: a CIP connection is established
Green lignt BLINKING: a CIP connection is not established
2 NS indicator Red light ON: duplicated IP address
Red light BLINKING: communication timeout / DLR conection
lost / IP address change
OFF: no power / network cable is not connected
3 RJ-45 port X1/X2 Use for network connections
Indicate the status of Ethernet connection
4 LINK indicator X1/X2 Green light ON: a network connection is established
OFF: a network connection is not established
Indicate the status of Ethernet communication
5 ACT indicator X1/X2 Orange BLINKING: data transmission
OFF: no data transmission
6 Clip ring Secures AS series

RJ-45 Pin Definition

Pin No. RJ-45
1 TX+
2 TX-
3 RX+
4 N/C
5 N/C
6 RX-
_9
7 N/C
8 N/C

9-42
 Ch ap te r 9 Fu nc ti on Ca rds

9.3.5 AS-FPFN02
42 25.2

1
2

88
3
4
5

61.5 6

Number Name Description

System Fail Indicator
Red light ON: an error occurs in the system
1 SF indicator Example: the parameters downloaded to the Controller are different from
the actual placement, connecting port 2, instead of connecting to port 1
OFF: no system error
Bus Fail Indicator
Red light ON: the connection with PROFINET Controller is OFF.
2 BF indicator Red light BLINKING: the connection is working fine but the communication
with PROFINET Controller is NOT normal.
OFF: the connection with PN-Controller is working fine.
3 RJ-45 port X1/X2 Uses for network connections
Indicates the status of Ethernet connection
4 LINK indicator X1/X2 Green light ON: a network connection is established
OFF: a network connection is not established
Indicates the status of Ethernet communication
5 ACT indicator X1/X2 Orange BLINKING: data transmission
OFF: no data transmission
6 Clip ring Secures AS series

RJ-45 Pin Definition

Pin No. RJ-45
1 TX+
2 TX-
3 RX+
4 N/C
5 N/C
9_
6 RX-
7 N/C
8 N/C

9-43
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

9.4 Wiring
9.4.1 AS-F2AD

Sh iel ded cab le *1

2-wi re : curre nt i np ut

Sh iel ded cab le *1

3-wire: v olta ge in put

Sh iel ded cab le *1

3-wire: c urre nt i np ut

Sh iel ded cab le *1

*1. Use shielded cables to isolate the analog input signal cable from other power cables.

*2. If the module is connected to a current signal, the terminals Vn and In+ (n=1–2) must be short-circuited.

_9 *3. If variability in the input voltage results in interference within the wiring, connect the module to a capacitor having a
capacitance in the range of 0.1–0.47 μF and a working voltage of 25 V.

*4. Connect the shielded cable to the terminal FE.

*5. The wording “CHX” indicates that you can use the five wiring methods listed above for every input channel.

9-44
 Ch ap te r 9 Fu nc ti on Ca rds

9.4.2 AS-F2DA

Vol tage o utpu t

0V~+10V *4
CHX
V O1 CH1
*2
IO1
COM
AC motor driv e, Sh iel de d ca ble *1 *3 AG
recorder,
propor tioning v al ve
FE

C urre nt o utp ut *4
CHX
4mA ~20mA
V O2 CH2
IO2
COM
AG
AC motor driv e,
recorder, Sh iel de d ca ble *1 *3
propor tioning v al ve

FE

*1. Use shielded cables to isolate the analog input signal cable from other power cables.

*2. If variability in the input voltage results in interference within the wiring, connect the module to a capacitor having a
capacitance in the range of 0.1–0.47 μF and a working voltage of 25 V.

*3. Connect the shielded cable to the terminal FE.

*4. The wording “CHX” indicates that you can use the two wiring methods listed above for every input channel.

9.5 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft

9.5.1 Initial Setting
(1) Start ISPSoft and double-click HWCONFIG.

9_

9-45
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

(2) Select a function card on the module.

(3) Double-click the function card to open the Device Setting page.
Card1 Detect mode: select Auto Detect or choose the function card model.

_9

9-46
 Ch ap te r 9 Fu nc ti on Ca rds

(a) When the function card is an AS-F232, AS-F422, or AS-F485, configure the communication settings in the red
box.

(b) Function card AS-FCOM can only be installed in function card slot 2.

(c) Configure the communication settings in the red box.

9_

9-47
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

(d) When the function card is an AS-F2AD or AS-F2DA, configure the communication settings in the red box.

(e) When the function card is an AS-FEN02, configure the communication settings in the red box.

_9

9-48
 Ch ap te r 9 Fu nc ti on Ca rds

(f) Click OK to confirm the settings.

(4) Click Download on the toolbar to download the parameters. Note that you cannot download the parameters while
the CPU module is running.

9_

9-49
 10
1
Chapter 10 DeviceNet Master Scanner Module
AS01DNET-A

Table of contents
10.1 Introduction of AS01DNET-A ........................................................... 10-3
10.1.1 Feature ..................................................................................... 10-3
10.1.2 Specifications ............................................................................. 10-3

10.2 Components of AS01DNET-A ........................................................... 10-4

10.2.1 Profile and Dimensions ................................................................ 10-4
10.2.2 Components............................................................................... 10-5
10.2.3 Mode Toggle（RTU- Master/Slave）................................................ 10-5
10.2.4 DeviceNet Connector ................................................................... 10-5
10.2.5 Address Switch ........................................................................... 10-6
10.2.6 Function Switch .......................................................................... 10-6
10.2.7 Digital Displayer ......................................................................... 10-6

10.3 DeviceNet Network Communication ................................................ 10-7

10.3.1 Relationship between Transmission Distance and Baud Rate .............. 10-7
10.3.2 DeivceNet Network Topology Structure........................................... 10-7
10.3.3 Choice and Purpose of a DeviceNet Terminal Resistor ...................... 10-11
10.3.4 DeviceNet Network Supply Power ................................................. 10-12

10.4 Master /Slave Mode ....................................................................... 10-13

10.4.1 Introduction of Master/Slave Mode ............................................... 10-13
10.4.1.1Scan List, Input Table and Output Table ....................................... 10-13
10.4.2 Installation ............................................................................... 10-14
10.4.2.1Connecting AS01DNET-A Module to AS series PLC ......................... 10-14
10.4.2.2Connecting the DeviceNet Communication Connector .................... 10-14
10.4.3 IO Mapping for AS01DNET in AS PLC ............................................ 10-15
10.4.3.1Data Mapping between Modules and AS PLC................................. 10-15
10.4.3.2Tables of Input Mapping and Output Mapping areas ....................... 10-16
10.4.4 Bit-strobe Command .................................................................. 10-17
10.4.4.1Bit-strobe Work Principle ........................................................... 10-17
10.4.5 Network Node Status Display ....................................................... 10-18
10.4.5.1Scan-List Node Status Indication ................................................ 10-18
10.4.5.2Module Status Indication ........................................................... 10-18
10.4.6 Setting the Time for Data Exchange between Master and Slaves ....... 10-18
10.4.7 Application Example Network Node Status Indication ...................... 10-19
10.4.7.1.Constructing One DeviceNet Network ......................................... 10-20

10-1
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

10.4.7.2.Using DeviceNet Builder to Configure a DeviceNet Network ........... 10-21

10.4.7.3.DeviceNet Network Control....................................................... 10-28
10.4.8 Sending Explicit Message through Ladder Diagram ......................... 10-29
10.4.8.1.Principle of Explicit Message Transmission .................................. 10-29
10.4.8.2.Explicit Message Transmission Instruction DNETRW...................... 10-30
10.4.9 LED Indicators and Troubleshooting .............................................. 10-36
10.4.9.1.NS LED ................................................................................. 10-36
10.4.9.2.MS LED ................................................................................. 10-37
10.4.9.3.Combination of MS LED and NS LED .......................................... 10-37
10.4.9.4.Digital Displayer ..................................................................... 10-37
10.4.10 Master-Slave Mode Switch and 8 Baud Rates Setting via Software ...... 10-39
10.4.10.1.Setting AS01DNET-A to Slave Mode ......................................... 10-39
10.4.10.2.Setting AS01DNET-A to Master Mode ....................................... 10-42
10.4.10.3.Baud Rate Setting of When AS01DNET-A is in Slave Mode ........... 10-45
10.4.10.4.Baud Rate Setting of When AS01DNET-A is in Master Mode ......... 10-48

10.5 RTU Mode ...................................................................................... 10-51

10.5.1 Introduction of AS01DNET (in RTU Mode) .................................... 10-51
10.5.2 AS-Series Extension Modules Connectable to AS01DNET (RTU) ........ 10-52
10.5.3 Installation ............................................................................... 10-53
10.5.3.1.Installing AS01DNET (in RTU Mode) ........................................... 10-53
10.5.3.2.Connecting the Cable to DeviceNet Connector ............................. 10-54
10.5.4 Configuring AS01DNET (in RTU mode) .......................................... 10-55
10.5.4.1.Terms ................................................................................... 10-55
10.5.4.2.Introduction of Software .......................................................... 10-56
10.5.4.3.DeviceNet Mapping Data .......................................................... 10-74
10.5.4.4.Connecting AS01DNET (RTU) to the Network .............................. 10-81
10.5.5 Application Example ................................................................... 10-82
10.5.5.1.Network Structure .................................................................. 10-82
10.5.5.2.Using DeviceNet Builder to Configure the Network ....................... 10-82
10.5.5.3.Using LD Program to Control the Entire Network.......................... 10-91
10.5.6 Error Diagnosis and Trouble Shooting ........................................... 10-91
10.5.6.1.Indicator Diagnosis ................................................................. 10-92
10.5.6.2.Codes in Seven-Segment Displayer ........................................... 10-93
10.5.6.3.Status Word Diagnosis ............................................................. 10-95
10.5.6.4.Software Diagnosis ................................................................. 10-96

10.6 How to Call DeviceNet Builder through ISPSoft (AS-Series PLC) ... 10-97

10

10-2
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

10.1 Introduction of AS01DNET-A

 Thank you for choosing Delta AS01DNET-A. Please read this chapter carefully before use so as to ensure correct
installation and operation of AS01DNET-A.

 The instruction is simply a guideline for operation of the product and the details on the DeviceNet protocol is
excluded here. Please refer to relevant articles and literatures for more details on the DeviceNet protocol.

 AS01DNET-A, a DeviceNet network module can work in two modes: master /slave and RTU. The RTU-
Master/Slave switch is used for selecting one of the two modes. When AS01DNET-A works in master/slave mode,
it makes up the DeviceNet master or slave with AS-series PLC together. When working in RTU mode, AS01DNET-
A needs an external 24VDC power supply and can connect AS-series I/O modules onits right side.

Refer to section 10.4 and 10.5 for details about master/slave mode and RTU mode.

10.1.1 Feature
 Supports the Group 2 server slave and Group 2 only servers.

 Supports the explicit connection in the predefined master/slave connection and I/O polling connection.

 Able to work as a DeviceNet master or slave as well as a remote RTU connecting AS series I/O modules.

 The network configuration software DeviceNet Builder offers the graphical configuration interface.

 Supports the EDS file configuration in the DeviceNet network configruation tool.

10.1.2 Specifications
 DeviceNet Connector

Item Specifications

Transmission method CAN

Electrical isolation DC500V
Connector type Removable terminal block with screws (5.08mm)
Communication cable 2 communication wires, 2 power wires and 1 shielded wire included.

 DeviceNet Communication

Item Specifications

Message type I/O polling connection, explicit connection

Standard: 125 kbps, 250 kbps and 500 kbps
Baud rate Extension: 10 kbps, 20 kbps, 50 kbps, 125 kbps, 250 kbps, 500 kbps,
800kbps and 1M bps.

 Electrical Specification

Item Specifications

10
Voltage The power wires of the communication cable provide 11 ~ 25 VDC.
Current 28mA (typical value), 125mA impulse current (24 VDC)

10-3
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

 Environment

Item Specifications

ESD (IEC 61131-2, IEC 61000-4-2): 8KV Air Discharge

EFT (IEC 61131-2, IEC 61000-4-4): Power Line: 2KV, Digital I/O: 1KV
Noise immunity Analog & Communication I/O: 1KV
Damped-Oscillatory Wave: Power Line: 1KV, Digital I/O: 1KV
RS (IEC 61131-2, IEC 61000-4-3): 26MHz ~ 1GHz, 10V/m

-20ºC ~ 60ºC (Temperature); 5 ~ 95% (Humidity), no condensation;

Operating Environment
pollution degree: 2
Storage Environment -40ºC ~ 80ºC (Temperature); 5~95% (Humidity), no condensation

International standard IEC 61131-2, IEC 68-2-6 (TEST Fc)/IEC 61131-2 &
Vibration/Shock resistance
IEC 68-2-27 (TEST Ea)

Safety Conforms to IEC 61131-2, UL508

10.2 Components of AS01DNET-A

10.2.1 Profile and Dimensions

10

10-4
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

10.2.2 Components

01DNET 1
MS

7 NS 2 9
1
x10

3
IN 0
IN 1 Node Address
0
x10

8 5

6
RTU Master/ Slave

10

Mode toggle
① Model name ⑥
(RTU-Master/Slave)

② State indicators ⑦ Left-side extension port

③ Address switch ⑧ Nameplate

④ Function switch ⑨ Right-side extension port

⑤ DeviceNet communication port ⑩ 24V DC power input port for RTU mode

Note:

The power input port of the network module is required to connect an external 24VDC power supply only when the toggle
(RTU- Master/Slave) is switched to RTU mode. Otherwise, the port does not need an external 24VDC power supply
connected when the toggle (RTU- Master/Slave) is switched to Master/Slave mode.

10.2.3 Mode Toggle（RTU- Master/Slave）

Mode Selection Description

Works in master or slave mode and constitutes a

Master/Slave DeviceNet master or slave without external
power supply.
When working in remote (RTU) mode,
AS01DNET-A is required to connect the external RT U M a ste r/Sl ave
RTU
DC 24V power supply and can have AS series
I/O modules connected on its right side.

10.2.4 DeviceNet Connector

The connector is used for the connection to DeviceNet. Wire by using the connector enclosed with AS01DNET –A.

Pin Signal Color Description

1 V- Black 0 VDC
2 CAN_L Blue Signal-
3 SHIELD - Shielded wire
4 CAN_H White Signal+
10
5 V+ Red 24 VDC

10-5
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

10.2.5 Address Switch

The switch is used for setting up the node address of AS01DNET-A in DeviceNet network. Range: 00~63 (64~99
are forbidden.)

Switch setting Description 2 3

4
0 1
1
x10

5 6
9
7 8
0 … 63 Valid DeviceNet node address Node Address
2 3

4
0 1
0
x10

5 6
9
7 8
64…99 Invalid DeviceNet node address

Example: If users need to set the node address of AS01DNET-A to 26, simply switch the corresponding switch of
x101 to 2 and the corresponding switch of x100 to 6.

Note:

 After the setup is completed, repower AS01DNET-A.

 While AS01DNET-A is working, changing the setting of the node address is invalid.

 Rotate the switch carefully with a slotted screwdriver to prevent damage to the switch.

10.2.6 Function Switch

 The function switches are used for:

 Setting up the work mode (IN0)

 Setting up the baud rate of DeviceNet network (DR0~DR1)

DR1 DR0 Baud Rate

OFF OFF 125 Kbps
OFF ON 250 Kbps IN 0
ON OFF 500 Kbps IN 1
ON ON Entering the mode of extended baud rate
ON When the slave is off-line, the I/O data in the buffer area will be held.
IN0
OFF When the slave is off-line, the I/O data in the buffer area will be cleared.
IN1 Reserved
Note:

 After the setup of the function switch is completed during power off, repower AS01DNET-A.

 While AS01DNET-A is working, changing the setting of the node address is invalid.

 Adjust the DIP switch carefully with a slotted screwdriver to prevent any damage to the switch.

10.2.7 Digital Displayer

01DNET
 The digital displayer provides following functions:
MS


10 Showing the node address of AS01DNET-A and error ID
NS

 Showing the error information about a slave

10-6
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

10.3 DeviceNet Network Communication

10.3.1 Relationship between Transmission Distance and Baud Rate
The transmission distance of a DeivceNet network is determined by the baud rate. The following table shows the
corresponding maximum communication distance at different baud rates.

Baud rate (bits/s) 10K 20K 50K 125K 250K 500K 800K 1M
Max. transmission
5000 2500 1000 500 250 100 50 25
distance (M)

10.3.2 DeivceNet Network Topology Structure

10

10-7
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

List of Delta DeviceNet Fieldbus Network Products:

Product picture Model Function

1. AS01DNET-A, a DeviceNet module running on

the right of AS PLC can work as a DeviceNet
master or slave.
AS01DNET-A 2. AS01DNET-A can also be used as AS series
remote IO module for connecting AS series
DI/DO modules and AI/AO modules to DeviceNet
network.

AH10DNET-5A, a DeviceNet module, running on the

AH10DNET-5A right of AH500 series PLC can work as a DeviceNet
master or slave.

AHRTU-DNET-5A, a remote I/O module of AH

series, is used for connecting AH500 series DI/DO
AHRTU-DNET-5A
module, AI/AO module and 10SCM module to
DeviceNet network.

DVPDNET-SL, a DeviceNet module, running on the

DVPDNET-SL left of S series PLC can work as a DeviceNet
master or slave.

RTU-DNET, a remote I/O module of S series, is

RTU-DNET used for connecting S-series DI/DO module, AI/AO
module and other device to DeviceNet network.

10

10-8
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

Product picture Model Function

Used for connection of the DeviceNet network and

electromechanical equipment such as AC motor
IFD9502
drive, PLC, temperature controller, servo drive, HMI,
user-defined device.

A fieldbus data analysis tool, with one end: CAN

interface and the other end: USB interface can be
IFD6503 used for getting the CAN data or sending the data to
the CAN node. It is used with the Netview Builder
software together.

Used for connecting AC motor drive to DeviceNet

E-series AC motor drive
network via CME-DN01 card.

Used for connecting C2000 series AC motor drive to

CMC-DN01
the DeviceNet network.

Used for the connection of DeviceNet network and

DN-02
AC motor drive.

Used for the connection of DeviceNet network and

DVPDT01-S
S series PLC.

10

10-9
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

Product picture Model Function

Used for the connection of DeviceNet network and

DVPDT02-H2
DVP-EH2 series PLC.

The distribution box for CAN topology, with the 120

TAP-CP01 ohm resistor enclosed which is controlled to take
effect or not via its switch.

The distribution box for CAN topology, with the 120

TAP-CN01 ohm resistor enclosed which is controlled to take
effect or not via its switch.

The distribution box for CAN topology, with the 120

TAP-CN02 ohm resistor enclosed which is controlled to take
effect or not via its switch.

UC-DN01Z-01A UC-DN01Z-01A: DeviceNet trunk cable.

UC-DN01Z-02A UC-DN01Z-02A: DeviceNet branch cable.

10

10-10
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

10.3.3 Choice and Purpose of a DeviceNet Terminal Resistor

 Choice of a DeviceNet Terminal Resistor

A DeviceNet network requires two terminal resistors of 121 Ω connected at both ends of the trunk cable respectively.

The thick cable represents the trunk cable, the thin cable represents the branch cable and the yellow boxes at the two
ends are terminal resistors in the following figure.

 Purpose of a DeviceNet Terminal Resistor

The terminal resistor is used for eliminating the signal reflection in the communication cable.

All signal transmission cables have the characteristic impedance. The characteristic impedance of Delta DeviceNet
communication cable is about 121 Ω.

When being transmitted to the end of the communication cable, because the impedance of the end is different from the
characteristic impedance, the signal will be reflected, which will interfere with the new signal and the signal wave form
distortion will happen.

The phenomenon of the signal wave form distortion is not obvious in the short-distance transmission. But the wave form
distortion will become severer in the increasingly long communication cable. Therefore, the two ends of the trunk cable
must be installed with the terminal resistors respectively.

 Installation Position of Terminal Resistors

The DeviceNet communication cable consists of five wires such as red wire, blue wire, white wire, black wire and shielded
wire as below.

The terminal resistors must be installed to the two ends of the trunk cable only. Since the blue wire and white wire are
for signal transmission, both of the terminal resistors must be installed between blue wire and white wire at the two ends 10
of the main cable.

1 0 - 11
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

10.3.4 DeviceNet Network Supply Power

The network requires one or multiple supply powers to supply the power to each piece of network equipment via the bus
cable.

Delta DeviceNet communication cable consists of five wires, among which the power cable and signal cable occupy two
wires respectively and the one on the left is the shielded wire as the above figure shows.

The supply power for the bus is optional and could be a single supply power or multiple supply powers according to the
actual demand.

 Single Supply Power

 Multiple Supply Powers

10

10-12
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

10.4 Master /Slave Mode

10.4.1 Introduction of Master/Slave Mode
AS01DNET-A can work as a DeviceNet master as well as slave with at most 4 AS01DNET modules connectable to the
right side of AS PLC. Running on the right of AS-series PLC, AS01DNET-A with AS-series PLC together constitutes the
DeviceNet master or slave. When working in Master/Slave mode, AS01DNET-A is required to switch the function toggle
(RTU- Master/Slave) to Master/Slave mode and the DeviceNet Builder of version 2.04 and above is used for the setup.

For details about the setup, refer to section 10.4.10.

 As a master, AS01DNET-A can provide the following function.

 Supporting the Client function of Explicit message;

 Supporting IO polling connection with slaves;

 The network configuration software DeviceNet Builder provides graphic configuration interface.

 Sending explicit messages to read and write the data in slave through the explicit message instruction
DNETRW.

 Automatically performing data exchange with the PLC module; users just need write a program for D register
in the PLC without using FROM/TO instructions.

 Offering 190 bytes of output data area and 190 bytes of input data area for exchanging data with the master.

 As a slave, AS01DNET-A can provide the following function.

 Explicit message Server and Group 2 only server connection mode;

 Polling connection;

 Offering 200 bytes of input data area and 200 bytes of output data area for exchanging data with master;

 Automatically exchanging data with the PLC. The user just need to write a program for D register in the PLC
without using FROM/TO instruction.

10.4.1.1. Scan List, Input Table and Output Table

Item Description Figure

Before AS01DNET-A module works, the scan list

must be configured through the configuration
software. The scan list stores slave information
including node address, I/O type, I/O size and etc. for
data exchange. The scanner module manages the
Scan List
slaves in the scan list, makes a connection with
slaves and exchange I/O data with them. For those
slaves which have not been configured to the scan
list, AS01DNET-A will not make a connection and I/O
data exchange with them.

10

10-13
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

The scanner module provides an input table of total

size: 190 bytes and an output table of total size: 190
bytes for data exchange with slaves. When one slave
is configured to the scan list, the configuration
software will automatically assign corresponding size
of I/O data exchange area to the slave. Input Table
and Output Table are the interface for data exchange
Input/output between the PLC of the master and slaves and show
Table the mapping relationships between the D registers in
the PLC of the master and the I/O data of slaves.
After the configuration is finished, download the
configuration data to the scanner module. Then the
module will exchange I/O data with corresponding
slaves according to the configuration. The data in the
output table will be transmitted to slaves and the data
returned from slaves will be filled in the input table.

10.4.2 Installation
10.4.2.1. Connecting AS01DNET-A Module to AS series PLC

For the details on how AS01DNET-A (in Master/slave mode) is connected to AS series PLC, refer to Section 1.3.1
Installing a Module in AS Series Module Manual.

10.4.2.2. Connecting the DeviceNet Communication Connector

 Make sure that the color marks for the PINs of the DeviceNet connection port match the colors of the connection
cables and the cable should be connected to the right PIN.

 Delta’s power module is recommended as the power module in the communication.

10

10-14
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

10.4.3 IO Mapping for AS01DNET in AS PLC

10.4.3.1. Data Mapping between Modules and AS PLC

Up to four AS01DENT modules can be connected to the right side of AS PLC at most. After AS01DNET modules and
PLC are connected, PLC will assign data mapping areas to each module.

POWER
01DNET 01DNET 01DNET 01DNET
RUN MS MS MS MS

ERROR
BAT. LOW NS NS NS NS

COM1
COM2 40
AS324MT IN 0
x10
IN 0
x10
IN 0
x10
IN 0
x10

IN 1 Node Address IN 1 Node Address IN 1 Node Address IN 1 Node Address

0 8 x10 x10 x10 x10

1 9
2 10
3 11
IN
4
5
6
7

0 8
1 9
Ethernet
2 10
3 11
OUT
4 2 1
5
6
7
RTU Master/ Slave RTU Master/ Slave RTU Master/ Slave RTU Master/ Slave

AS01DNET modules are connected to the right of the PLC. The position of the first module on the right of AS PLC is 1, the
second module is 2, the third module is 3 and the fourth module is 4. The position is only defined for network modules such
as AS01DNET and AS00SCM, instead of digital modules, analog modules, temperature modules, and weight-
measurement modules. The positions of AS01DNET modules on the right of the PLC are shown in the following table
where there are two arrangement ways of module connections.

Example 1 Example 2

Arrangement order of Arrangement order of

Position of AS01DNET Position of AS01DNET
AS PLC and modules AS PLC and modules
on the right of the PLC on the right of the PLC
on the right of the PLC on the right of the PLC

AS PLC AS PLC

1 AS01DNET 1 AS01DNET

AS04AD AS04AD

2 AS01DNET AS00SCM

3 AS01DNET

10

10-15
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

When AS01DNET is at different positions of the right of the PLC, the input and output mapping areas for the AS01DNET
module in AS PLC are listed in the following table.

Position of
AS01DNET on
Output mapping area Input mapping area
the right of the
PLC
1 D26100 – D26199 D26000 – D26099
2 D26500 – D26599 D26400 – D26499
3 D26900 – D26999 D26800 – D26899
4 D27300 – D27399 D27200 – D27299

10.4.3.2. Tables of Input Mapping and Output Mapping areas

 When AS01DNET works in master mode, the input and output mapping areas for AS01DNET at different
positions of the right of AS PLC are listed in the following table.

Position of Output mapping area (for sending data to Input mapping area (for receiving data from
AS01DNET the slave) the slave)
on the right Data Data
D register Mapping area D register Mapping area
of the PLC size size
Scan-list node
Bit-strobe 4 4
D26100~D26103 D26000~D26003 status indication
command area words words
area
Module status
1 D26104 Reserved 1word D26004 1 word
indication area
DeviceNet
95 DeviceNet input 95
D26105~D26199 output data D26005~D26099
words data area words
area
Scan-list node
Bit-strobe 4 4
D26500~D26503 D26400~D26403 status indication
command area words words
area
Module status
2 D26504 Reserved 1word D26404 1 word
indication area
DeviceNet
95 DeviceNet input 95
D26505~D26599 output data D26405~D26499
words data area words
area
Scan-list node
Bit-strobe 4 4
D26900~D26903 D26800~D26803 status indication
command area words words
area
Module status
3 D26904 Reserved 1word D26804 1 word
indication area
DeviceNet
95 DeviceNet input 95
D26905~D26999 output data D26805~D26899
words data area words
area
Scan-list node
Bit-strobe 4 4
D27300~D27303 D27200~D27203 status indication
command area words words
area
4
Module status
10
D27304 Reserved 1word D27204 1 word
indication area
D27305~D27399 DeviceNet 95 D27205~D27299 DeviceNet input 95

10-16
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

Position of Output mapping area (for sending data to Input mapping area (for receiving data from
AS01DNET the slave) the slave)
on the right Data Data
D register Mapping area D register Mapping area
of the PLC size size
output data words data area words
area
Note: See section 10.4.5 for further explanation of scan-list node status indication areas and module status indication
areas. The input and output mentioned here are defined in the perspective of the master of the entire fieldbus system.

 When AS01DNET works in slave mode, the input and output mapping areas for AS01DNET at different positions
of the right of AS PLC are listed in the following table.
Position of Area for sending data to the master Area for receiving data from the master
AS01DNET on
the right of the
D register Data length D register Data length
PLC
1 D26100~D26199 100 words D26000~D26099 100 words

2 D26500 – D26599 100 words D26400 – D26499 100 words

3 D26900 – D26999 100 words D26800 – D26899 100 words

4 D27300 – D27399 100 words D27200 – D27299 100 words

10.4.4 Bit-strobe Command

10.4.4.1. Bit-strobe Work Principle
Bit strobe is one of the standard DeviceNet I/O transmission methods. The command length is fixed to 8 bytes, i.e. 64
bits. (Maximum 64 stations exist in a DeviceNet network.) One bit corresponds to one node. The following table takes
the first AS01DNET on the right of AS PLC for example.

Bit-strobe Corresponding network node

register b15 b14 b13 …… b1 b0
D26100 Node 15 Node 14 Node 13 …… Node 1 Node 0
D26101 Node 31 Node 30 Node 29 …… Node 17 Node 16
D26102 Node 47 Node 46 Node 45 …… Node 33 Node 32
D26103 Node 63 Node 62 Node 61 …… Node 49 Node 48
When the value of bit0 of D26100 is 0, node 0 is selected and need return data to the master.

When the values of bit0 and bit1 of D26100 are both 0, node 0 and node 1 are selected and they need return data to the
master.

D6283 D6282
b31 b30 b18 b17 b16 b15 b14 b2 b1 b0
Node 0
Node 1
Node 2

Node 14

In the bit-strobe method, the master does not send control data to the slave node. However, the slave node need return
I/O data to the master if the corresponding bit is set to 0. If the corresponding bit is set to 1, the slave node does not need
10
to return I/O data to the master.

10-17
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

10.4.5 Network Node Status Display

10.4.5.1. Scan-List Node Status Indication
The following table takes the first AS01DNET on the right of AS PLC for example. AS01DNET master can monitor whether
the configured slave is online or not in real time and have the status of the configured slave mapped to one bit. Users can
get the status of network nodes by monitoring the contents in D26000~D26003. The corresponding relationships between
devices in the PLC and network nodes are shown in the following table. If the node in Scan List is normal, the corresponding
bit is OFF. If the node in Scan List is abnormal, the corresponding bit is ON.

Register in Corresponding network node

the PLC b15 b14 b13 …… b1 b0
D26000 Node15 Node 14 Node 13 …… Node 1 Node 0
D26001 Node 31 Node 30 Node 29 …… Node 17 Node 16
D26002 Node 47 Node 46 Node 45 …… Node 33 Node 32
D26003 Node 63 Node 62 Node 61 …… Node 49 Node 48

10.4.5.2. Module Status Indication

The following table takes the first AS01DNET on the right of AS PLC for example. Users can get the status of the network
node by monitoring the content in D26004. When the module works normally, the content in D26004 is 0. When the module
is initializing, the content in the high byte of D26004 is 1 and the content in the low byte is 0. When an error occurs in the
module, the content in the high byte of D26004 is 2 and the content in the low byte is an error code. For details on error
codes, see section 10.9.5 Digital Displayer.

Register in Description
the PLC b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Module status
D26004 Error code in the module
（0：Normal，1：Initializing，2：error）

10.4.6 Setting the Time for Data Exchange between Master and
Slaves
When AS01DNET works in master mode, the period of time for a data exchange between master and all slaves need be
set. Master and all salves will periodically perform the data exchange based on the set time. See the following explanation
for details. Click menu Network >> Scanner Setting on the DeviceNet Builder software page. The Scanner Setting
window appears as below.

10

10-18
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

The explanation of Scan Interval Time and Expected Packet Rate is shown in the following table.

The period of time needed for a data exchange between master and all slaves.
Scan Interval Time
Master and all salves will periodically exchange data based on the set interval time.
Sets the timeout time for connection of master and slaves. The calculation method:
4 X EPR with the unit: ms. The default EPR is 75. The EPR for the connection of
Expected Packet Rate master and slaves is 4 X 75 = 300ms. The value indicates that the IO data exchange
(EPR) should be achieved once at least within 300 ms. Otherwise, the connection will fail
due to communication timeout and then the connection will have to be re-made so
that the IO data exchange can proceed.

Since most DeviceNet slaves only support polled IO data exchange, the EPR value is related to the value of Scan
Interval Time. Make sure that the actual setting must meet the following condition.

Scan Interval Time < （4 X EPR）

We suggest users refer to the following condition while setting the value of Scan Interval Time.

Scan Interval Time < （4 X EPR）/ 5

Click the Calculate Time button. The Calculate Scan Interval Time dialog box comes out. Clicking the Calculate button,
the values of Total input size, Total output size and Scan Interval Time are calculated. The value of Scan Interval Time
is a value in theory. We suggest users should set the scan interval time to a value slightly greater than the actually
calculated time. The scan interval time calculated here will not be filled in the Scan Interval Time box automatically and
so users need enter the value manually.

10.4.7 Application Example

To explain how to configure a DeviceNet network through an application example

Control requirement: AS PLC remotely monitors D26105~D26108 and D26005~D26008 in AS module through
DeviceNet network to achieve the data exchange as AS01DNET-A works as master and slave respectively.

10

10-19
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

10.4.7.1. Constructing One DeviceNet Network

This section describes how to construct a DeviceNet network configuration through an application example. Before
constructing a DeviceNet network, users should understand the control requirement of the network; plan the data for
exchange in advance such as maximum communication distance, slaves, total data length for exchange as well as the
requreiment for response time during data exchange.

The information above will determine whether the constructed network is reasonable and able to meet the demand. Even
it will directly affect the future maintenance and convenience of network capacity expansion and upgrade.

 Connection Figure

Note: Both of the ends of the DeviceNet Bus cable must connect one 121Ω terminal resistor respectively. The terminal
resistor is connected between CAN_H and CAN_L.

 Modules Setting
Prepare two AS PLCs and two AS01DNET-A modules for constructing one DeviceNet network. The setups for two
AS01DNET-A modules are shown in the follwing table.

DeviceNet network module Node address Baud rate

AS01DNET-A (Master) 0 500kbps

AS01DNET-A (Slave) 1 500kbps

10

10-20
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

10.4.7.2. Using DeviceNet Builder to Configure a DeviceNet Network

 Configuring DeviceNet slave

1. Set the driver for the connection of AS PLC and PC. Clicking Add, the Driver Properties dialog box appears.
Select the connection type for AS PLC and PC in the Type field. In this example, select Ethernet as the
connection type. Click Search to search the PLC and then click OK after searching is finished.

10

10-21
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

2. Opening the DeviceNet Builder software, the following window appears.

10

10-22
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

3. Selecting Setup>> Communication Setting, the following dialog box appears. Select the driver for
connection of AS PLC and PC as below. Click OK to finish the selection of Driver.

4. Click Network >> Online to scan the connected master.

5. Click Network>> Scan DeviceNet Network.

10

10-23
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

6. After scanning is finished, all node icons and device names which have been scanned in the network will
appear on the following interface. The node address of AS01DNET-A is 00 in this example.

7. Double click the icon of AS01DNET Slave. Then the Node Configuration… dialogue box appears. Input Size
and Output Size are both set to 8 bytes. Click OK to finish the setting.

10

10-24
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

8. Right click the icon of AS01DNET Slave and click Parameter Edit… on the drop-down menu. The Parameters
Edit… dialog box appears and Polled Input Length and Polled Output Length are both set to 8 bytes as
shown in the following red box. Then click Write button. Click OK after writing is finished. Afterwards, repower
AS01DNETSlave.

10

10-25
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

 Configuring AS01DNET-A

1. Double click the icon of AS01DNET Scanner (node 0). The Scanner Module Configuration… dialog box
appears. The left list shows the current available node AS01DNET Slave and the right Scan List is empty as
below.

10

10-26
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

2. Move the DeviceNet slaves from the left list to Scan List of the right side. Follows the steps: Select one
DeviceNet slave node and then click > . Then the DeviceNet slave nodes are moved to the Scan List one
by one.

3. Click OK to finish the configuration above. Then download the configuration data to AS01DNET-A. During
the download, the Warning dialog box will pop out if AS PLC is in RUN mode. Click OK to continue the
download.

10

10-27
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

 Configure the DeviceNet network by following the steps above. The IO data mappings between
AS01DNET-A and the slave are shown in the following tables.

 AS01DNET-A → Slave

AS PLC AS01DNET(Master) AS01DNET(Slave) AS PLC

D26105 D26000
D26106 D26001
D26107 D26002
D26108 D26003

 Slave → AS01DNET-A

AS PLC AS01DNET(Master) AS01DNET(Slave) AS PLC

D26005 D26100
D26006 D26101
D26007 D26102
D26008 D26103

 Saving configuration data

Select File>> Save to save current network configuration.

10.4.7.3. DeviceNet Network Control

This section describes how to write a ladder program to achieve the control requirement of the DeviceNet network.

 PLC Programs

 The program in the PLC connecting AS01DNET slave:

Program Explanation:

The contents in D26000~D26003 are the data received from the master and the contents in D26100~D26103
are the data transmitted to the master. SM400 is a normally open contact. The program above can make the
contents in D26000~D26003 move to D26100~D26103.

 The program in the PLC connecting AS01DNET master:

10

10-28
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

Program Explanation:

1. When M0 changes to ON, the value 16#5555 is written to D26105~D26108 in AS PLC. The data are
transmitted to the slave cyclically via DeviceNet Bus.

2. The contents in D26005~D26008 are the data which the master receives from the slave via DeviceNet
Bus. When M1 changes to ON, the data in D26005~D26008 are moved to D0, D1, D2 and D3.

10.4.8 Sending Explicit Message through Ladder Diagram

AS01DNET-A supports the sending of explicit messages via DNETRW instruction.

10.4.8.1. Principle of Explicit Message Transmission

1. AS PLC transmits the explicit request message to AS01DNET-A master according to the user program.
2. AS01DNET-A transmits the explicit request message to the slave according to the user program.
3. The slave sends back the response message to AS01DNET-A master after handling data.
4. AS PLC gets back the response message from AS01DNET-A master. Then the explicit message transmission of this
time is finished.

10

10-29
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

10.4.8.2. Explicit Message Transmission Instruction DNETRW

 DNETRW instruction:

API Instruction code Operand Function

S1，S2，S3，S4，S5，S6，S7，S8，S9， Read and write DeviceNet

1818 DNETRW
S10，D1，D2，D3，D4，D5 communication data

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1    
S2    
S3    
S4    
S5    
S6    
S7    
S8 
S9    
S10    
D1   
D2   
D3 
D4 
D5 
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
INT

Data type

S1   
S2   
S3   
S4   
S5   
S6   
S7   
S8   
S9   
S10   
D1 
D2 
D3   
D4   
D5   

10 Pulse Instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ AS AS

10-30
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

 Symbol:
DNETRW
S1 D1
S2 D2
S3 D3
S4 D4
S5 D5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S 10

S1 The sequence number of the DeviceNet communication module

S2 DeviceNet node address (MAC ID)

S3 Service Code

S4 Class ID

S5 Instance ID

S6 Attribute ID

S7 Written-data size

S8 The start device where written data are stored

S9 Communication timeout time

S10 Times of re-transmission

D1 Completion flag

D2 Error flag

D3 Error code

D4 Read-data size

D5 The start device where read data are stored

 Explanation:

 S1 is the sequence number of the module on the right of the PLC. The number of the first module is 1; the
second module is 2 and so on. Any type of module need be numbered within the range of 1~32. If the number
is out of the range, the instruction will take the minimum (1) or maximum (32) for operation.

 S2 is a DeviceNet node address within the range of 0~63. Users can specify the node address of a slave
which the master is to read and write. It also can be the node address of the master, which means to read and
write the data in the master.
10

10-31
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

 S3 is DeviceNet service code:

Service code Explanation

0x01 Get all attributes (Get_Attribute_All)
0x02 Set all attributes (Set_Attribute_All)
0x0E Get one single attribute (Get_Attribute_Single)
0x10 Set one single attribute (Set_Attribute_Single)
 S4, S5 and S6 represent Class ID, Instance ID and Attribute ID respectively.

 S7 is the written-data size with the unit: Byte.

 S8 is the start device where written data are stored. The data are arranged in the order from low byte to high
byte.

 S9 is the communication timeout time within the range: 1~100 and with the unit: 0.1 second.

 S10 is the times of re-transmission within the range: 0~3. When communication timeout occurs, the
communication will be resent

 D3 represents the error codes to read and write.

Error Code
Explanation
Code 1 (High Byte) Code 2 (Low Byte)
XX FF Not conform to the DeviceNet standard
20 01 The target slave does not exist.
20 02 Unable to make the connection with the slave
20 03 Sending explicit message failed.
16 00 Explicit message response timeout.
 D4 is the read-data size with the unit: Byte.

 D5 is the start device where read data are stored. The data are arranged in the order from low byte to high
byte.

 D1 and D2 are communication completion flag and error flag respectively.

 Application Example 1

Control requirement: when M0=ON, read the data of class1>>instance1>>attribute1 of the DeviceNet function
card CMC-DN01.

 Connection Figure

POWER
01DNET
RUN MS

ERROR
BAT. LOW NS

COM1
COM2 40
AS324MT IN 0
x10

IN 1 Node Address

0 8 x10
1 9
2 10
3 11
IN
4
5
6
DeviceNet
7

0 8
1 9
Ethernet
2 10
3 11
OUT
4 2 1
5
6
7
RTU Master/ Slave

10

10-32
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

 Parameters Setting and Device Explanation

 Setup for AS01DNET-A

Parameter Setting value Description

Node ID 00 Set the node ID of AS01DNET-A to 00.
Baud rate 500 kbps Set the baud rate of AS01DNET-A to 500 kbps.

 Setup for VFD-C2000

Parameter Setting value Description

00-20 08 Frequency command source
00-21 05 Operation command source
09-30 0 Communication decoding method
09-70 01 Node ID of AC motor drive
09-71 02 Baud rate: 500Kbps

 PLC Program

 S1: The number of the module sending DeviceNet communication. The first one of the right side is 01.

 S2：DeviceNet node ID (MAC ID); Node ID of VFD-C2000: 01.

 S3：Service code; 0X0E: read one single attribute content.

 S4：Class ID; Class ID of CMC-DN01: 01;

 S5：Instance ID; Instance ID of CMC-DN01: 01;

 S6：Attribute ID; Attribute ID of CMC-DN01: 01；

 S7：Write data size. When DNETRW instruction is used to read data, the value in S7 can be set to any
data.

 S8：The start device where the written data are stored. When DNETRW instruction is used to read data,
the value in S8 can be set to any data.

 S9：Communication timeout time

 S10：Times of re-transmission. Times of re-sending communication when communication timeout occurs. 10

 D1：Completion flag

10-33
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

 D2：Error flag

 D3：Error code

 D4：Read data size

 D5：The start device where data are read.

 Program Explanation

 When M0 changes to ON, execute the explicit message instruction DNETRW to read Class 1 >> Instance
1 >> Attribute 1 of the target equipment with node ID: 01. If the explicit message communication succeeds,
the completion flag M1 changes to ON.

 When M0 changes to ON, AS01DNET-A sends out the request message only once. If the request
message is to be resent, the instruction DNETRW need be re-triggered.

 If the data reading succeeds, the content of Class 1>> Instance1 >> Attribute 1 of CMC-DN01 will be
stored in D5. In this example, the content in D5 should be 031FHex.

 Application Example 2

Control requirement: When M1 changes to ON, set the content of Class ID: 0x05>> Instance 1>>Attribute ID:
09 of CMC-DN01 to 000AHex.

 Connection figure

POWER
01DNET
RUN MS

ERROR
BAT. LOW NS

COM1
COM2 40
AS324MT IN 0
x10

IN 1 Node Address

0 8 x10
1 9
2 10
3 11
IN
4
5
6
DeviceNet
7

0 8
1 9
Ethernet
2 10
3 11
OUT
4 2 1
5
6
7
RTU Master/ Slave

 Parameters Setting and Device Explanation

 Setup for AS01DNET-A

Parameter Setting value Description

Node ID 00 Set the node ID of AS01DNET-A to 00.
Baud rate 500 kbps Set the baud rate of AS01DNET-A to 500 kbps.

 Setup for VFD-C2000

Parameter Setting value Description

00-20 08 Frequency command source
00-21 05 Operation command source
09-30 0 Communication decoding method
10 09-70 01 Node ID of AC motor drive
09-71 02 Baud rate: 500Kbps

10-34
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

 PLC Program

 S1：The number of the module sending DeviceNet communication. The first one of the right side is 01.

 S2：DeviceNet node ID (MAC ID); Node ID of VFD-C2000: 00.

 S3：Service code; 0X10: read one single attribute content.

 S4：Class ID; Class ID of CMC-DN01: 05.

 S5：Instance ID; Instance ID of CMC-DN01: 01.

 S6：Attribute ID; Attribute ID of CMC-DN01: 09.

 S7：Write data size with the unit: Byte. The written-data size is 2 in this example.

 S8：The start device where the written data are stored.

 S9：Communication timeout time.

 S10：Times of re-transmission. Times of re-sending communication when communication timeout occurs.

 D1：Completion flag.

 D2：Error flag.

 D3：Error code.

 D4：Read data size. When DNETRW instruction is used to write data, the value in D4 can be set to any
data.

 D5：The start device where read data are stored. When DNETRW instruction is used to write data, the
value in D5 can be set to any data.

10

10-35
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

 Program Explanation

 When M0 changes to ON, AS01DNET-A sends the request message and 000AHex is written to Class
ID: 05>> Instance 1 >> Attribute ID: 09 of the target equipment with node ID: 01. If explicit message
communication succeeds, the completion flag M1 changes to ON.

 When M0 changes to ON, AS01DNET-A sends out the request message only once. If the request
message is to be resent, the instruction DNETRW need be re-triggered.

10.4.9 LED Indicators and Troubleshooting

AS01DNET-A has two LED indicators and one digital displayer. NS LED and MS LED display the connection status of
AS01DNET-A. The digital displayer shows the node address and error information of AS01DNET-A as well as error
information of the slave.

01DNET
MS

NS

10.4.9.1. NS LED

LED status Indication Correction

1. Check if AS01DNET-A is powered and the connection
No power;
is normal.
OFF Or duplicate ID check has not been
2. Make sure that at least one node can communicate
completed.
normally.
Green light
blinking
The connection to the DeviceNet No correction;
(ON:0.5s and
network failed. Refer to Digital Displayer for troubleshooting.
OFF: 0.5s
alternately)
Online;
Green light ON The connection to the DeviceNet No correction
network is normal.
Red light
blinking
(ON:0.5s and Communication error Refer to Digital Displayer for troubleshooting.
OFF: 0.5s
alternately)
1. Make sure that all the devices in the network have
their unique node addresses.
Network trouble, duplicate node ID, no 2. Check if the network installation is correct.
Red light ON
network power or Bus-OFF. 3. Check if the baud rates of the master and slave are
same.
4. Check if the network power is normal.

10

10-36
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

10.4.9.2. MS LED

LED status Indication Correction

Make sure that the power supply for AS01DNET-A is
OFF No power
normal and the connection is proper.
Green light
blinking
Configure the scan list and then download the
(ON:0.5s and No module is configured.
configuration to AS01DNET.
OFF: 0.5s
alternately)
Green light ON Input and output data are normal. --
Red light When AS01DNET works as the
blinking master, the slave in Scan List can not Refer to Digital Displayer.
(ON:0.5s and work normally. Make sure that the slave information in Scan List
OFF: 0.5s When AS01DNET works as the slave, matches that of the actually connected slave.
alternately) an error occurs in the configuration.
1. Check if the configuration is correct.
Red light ON An error inside AS01DNET 2. Return the module to factory for repair if the error still
exists after repower ON.

10.4.9.3. Combination of MS LED and NS LED

LED status
Indication Correction
NS LED MS LED
OFF OFF No power Check if the power supply for AS01DNET-A is normal.
Make sure that the baud rate of at least one node in the
Green light Duplicate ID check has
OFF network is the same as that of the module and their
ON not been completed.
communication is normal.
Green light Duplicate ID check failed 1. Ensure that the node ID of AS01DNET is unique.
Red light ON
ON or Bus-OFF. 2. Repower the module.
Red light
blinking
1. Check if the network cable connection is proper.
Red light ON (ON:0.5s and No network power
2. Check if the network power supply is normal.
OFF: 0.5s
alternately)
Red light ON Red light ON Hardware error Return the module to the factory for repair.

10.4.9.4. Digital Displayer

Code Explanation Correction

Node address of AS01DNET-A
0~63 --
(in normal operation)
80 AS01DNET-A is in STOP status. Turn the PLC to RUN and start I/O data exchange
The node ID of AS01DNET is the
1. Ensure that the node address of AS01DNET is unique.
F0 same as that of other node or
2. Re-power AS01DNET.
exceeds the allowed range.
No slave is configured in Scan Configure the scan list and then download the configuration to
F1
List. AS01DNET.
Too low voltage of the work
F2 Check if the power supply for AS01DNET and the PLC is normal.
power 10
Switch the function switch IN1 from On to Off and re-power
F3 AS01DNET enters the test mode
AS01DNET-A.

10-37
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

Code Explanation Correction

1. Check if the network cable is normal and the shielded cable is
grounded.
2. Check if the baud rates of all nodes in the network are same.
F4 BUS-OFF
3. Check if the start and end of the network cable are both connected
with a 121Ω terminal resistor.
4. Re-power AS01DNET-A.
1. Check if the network cable is normal.
F5 No network power
2. Ensure that the network power is normal.
Internal error; Flash or RAM If the error still exists after re-power, send AS01DNET-A back to the
F6
check error factory for repair.
Error produced in factory If the error still exists after re-power, send AS01DNET-A back to the
F8
manufacturing factory for repair.
Internal error; EEPROM access If the error still exists after re-power, send AS01DNET-A back to the
F9
failure factory for repair.
1. Configure the network correctly and re-download it to AS01DNET-
A.
FA Invalid configuration data
2. Check if the node address of one slave in the scan list is the same
as that of AS01DNET-A.
1. Check if there is any change in node ID of the slave in the
Identification parameters returned
network.
E0 from the slave do not match the
2. Check if some node device in the network is replaced.
configuration data.
3. Re-configure the network.
I/O Data size returned does not Re-configure I/O data size of the slave, download the configuration to
E1
match that in the scan list. AS01DNET-A and run the PLC.
The slave device in the scan list
does not exist or is offline when 1. Check if there is a change in the node address of the slave.
AS01DNET-A is in master mode. 2. Check if the communication cable is disconnected or connected
E2 The I/O connection between the loosely.
slave AS01DNET-A and the 3. Check if the bus cable length exceeds the maximum transmission
master is broken when distance. If so, the system may not be stable.
AS01DNET-A is in slave mode.
1. Make sure that the connection between AS01DNET-A and the
AS01DNET-A fails to transmit network is normal.
E3
data. 2. Check if the baud rate of AS01DNET-A is the same as that of
other node in the network.
Error detected in sequence of
E4 fragmented I/O data from the Check if the slave is operating normally.
slave device.
The slave device returns error
E5 when AS01DNET-A attempts to Check if the slave is operating normally.
communicate with it.
IO data size returned from the
Check that the IO data size of the slave should be the same as that
E6 slave is bigger than that
configured in Scan List.
configured in Scan List.
If the code is displayed long, do the troubleshooting according to the
following steps.
AS01DNET-A is checking MAC 1. Make sure that at least two nodes work normally in the network.
E7
10
ID. 2. Check if either end of the network is connected with the terminal
resistor of 121Ω.
3. Check if the baud rates of the node devices in the network are

10-38
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

Code Explanation Correction

same.
4. Check if the communication cable is normal so as to avoid that
the cable is disconnected or connected loosely.
5. Check if the bus cable length exceeds the maximum transmission
distance. If so, the system may not be stable.
6. Check if the shielded wire of the network cable is grounded.
7. Re-power AS01DNET-A scanner module.

10.4.10 Master-Slave Mode Switch and 8 Baud Rates Setting via

Software
AS01DNET-A can serve as a DeviceNet master or slave by modifying its mode. When the AS01DNET-A module works as
a slave, the input and output data sizes are both 8 Bytes by default. The maximum input and output data sizes are both
200 Bytes.

Under standard mode, AS01DNET-A supports three baud rates: 125K, 250K and 500K. Under non-standard mode,
AS01DNET-A supports eight baud rates: 10K, 20K, 50K, 125K, 250K, 500K, 800K and1M.

10.4.10.1. Setting AS01DNET-A to Slave Mode

1. Build a driver through the COMMGR software.

Refer to Section 2.4 Communication Setting in the ISPSoft software for details.

2. Call the DeviceNet Builder software through the ISPSoft software.

Refer to section 10.6 in this manual for details on how to operate.

3. The called DeviceNet Builder software interface is shown as below.

10

10-39
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

4. Selecting Setup>> Communication Setting, the following dialog box appears. Select the driver for connection of
AS PLC and PC as below. Click OK to finish the selection of Driver.

5. Click Network >> Online to scan the connected master.

6. Click Project List>>Properties. Then the Properties dialog box appears. Select Slave mode and then click OK.

10

10-40
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

7. Click Network >> Download. If the PLC is in STOP state, the following dialog box will exist during the download.
The dialog box will disappear automatically after the download is finished. AS01DNET-A will be in slave mode after
repower ON.

8. If the PLC is in RUN state, the Warning dialog boxes will pop out before and after the download. Users can click
OK or Cancel according to actual situation.

10

10-41
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

10.4.10.2. Setting AS01DNET-A to Master Mode

1. Build a driver through the COMMGR software.

Refer to Section 2.4 Communication Setting in the ISPSoft software for details.

2. Call the DeviceNet Builder software through the ISPSoft software.

Refer to section 10.6 in this manual for details on how to operate.

3. The called DeviceNet Builder software interface is shown as below.

4. Selecting Setup>> Communication Setting, the following dialog box appears. Select the driver for connection of
AS PLC and PC as below. Click OK to finish the selection of Driver.

10

10-42
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

5. Click Network >> Online to scan the connected slave.

6. Click Project List>>Properties as below. Then the Properties dialog box appears. Select Master mode and
then click OK.

10

10-43
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

7. Click Network >> Download. If the PLC is in STOP state, the following dialog box will exist during the download.
The dialog box will disappear automatically after the download is finished. AS01DNET-A will be in master mode
after repower ON.

8. If the PLC is in RUN state, the Warning dialog boxes will pop out before and after the download. Users can click
OK or Cancel according to actual situation.

10

10-44
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

10.4.10.3. Baud Rate Setting of When AS01DNET-A is in Slave Mode

1. Opening the DeviceNet Builder software, the following window appears.

2. Selecting Setup>> Communication Setting, the following dialog box appears. Select the driver for connection of
AS PLC and PC as below. Click OK to finish the selection of Driver.

10

10-45
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

3. Click Network >> Online to scan the connected master.

4. Clicking Network>> Scan DeviceNet Network, the DeviceNet Builder software starts to scan the whole network.

5. After scanning is finished, all node icons and device names which have been scanned in the network will appear
on the following interface. The node address of AS01DNET-A is 01 in this example.

10

10-46
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

6. Right-click AS01DNET(Slave), select Parameter Edit… on the drop-down menu to enter the Parameter Edit
page.

7. Set Extend Baudrate Enable to Enable and then select the desired baud rate. Click Write button after setting is
finished.

8. After the download is completed, switch DR0 and DR1 of AS01DNET to ON. Finally, repower AS01DNET-A.
10

10-47
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

10.4.10.4. Baud Rate Setting of When AS01DNET-A is in Master Mode

1. Opening the DeviceNet Builder software, the following window appears.

2. Selecting Setup>> Communication Setting, the following dialog box appears. Select the driver for connection of
AS PLC and PC as below. Click OK to finish the selection of Driver.

10

10-48
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

3. Click Network >> Online to scan the connected master.

4. Clicking Network>> Scan DeviceNet Network, the DeviceNet Builder software starts to scan the whole network.

5. After scanning is finished, all node icons and device names which have been scanned in the network will appear
on the following interface. The node address of AS01DNET-A is 00 in this example.

10

10-49
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

6. Click Network >> Scanner Setting. The Scanner Setting dialog box appears. Select Enable under Extension
Baudrate and the desired baud rate as below. Click OK after the setting is finished.

7. Click Network >> Download to download the extension baud rate setting to the master. After the download is
completed, switch DR0 and DR1 of AS01DNET-A to ON. Finally, repower AS01DNET-A.

10

10-50
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

10.5 RTU Mode

10.5.1 Introduction of AS01DNET (in RTU Mode)
 As DeviceNet slave, AS01DNET-A supports standard DeviceNet communication protocol.

 Supports explicit connection in the predefined master/slave connection and I/O polling connection.

 The network configuration software DeviceNet Builder provides graphic configuration interface, and supports
auto scan and recognition of I/O modules, free mapping of special module parameters as I/O exchange data
as well as the setting of exception handling and diagnosis of module error states.

 Users can choose to retain the data in registers or not when the network is disconnected according to actual
need.

 AS01DNET (in RTU mode) can connect max. 8 AS-series extension modules including digital modules, analog
modules, temperature modules and etc. The mapping length of digital modules is determined by number of
digital points. The max. length of mapping parameters for input of other module is 20 words and the max.
length of mapping parameters for output of other module is 20 words.

 Max lengths for output data and input data of AS01DNET (in RTU mode) are both 100 bytes.

 AS01DNET (in RTU mode) needs the external 24VDC power supply.

10

10-51
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

10.5.2 AS-Series Extension Modules Connectable to AS01DNET (RTU)

The model and specification of AS-series digital modules connectable to AS01DNET (in RTU mode):

Length of I/O mapping data (Unit: words)

Digital I/O module
model （Master→AS01DNET） （AS01DNET→Master）

AS08AM10N-A None 1
AS16AM10N-A None 1
AS32AM10N-A None 2
AS64AM10N-A None 4

AS08AN01T-A 1 None

AS08AN01R-A 1 None

AS08AN01P-A 1 None

AS16AN01T-A 1 None

AS16AN01R-A 1 None

AS16AN01P-A 1 None

AS32AN02T-A 2 None

AS64AN02T-A 4 None

AS16AP11T-A 1 1
AS16AP11R-A 1 1
AS16AP11P-A 1 1

The model and specification of AS-series special modules connectable to AS01DNET (in RTU mode):

Length of I/O mapping data (Unit: words)

Special module model
DeviceNet→AS01DNET(RTU) AS01DNET(RTU)→DeviceNet

AS04AD-A 6 None
AS04DA-A 2 4
AS06XA-A 10 4
AS02LC-A 7 1
AS04RTD-A 10 None
AS06RTD-A 14 None
AS04TC-A 10 None

AS08TC-A 18 None

AS08AD-B 18 None
AS08AD-C 18 None
Note:
The length of mapping data of the I/O modules connected to AS01DNET (in RTU mode) is fixed. The default mapping
parameters of special modules must be chosen.
Besides default mapping parameter configuration, you can also choose other parameters for I/O mapping according to
10 need when special modules are connected to AS01DNET (RTU). The max. input length and max. output length of
default parameters and user-added mapping parameters of each special module are both 20 words.

10-52
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

10.5.3 Installation
10.5.3.1. Installing AS01DNET (in RTU Mode)
10.5.3.1.1. Connecting AS01DNET-A (in RTU Mode) and Extension Module on DIN Rail

 Please push the clips of AS01DNET-A (RTU) in the directions indicated by arrow ① until hearing a click. That
means the DIN clips are interlocked each other. Then insert the module hooks at the bottom into the DIN rail
mounting slot until hearing a click. That means AS01DNET-A (RTU) is connected to the DIN rail.

 To install the second module AS16AP11T, push the clips of AS16AP11T in the direction indicated by arrow ①.
Then aim the left-side slot of AS16AP11T at the right-side slot of AS01DNET-A (RTU) and push AS16AP11T in
the direction as illustrated by arrow ② until hearing a click. That means the module is on the DIN rail and is
connected to AS01DNET-A (RTU). In the same way, install more IO modules on the right side of AS01DNET-A
(RTU) and DIN rail one by one.

DI N ra il clip
1 2

01DNET
MS

NS

x101
IN 0
IN 1 Node Address
0
x10

RTU Mas te r/ Sl a ve

1 DIN rail clip

 Tighten the screws on the top of the module at the end of installing.

10

10-53
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

10.5.3.1.2. Connecting the DeviceNet Communication Connector

 The color marks on the communication connector match the colors of the connection cables. During the wiring,
please check whether the colors of the connection cable and the color mark are same.

 Delta’s power module is recommended as the power module in the communication.

10.5.3.2. Connecting the Cable to DeviceNet Connector

 Use an efficient tool to peel the communication

cable for approx. 30mm. DO NOT damage the
shielded cable during the peeling.

 Peel off the metallic shielded net and foil, and you
will see 2 power cables (red and black), 2 signal
cables (blue and white) and 1 shielded cable.

 Peel off the exterior metallic shielded net, foil and

the plastic cover of the power cable and signal
cable for appropriate length.

10

10-54
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

 Insert the peeled communication cables into the

holes in the connector in correct order.

 Tighten the screws on the connector by a slotted

screwdriver and fix the communication cables in the
holes in the connector.

10.5.4 Configuring AS01DNET (in RTU mode)

As DeviceNet slave, AS01DNET (RTU) mainly achieves the data exchange between the master and AS-series I/O modules
connected to AS01DNET.

 Transmits output data of DeviceNet master to I/O modules.

 Transmits input data from I/O modules to DeviceNet master.

10.5.4.1. Terms

No. Name Unit Description

The first WORD for output data that the master assigns to AS01DNET is
the control word of AS01DNET for setting the work mode of AS01DNET.
1 Control word WORD When the content in the control word is set to 2, AS01DNET is in STOP
mode. When the content in the control word is set to 1, AS01DNET is in
RUN mode.

The first WORD for input data that the master assigns to AS01DNET is
the status word of AS01DNET for displaying the operation state of
2 Status word WORD
AS01DNET.
Refer to 10.5.4.3.4 for more about status word.

Range of input data Determined by start input address and input mapping parameter length
5 WORD
in modules of each module.

Range of output data Determined by start output address and output mapping parameter
6 WORD
in modules length of each module.
The sum of the size of status word of AS01DNET and the size of input
data of the modules connected to it. The status word occupies one word.
Digital input module takes 16 bits as one word. The input data length of
7 Input data size WORD
analog I/O modules and temperature modules are determined by the
default mapping parameter length and user-added parameter length, no
more than 20 words.

8 Output data size WORD

The sum of the size of control word of AS01DNET and the size of output
10
data of the modules connected to it. The control word occupies one word.
Digital output module takes 16 bits as one word. The output data length

10-55
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

No. Name Unit Description

of analog I/O modules and temperature modules are determined by the
default mapping parameter length and user-added parameter length
together, no more than 20 words.

10.5.4.2. Introduction of Software

Before the new version of DeviceNet Builder software is used for making a connection with PLC, make sure that the
communication manager COMMGR has been installed.

(Refer to ISPSoft user manual for details on COMMGR usage.)

10.5.4.2.1. Making a connection between DeviceNet Builder and PLC

Before making a normal connection between DeviceNet Builder and PLC, you have to do relevant setup for COMMGR
software.

1. Build a driver through the COMMGR software.

Refer to Section 2.4 Communication Setting in ISPSoft help file.

2. Call DeviceNet Builder via ISPSoft

Refer to section 10.6 for details on how to operate.

3. The called DeviceNet Builder is started as below.

10

10-56
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

4. Click menu Network>> Online.

5. The master module AS01DNET-A which has been scanned is shown in the left-side Project List.

10

10-57
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

6. Click Network >> Scan DeviceNet Network.

7. After online is implemented, click the Scan DeviceNet Network button to start scanning the nodes in the network.

10

10-58
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

10.5.4.2.2. Main Configuration Page of AS01DNET (RTU)

1. After scanning is finished, double click the AS01DNET (RTU) node in the network. Then the Node Configuration…
window comes out. The polled transmission is supported with default input data size of 2 bytes and output data size of
2 bytes which are mapping address lengths of control word and status word of AS01DNET (RTU) respectively.

Input Size and Output Size under Polled Setting mean the lengths of AS01DNET (RTU) parameters which are
mapped in the master.

10

10-59
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

2. Click the I/O Configure… button in the Node Configuration… window. Then the main configuration page appears
as below.

Explanation of parameters on the AS01DNET (RTU) configuration page

Item Description
All I/O modules currently connected to the right side of AS01DNET (RTU) are scanned. The
Scan existing modules in the software will be compared with the actually connected I/O module. The
mismatched one will be displayed in an abnormal icon.
Upload and show the configuration data including I/O list, I/O configuration, parameter mapping
Upload
and basic control information in AS01DNET (RTU) in the software.
Download current AS01DNET (RTU) configuration including I/O list, I/O configuration, parameter
Download mapping and basic control information to AS01DNET (RTU), which is retained when the power is
turned off.
Reset Make the connected AS01DNET (RTU) restart.
10
Clear the configuration data stored in the latched area and automatically reset the configuration.
Clear config
Then the indicator displays F1.

10-60
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

Item Description
Watch and set in real time the configured exchange data in current system; change output data,
Start
watch input data and use control word to control the operation state of AS01DNET (RTU) in real
Monitor
time.
Name Name of each module
Firmware version of each module. Choosing corresponding version of firmware, download the
Firmware
module parameter information which matches the firmware version.
Description The description of basic information of each module.
The mapping range of input data of each module, determined by start address offset of mapping
Input
input data and the size.
The mapping range of output data of each module, determined by start address offset of mapping
Output
output data and the size.
Comment Add a comment for each I/O modules
The current configuration data will not be saved until you click the OK button to finish the
OK
configuration.
Clicking the Cancel button to exit AS01DNET (RTU) configuration page, current configuration data
Cancel
will not be saved.

3. Clicking the Scan button on the page, the main AS01DNET (RTU) configuration page changes as below.

10

10-61
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

After the I/O modules connected to AS01DNET (RTU) are scanned, abnormal icons may appear.

Here is the list of abnormal icons.

The I/O module configured in the software does not match the current I/O module
actually connected, e.g. the software configuration is AS32AM, but the actually
connected module is AS16AP. So the abnormal icon such as left-side icon will appear
after the scan. You can change it into current configuration icon with double clicks on it.

The I/O module in the software configuration does not exist in the actual connection,
e.g. the software configuration is AS32AM, but it has not been connected actually. So
the abnormal icon such as left-side icon will appear after the scan. You can change it
into current configuration icon with double clicks on it.

AS01DNET (RTU) scans an unknown module. Right click current icon to select Change
from the menu which appears to change it into a module icon which can be recognized
for configuration.

10.5.4.2.3. AS01DNET (RTU) Parameters Setup Page

After I/O modules are scanned, the main configuration interface changes as follows.

10

10-62
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

Double click AS01DNET (RTU) icon on the far left of the configuration page. Then the parameter setting interface of
AS01DNET (RTU) comes out for setting the error handling method as follows.

Explanation of AS01DNET (RTU) parameter setup:

Item Description Default

Output start
The start output address of AS01DNET (RTU), occupying one word. None
address
Input start
The start input address of AS01DNET (RTU), occupying one word. None
address
When loses AS01DNET (RTU)’s error handling method when AS01DNET (RTU) and RTU
DeviceNet DeviceNet master are disconnected. “RTU keep running” and “RTU stop” are keep
connection for option. running
AS01DNET (RTU)’s error handling method when an error occurs in any one
RTU
When IO module of I/O modules connected to the right side of AS01DNET (RTU). “RTU keep
keep
error or no reply running” and “RTU stop” are for option.
running

Chooses the extension baud rate of AS01DNET (RTU) after ticking the
checkbox of it. The selected baud rate is stored in AS01DNET (RTU) after the
Software baud
download and it will not take effect until the hardware switch of AS01DNET None
rate
(RTU): DR1 and DR0 are both ON.
Refer to section 10.2.6 for details on function switch.
Firmware version Displays the firmware version of AS01DNET (RTU). None

10

10-63
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

10.5.4.2.4. I/O Module Configuration Page

The mapping parameters of each module can be set through double clicks on the selected I/O module icon on the
following interface.

10

10-64
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

Double click the 08AD icon. Then the AS08AD-C configuration interface appears as below for configuration of parameter
mapping of AS08AD-C module.

Explanation of I/O module configuration interface:

Item Description
Displays module name, MDS version and creation date. The module parameters will be shown
MDS information in the left-side window based on the MDS file. For explanation of module parameters, refer to the
relevant module manual.
Displays all module parameters read from the MDS file of the module. Set up these parameters
I/O parameter list
to control the operation of the module.
Exception The error handling of AS01DNET (RTU) when AS01DNET (RTU) detects that an error occurs in
handling the module. “RTU keep running” or “RTU stop” can be selected as the solution to the error.

10

10-65
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

Generally, the settings for I/O module parameters and device mappings can be made in the following three cases.

Case 1: Select one appropriate parameter value from the drop-down list in the Initial column, e.g. select -20Ma~+20mA
as channel 1 input mode of AS08AD-C.

Case 2: Manually enter the value for the parameter to change in the Initial column, e.g. write 100 for CH1 Cal.Offset of
AS08AD-C).

10

10-66
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

Case 3: For the module parameter which need be monitored in real time or need be modified in its value, tick the desired
parameter in the Mapping to Device column and then the corresponding value of the parameter will map to the
bus data for exchange i.e. the D registers in PLC. After the values of the ticked parameters in the Mapping to
Device column go to the software monitor page, the current values of parameters can be monitored and
modified in real time.

 Explanation of IO module parameters

Double click the icon of AS08AD-C module. Then the Module Configuration: AS08AD-C dialog box comes out as
below.

10

10-67
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

MDS information of AS08AD-C

Present value setting

10

10-68
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

Format setting (Integer format and Float format for option)

CH1~CH8 Mode setting【8】

10

10-69
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

CH1~CH8 Calibration【16】

Average filter setting【16】

10

10-70
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

Sampling time

Channel Detect and Alarm settings

10

10-71
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

10.5.4.2.5. Monitor Function of the Software

When the software is in online mode and current configuration in AS01DNET (RTU) is the same as that stored in the
software, click the Start Monitor button to enter the monitor interface and start to monitor the operation states of
AS01DNET (RTU) and I/O modules in real time.

10

10-72
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

The list of operation state of modules:

Indicates that the module is in the normal operation.

Indicates that the module is in the Stop state.

Indicates that the module is in the warning or error state. For details on errors, refer to
explanation of error codes in the related product manual.

Indicates that the actually connected module does not match the module configured in the
software or currently configured module has been disconnected.

On the following interface, right click the selected module icon and select RUN or Stop from the drop-down box to
change the operation state of the I/O module.

10

10-73
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

10.5.4.3. DeviceNet Mapping Data

The model of the entire mapping data exchange is displayed below and eventually data will map to the registers in the
PLC of the master.

PLC AS 01DNET Dev ic eNET AS0 1DNE T IO modules

(RTU)

Note: All mapping addresses mentioned below means the D registers in the PLC.

The start input address and start output address of AS01DNET (RTU) are assigned automatically by the master when
AS01DNET (RTU) is added to the master. The input mapping address length and output mapping address length of
AS01DNET (RTU) are determined by the configuration of modules connected to AS01DNET (RTU).

The start input and output mapping addresses of one I/O module are assigned automatically by the software. Its input
mapping address length and output mapping address length are determined by the configuration of the module. The range
of input / output mapping address is limited by the input / output mapping address range of AS01DNET (RTU).

10.5.4.3.1. The Rule for Assignment of Mapping Addresses by AS01DNET Master

10

10-74
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

Data mapping areas are assigned according to the following table.

Input area: Slave  Master Output area: Master  Slave

Register in AS PLC Purpose Data size Register in AS PLC Purpose Data size
Scan-list node
Bit-strobe
D26000~D26003 state indication 4 words D26100~D26103 4 words
command area
area
Scanner module
D26004 state indication 1 word D26104 Reserved 1 word
area
DeviceNet
DeviceNet input
output area; the
data area; for
data in the
D26005~D26099 receiving state 95words D26105~D26199 95 words
registers will be
data back from
sent to slaves
slaves
as control data.

10.5.4.3.2. The Rule for Assignment of Mapping Addresses for AS01DNET (RTU)

The start input and start output mapping addresses of AS01DNET (RTU) are assigned automatically by the master when
AS01DNET (RTU) is added to the master. The master assigns mapping addresses of AS01DNET (RTU) according to input
mapping address length and output mapping address length. Input mapping address length and output mapping address
length are determined by the configuration parameters of all modules connected to AS01DNET (RTU). The start addresses
of AS01DNET (RTU) will not be assigned until AS01DNET (RTU) is added to the master and they are related to the order
of adding slaves to the master.

When there are two slaves of AH10DNET and AS01DNET (RTU), the input size and output size of AH10DNET are both 4
bytes and the input size and output size of AS01DNET (RTU) are both 4 bytes. If AS01DNET (RTU) is added to the master
before AH10DNET is added to the master, then the input mapping addresses and output mapping addresses of AS01DNET
(RTU) are respectively D26005~D26006 and D26105~D26106 as below. D26005 and D26105 are respectively the start
input mapping address and start output mapping address, i.e. status word and control word of AS01DNET (RTU). The
registers after start input mapping address and start output mapping address are for mapping the configuration parameters
of I/O modules.

10

10-75
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

If AS01DNET (RTU) is added to the master after AH10DNET is added to the master, then the input mapping addresses
and output mapping addresses of AS01DNET (RTU) are respectively D26007~D26008 and D26107~D26108 as below.
D26007 and D26107 are respectively the start input mapping address and start output mapping address, i.e. status word
and control word of AS01DNET (RTU). The registers after start input mapping address and start output mapping address
are for mapping the configuration parameters of I/O modules.

10

10-76
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

10.5.4.3.3. The Rule for Assignment of Mapping Addresses for I/O Modules

Each module has two forms of data mapping. When DeviceNet master has not assigned the start input mapping address
and start output mapping address to AS01DNET (RTU), the contents in Input and Output in the following figure represent
offsets based on start input or start output mapping address of AS01DNET (RTU). After DeviceNet master has assigned
the start input mapping address and start output mapping address to AS01DNET (RTU), the contents in Input and Output
in the following figure represent mapping addresses of parameters in the modules on the right of AS01DNET (RTU).

When AS01DNET (RTU) is added to Scan List on the page of Scanner Module Configuration…, DeviceNet master
assigns start input and output mapping addresses to AS01DNET (RTU). When AS01DNET (RTU) is removed from Scan
List on the page of Scanner Module Configuration…, the start input and start output mapping addresses of AS01DNET
(RTU) are unknown.

Before the master assigns mapping addresses to AS01DNET (RTU), the device mappings of modules connected to the
right side of AS01DNET (RTU) are displayed as below.

10

10-77
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

After AS01DNET (RTU) is pulled into Scan List, the mapping addresses that the master assigns to AS01DNET (RTU) are
shown as below.

10

10-78
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

After the master assigns mapping addresses to AS01DNET (RTU), the mapping devices of the modules connected
to the right side of AS01DNET (RTU) are shown as below.

The software automatically assigns mapping addresses of module parameters in the arrangement order of modules
connected to the right side of AS01DNET (RTU) from left to right.

Below is the table of configuration of one master AS01DNET and one slave AS01DNET (RTU) and mapping addresses
that the software automatically assigns to each module. D26005 and D26105 are the control word and status word of
AS01DNET (RTU).The input mapping address and output mapping address of AS16AP are D26006 and D26106
respectively. The input mapping addresses and output mapping addresses of AS04DA are D26007~D26008 and
D26107~D26114 respectively. The input mapping addresses of AS04AD are D26009~D26018.
Auto Assignment Input Output
AS01DNET(RTU) D26005 status word D26105 control word

AS16AP D26006 D26106

AS04DA D26007~D26008 D26107~D26114

AS04AD D26009~D26018
10
The input and output mapping addresses of AS01DNET (RTU) are D26005~D26018 and D26105~D26114.

10-79
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

10.5.4.3.4. Status Word and Control Word of AS01DNET (RTU)

The start input address and start output address in the mapping areas of AS01DNET (RTU) are used as the status word
and control word of AS01DNET (RTU) respectively with the detailed explanation in the following table.

 Control word of AS01DNET(RTU)

Bit Status value Description
000 Make no control setting for the operation of AS01DNET(RTU)
bit0
001 Set AS01DNET(RTU) to RUN mode
~
010 Set AS01DNET(RTU) to STOP mode
bit2
Other Reserved
0 Reserved
bit3
1 Restart AS01DNET (RTU)
bit4 0/1 Reserved
bit5 0/1 Reserved
bit6 0/1 Reserved
bit7 0/1 Reserved
bit8 0/1 Reserved
bit9 0/1 Reserved
bit10 0/1 Reserved
bit11 0/1 Reserved
bit12 0/1 Reserved
bit13 0/1 Reserved
bit14 0/1 Reserved
bit15 0/1 Reserved

 Status word of AS01DNET(RTU)

Bit Status value Description
0 AS01DNET (RTU) in RUN state
bit0
1 AS01DNET (RTU) stops.
bit1 0/1 Reserved
0 No error occurs in I/O modules.
bit2
1 An error occurs in I/O modules.
bit3 0/1 Reserved
0 Current connection matches the configuration.
bit4
1 Current connection is inconsistent with the configuration.
0 AS01DNET (RTU) works normally.
bit5
1 The voltage of the power supply for AS01DNET (RTU) is too low.
bit6 0/1 Reserved
0 AS01DNET (RTU) works normally.
bit7
1 The number of points/ modules exceeds allowed range.
bit8 0/1 Reserved
bit9 0/1 Reserved
bit10 0/1 Reserved
10 bit11 0/1 Reserved
bit12 0/1 Reserved

10-80
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

Bit Status value Description

bit13 0/1 Reserved
bit14 0/1 Reserved
bit15 0/1 Reserved

10.5.4.4. Connecting AS01DNET (RTU) to the Network

To configure AS01DNET (RTU) successfully and make it work normally in the network, the following steps should be
taken for the setup.

Ha rdwa re Co n fig u rati on Co n fig u rati on Mo ni tor & C he ck

Wiri ng On li n e Scan
Settin g Do wn lo ad

 Hardware wiring

During hardware wiring, notice that the standard cable should be used and two terminal resistors of 121Ω should be
connected respectively to the two ends of the main line in the DeviceNet network. The node IDs of all nodes in the network
bus can not be repeated and their baud rates should be consistent.

 Online scan

The online scan consists of two parts: scanning online network nodes and scanning I/O modules of AS01DNET (RTU).
Before the scan, make sure that the communication channel selected is proper and the communication setup is normal in
the communication manager COMMGR.

 Configuration setting
The configuration setting includes the master configuration and AS01DNET (RTU) configuration settings. The master
configuration contains the master scanner module setting (configuration of master) and the scan list configuration setting.
AS01DNET (RTU) configuration contains AS01DNET (RTU) setting and other I/O modules setting.

 Configuration Download
Configuration download consists of master configuration download and AS01DNET (RTU) configuration download. During
the master configuration download, the seven-segment displayer of AS01DNET (RTU) shows 80 and its node ID alternately.
During the AS01DNET (RTU) configuration download, the seven-segment displayer of AS01DNET (RTU) shows 83 and
its node ID alternately.

 Monitor and Check

After the configuration is downloaded, check if AS01DNET (RTU) works normally. If AS01DNET (RTU) works normally, the
digital displayers of the master and AS01DNET (RTU) show their own node IDs and MS and NS indicators are ON in green. 10

10-81
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

10.5.5 Application Example

This section describes how to configure AS01DNET (RTU) and its right-side I/O module parameters in the DeviceNet
Builder software through an application example. And how the parameters of the I/O modules connected to the right side
of AS01DNET (RTU) are controlled and accessed through AS01DNET master is illustrated as well.

Control Requirement:

1. Connect the output point of AS16AP to the input point; turn on the output point to make the input point ON.

2. Write one value for channel 1 of AS04DA to change into analog signal and then convert the analog signal to
digital signal to output via AS04AD.

10.5.5.1. Network Structure

AS01DNET-A
Master

POWER 01DNET
DeviceNet RUN
ERROR
MS

BAT. LOW NS

Network Configuration Tool COM1

COM2 40
AS324MT IN 0
x1 0

IN 1 N o d e A d d re ss

0 8 x1 0
1 9
2 10

IN
3
4
11 AS01DNET
5
6
RTU Mode
7

0 8
1 9
Ethernet
2 10 01DNET 16AP 04DA 04AD
Ethernet OUT
3
4
11
2 1
MS

5 NS
6
IN OUT
7
R TU M ast er/ Sla ve 1
x1 0 S/S C0 VO1 VO2 V1+ V2+
IN 0
N o d e A d d re ss PWR P WR PWR
IN 1
C0 IO1 IO2 I1+ I2+
0
x1 0 IN
0 0 0 AG AG E RR VI1 VI2- ERR
1 D A A D
1 1 2 SLD SLD V3+ V4+
3
2 2 4 VO3 VO4 I3+ I4+
5 VI4-
3 3 6 IO3 IO4 VI3
DeviceNet 4 4 7
OUT
AG AG SLD SLD

5 5 0 SLD SLD
1
6 6 2 24V AG 24 V
3
7 7 4 0V 0V
5
6
7
R TU M ast er/ Sla ve

Note:

1. During the wiring, connect the voltage output of channel 1 of AS04DA to the voltage input of channel 1 of
AS04AD. And add the 24 V power to AS04DA and AS04AD respectively.

2. Make sure that the baud rates of AS01DNET and AS01DNET (RTU) match.

Module Node ID Baud rate

AS01DNET 0 500Kbps
AS01DNET(RTU) 2 500Kbps

3. Connect the 24V network power module between V+ and V- and a terminal resistor of 121Ω between CAN_H
and CAN_L.

10.5.5.2. Using DeviceNet Builder to Configure the Network

10.5.5.2.1. Building and Starting up Driver1 via COMMGR

Build driver1 in the COMMGR software.

Refer to Section 2.4 Communication Setting in ISPSoft help file.

10

10-82
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

10.5.5.2.2. Configuring AS01DNET (RTU)

1. Call DeviceNet Builder via ISPSoft.

Refer to section 10.6 for details on the operation.

2. The called DeviceNet Builder is started as below.

10

10-83
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

3. Click menu Network>> Online.

The AS01DNET-A master module which has been scanned is shown in the left-side Project List.

10

10-84
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

4. Click menu Network >> Scan DeviceNet Network.

5. The RTU slave in the DeviceNet network is scanned as follows.

10

10-85
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

6. Double click AS01DNET (RTU). Then the Node Configuration… dialog box appears. Click the IO Configure…
button to make the AS01RTU-DNET interface appear, where to configure the modules connected to AS01DNET
(RTU).

10

10-86
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

7. Click the Scan button to scan the I/O modules connected to the right side of AS01DNET (RTU).

10

10-87
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

8. After the module is scanned, configure module parameters. Double click AS04DA module and select “-10V~+10V”
for channel 1 mode setting. Click the OK button to finish the setting. Use the same setting way for channel 1 mode
setting of AS04AD and set it to “-10V~+10V” as well.

9. After the configuration of modules is finished, click the Download button to download the configuration of I/O
modules connected to the right side of AS01DNET (RTU) to AS01DNET (RTU).

10

10-88
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

10. After the download, click the OK button to go back to the main page of the software. Double click AS01DNETScanner
icon and then move the slave in Available Nodes to Scan List on the Scanner Module Configuration dialog box.
Click the OK button to finish the setting.

10

10-89
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

11. Click menu Network >> Download to download AS01DNET (RTU) configuration to the master.

The input mapping address D26005~D26018 and output mapping address D26105~D26114 are for AS01DNET
(RTU). The start input address D26005 and start output address D26105 are respectively used as the status word
and control word of AS01DNET (RTU). The parameter mappings of all modules connected to AS01DNET (RTU) are
displayed below.

I/O Module Input Output

AS16AP D26006 D26106-
Status D26007~D26008
Channel 1 output value D26107~D26108
AS04DA Channel 2 output value - D26109~D26110
Channel 3 output value - D26111~D26112
Channel 4 output value - D26113~D26114
Status D2609~D26010
Channel 1 input value D26011~D26012
AS04AD Channel 2 input value D26013~D26014
Channel 3 input value D26015~D26016
Channel 4 input value D26017~D26018

10

10-90
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

10.5.5.3. Using LD Program to Control the Entire Network

Program Explanation:

1. In network 1, write a value for the output of AS16AP and for the output of channel 1 of AS04DA when M0 changes
to ON.

2. In network 2, move the input value of AS16AP to D0 and the input value of channel 1 of AS04AD to D1 when M1
changes to ON.

10.5.6 Error Diagnosis and Trouble Shooting

AS01DNET (RTU) provides four diagnosis methods such as LED indicator, seven-segment displayer, status word
diagnosis and software diagnosis.

10

10-91
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

10.5.6.1. Indicator Diagnosis

 NS indicator

LED status Indication How to deal with

No power supply; 1. Check the power supply for AS01DNET (RTU) and the
Or the repeated node ID connection are normal.
OFF
detection has not been 2. Make sure that the baud rates of AS01DNET (RTU) and
completed. the master match.
Green light
blinking No connection between
Configure AS01DNET (RTU) in the DeviceNet software and
(ON:0.5s and AS01DNET (RTU) and its right-
download the configuration correctly.
OFF: 0.5s side modules
alternately)
Normal I/O data transmission
Green light
between AS01DNET (RTU) and No correction needed
ON
DeviceNet master
Red light
blinking I/O connection timeout between
Refer to the error shooting in Codes in Seven-Segment
(ON:0.5s and AS01DNET (RTU) and DeviceNet
Displayer below.
OFF: 0.5s master
alternately)

1. Ensure that the IDs of all nodes are unique on the bus.
Network trouble; 2. Check if the network installation is normal.
Repeated node ID; 3. Check if the baud rate of AS01DNET (RTU) is the same
Red light ON
No network power; as that of the bus.
Or BUS-OFF. 4. Check if the node ID of AS01DNET (RTU) is valid.
5. Check if the network power supply is normal.

 MS indicator

LED status Indication How to deal with

Check if the power supply for AS01DNET (RTU) and

OFF No power
connection are normal.
1. AS01DNET (RTU) is waiting for
the I/O data from DeviceNet
Green light master.
blinking 2. No I/O data transmission 1. Configure AS01DNET (RTU) in the DeviceNet software
(ON:0.5s and between AS01DNET(RTU) and and download the configuration correctly.
OFF: 0.5s DeviceNet master 2. Switch the PLC to RUN state
alternately) 3. The PLC connected to
DeviceNet master is in STOP
state.
Normal transmission of I/O data
Green light
between AS01DNET (RTU) and No correction needed
10 ON
DeviceNet master

10-92
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

LED status Indication How to deal with

Red light
1. Check if the network power supply is normal;
blinking No network power supply;
2. Reset the internal parameters in AS01DNET (RTU);
(ON:0.5s and Configuration error;
3. Check if there is an error or alarm in the I/O modules
OFF: 0.5s Module alarms.
connected to the right side of AS01DNET (RTU).
alternately)
Return the product to factory for repair if the error still exists
Red light ON Hardware error
after re-power on.

10.5.6.2. Codes in Seven-Segment Displayer

Code Indication How to deal with

Node ID of the scanner module
0~63 No correction needed
(When in RUN state)
1. Ensure that the node ID of AS01DNET (RTU) is unique in
The node ID is repeated or
F0 the DeviceNet network within the range of 0~63.
exceeds allowed range.
2. Repower it on after changing the node ID.

No I/O module is configured to Add I/O modules in AS01DNET (RTU) in the DeviceNet
F1 AS01DNET (RTU) in the Builder software and download the configuration data to
DeviceNet Builder software. AS01DNET (RTU) after the configuration is finished.

The work voltage of AS01DNET Check if the power supply for AS01DNET (RTU) works
F2
(RTU) is too low. normally.
AS01DNET (RTU) enters the
F3 Repower AS01DNET (RTU).
test mode.
1. Check if the network communication cable is normal and
the shielded cable is grounded.
AS01DNET (RTU) is the Bus- 2. Ensure the baud rates of all network nodes are same.
F4
Off state. 3. Check if the two ends of the network are both connected
with a 120Ω terminal resistor.
4. Repower the scanner module.

1. Check if the network cable is normal.

No network power supply for 2. Check if the network power supply is normal. (The external
F5
AS01DNET(RTU) 24V DC network power supply is connected between red
V+ and black V- of AS01DNET (RTU) .)

Internal error;
Return the product to factory for repair if the error still exists
F6 An error in the internal storage
after re-power on.
units of AS01DNET (RTU)

Internal error;
Return the product to factory for repair if the error still exists
F7 An error in the data exchange
after re-power on.
units of AS01DNET (RTU)

Return the product to factory for repair if the error still exists
F8 Manufacture error
after re-power on.

10

10-93
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

Code Indication How to deal with

Internal error;
Return the product to factory for repair if the error still exists
F9 An error in the access of the
after re-power on.
Flash of AS01DNET (RTU)

Check if an error occurs in the modules connected to the

right side of AS01DNET (RTU);
Check if the module exists;
E4 Module error
Check if current module matches that configured in the
software;
Check if the unconfigured module is added.
If the code has emerged for a long time, please shoot troubles
in the methods below.
1. Ensure that there are at least two nodes working normally
in the network.
2. Check if the two ends of the network are both connected
with a 121Ω terminal resistor.
3. Ensure that the baud rates of all network nodes are same.
Repeated node ID detection 4. Check if the network cable has a problem such as being
E7
disconnected and loosened.
5. Check if the bus communication cable length exceeds
maximum transmission distance. If the maximum
transmission distance is exceeded, the stability of the
system can not be ensured.
6. Check if the shielded wire of the network communication
cable is grounded.
7. Turn on the power of AS01DNET (RTU) again.
The number of I/O modules
Check if the number of I/O modules connected to AS01DNET
E9 connected to AS01DNET (RTU)
(RTU) is more than 8.
exceeds the maximum 8.
1. Check if the RUN/STOP switch of the PLC connected to
AS01DNET (RTU) is in STOP the DeviceNet master is turned to RUN.
80
state. 2. Check if the value of control word of AS01DNET (RTU) is
1. For details, refer to section 10.5.4.3.4.
The AS01DNET (RTU)
Wait until the download of AS01DNET (RTU) configuration
83 configuration in the software is
data is completed.
being downloading.

When multiple errors exist, the seven-segment displayer of AS01DNET (RTU) will display error codes cyclically. For
example, the error codes: E4 03 80 02 are displayed cyclically. See the detailed meaning as below.
E4 03 80 02

1.
2.
3.
4.

 E4 indicates a module error or offline. For details, see the explanation of codes above.

10  03 indicates the position of the module where an error occurs. The position of the first module connected to the right
side of AS01DNET (RTU) is 1 and that of the second module is 2. Maximum 8 I/O modules are connectable to
AS01DNET (RTU) within the range of 1~8.

10-94
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

 80 means AS01DNET (RTU) is in STOP state.

 02 is the node ID: 2 of AS01DNET (RTU).

10.5.6.3. Status Word Diagnosis

The status word of AS01DNET (RTU) shows the operation states of special modules and digital I/O modules. See the
following table for status word diagnosis and disposal.

Status
Bit Description Disposal
value
0 AS01DNET (RTU) is in RUN state No correction needed
bit0
1 AS01DNET (RTU) is in STOP state. Restart AS01DNET(RTU)
Valid configuration data in
0 No correction needed
AS01DNET(RTU)
bit1 Re-download the configuration data to
Invalid configuration data in AS01DNET
1 AS01DNET (RTU) by using the DeviceNet
(RTU)
Builder software.
bit2 Reserved —— ——
bit3 Reserved —— ——
Currently connected module matches the
0 No correction needed
configuration in the software.
1. Check if currently connected module is
consistent with the configuration in the
bit4 Currently connected module is software.
1 inconsistent with the configuration in the 2. Change current module to match the
software. configuration in the software or change the
configuration in the software to match
currently connected module.
0 AS01DNET(RTU) in normal operation No correction needed
bit5 Check if the power supply for AS01DNET (RTU)
1 AS01DNET(RTU) in low voltage
is normal.
bit6 Reserved —— ——
0 AS01DNET(RTU) in normal operation No correction needed
bit7
Reserved —— ——
bit8 Reserved —— ——
bit9 Reserved —— ——
bit10 Reserved —— ——
bit11 Reserved —— ——
bit12 Reserved —— ——
bit13 Reserved —— ——
bit14 Reserved —— ——
bit15 Reserved —— ——

10

10-95
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

10.5.6.4. Software Diagnosis

Click the Start Monitor button on the AS01DNET (RTU) interface. The Error code column will show relevant contents as
follows.

Error No. Explanation Solution

AS01DNET (RTU) can not 1. Check if the module is disconnected.
0x8001
detect the configured module. 2. Check if the module is damaged.
Current module is not
Ensure that the actually connected module is the same as
0x8002 consistent with the configured
that configured in the software.
module.

Note: For details on more error codes, refer to the explanation of Error ID in AS-series product manual.

Remark:

10  The software diagnosis function can not be enabled until the DeviceNet Builder software is online.

10-96
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

10.6 How to Call DeviceNet Builder through ISPSoft (AS-

Series PLC)

 Network structure

Connect the devices according to the following figure. PC accesses AS-series PLC through Ethernet.

10

10-97
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

 Operation of Software

1. Open the ISPSoft software and then select menu File>> New>> New. In the following dialog box which appears,
select corresponding PLC type AS marked in the red box below.

Note: The PLC type used in this section is AS332T-A.

10

10-98
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

2. Click the OK button. Then the main interface of the ISPSoft software appears as below.

3. Set up COMMGR communication. For details on setup, refer to section 8.1.2 Overview of Communication Setting in
COMMGR.

10

10-99
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

4. After the setup of COMMGR communication is finished, select menu Tools>> Communication settings…

5. The following dialog box appears. Select one desired driver which has been created and then click the OK button.

10

10-100
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

6. Double click HWCONFIG marked in the red box below.

7. Select menu Option>> I/O Scan in the following window which pops up. Then the AS01DNET-5A icon will show
up.

10

10-101
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

8. Select menu Option>> Download in the HWCONFIG window. Then the following dialog box appears. Select the
checkbox of Download All Items or select the checkboxes of the items which are needed for download.
Afterwards, click the OK button.

9. Then the following two dialog boxes of HWCONFIG and PC=>AS appear. Click Yes to perform the PC=>AS status.

10. When the download is finished, the progress bar is shown as below.

10

10-102
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

Meanwhile the following dialog box pops out. Click the Yes button.

11. The following dialog box appears to show that the download has been finished.

12. Return to the HWCONFIG window and right-click AS01DNET module to make the drop-down menu pop out. Select
Communication Software >> DeviceNet Builder from the menu.

10

10-103
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

13. The following dialog box pops out. Click the Yes button there.

14. The DeviceNet Builder software is opened as below, which means the DeviceNet Builder software has been
opened through the ISPSoft software.

10

10-104
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

15. Click menu Network>> Online.

16. The master module AS01DNET-A has been scanned as below.

10

10-105
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

17. Right-click the master module AS01DNET-A under the left-side Project List. Then a drop-down list pops up. Click
the option Scan DeviceNet Network from the list.

18. The following progress bar appears then.

10

10-106
 Ch ap te r 10 De viceNe t M as ter Sca nner Mo du le AS01DN ET-A

19. The master and slave which have been scanned both show up in the network.

10

10-107
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

MEMO

10

10-108
 11
Chapter 11 Positioning Module AS02/04

Table of Contents
11.1 Overview ................................................................................................ 11-2
11.1.1. Characteristics ...................................................................................11-2

11.2 Specifications and Functions ................................................................ 11-3

11.2.1. Specifications .....................................................................................11-3
11.2.2. Profile ................................................................................................11-5
11.2.3. Arrangement of Terminals...................................................................11-6
11.2.4. Special Designed Instrucitons .............................................................11-8
11.2.5. Wiring ................................................................................................11-9

11.3 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft......................................................................... 11-12

11.3.1. Initial Setting ...................................................................................11-12
11.3.2. Checking the Version of a Module .....................................................11-15
11.3.3. Online Mode .....................................................................................11-16
11.3.4. Importing/Exporting a Parameter File ...............................................11-17
11.3.5. Parameters ......................................................................................11-18
11.3.6. Normal Exchange Area .....................................................................11-20

11.4 Troubleshooting .................................................................................. 11-21

11.4.1. Error Codes ......................................................................................11-21
11.4.2. Troubleshooting Procedure................................................................11-21
11.4.3. State Codes (Axis 1 - 4) ...................................................................11-21

11 - 1
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

11.1 Overview
This chapter describes the specifications for the positioning module, its operation, and its programming. On

the analog input/output module, four channels receive analog signals (voltage or current), and converts those
_11
signals into 16-bit digital signals. In addition, the analog input/output module receives two blocks of 16-bit

digital data from a CPU module, and converts the digital data into analog signals (voltage or current). The

analog input/output module sends the analog signals by two channels

11.1.1. Characteristics
(1) Use the AS02/04 PU-A module, based on its practical application.

AS02PU-A: 2-axis differential output, 1 encoder

AS04PU-A: 4-axis NPN transistor (sinking) output

(2) High-speed input/output

AS02PU-A: high speed output frequency at 200 k Hz (A/B/Z phase) and 2-axis 200 k HZ differential

output

AS04PU: 4-axis NPN transistor (sinking) output at 100 k Hz

(3) Input/output

AS02PU-A: 5 direct current input points (sinking or souring)

AS04PU-A: 6 direct current input points (sinking or souring)

(4) Use the utility software to configure the module.

The HWCONFIG utility software is built into ISPSoft. You can set modes and parameters directly in

HWCONFIG without spending time writing programs to set registers to manage functions.

(5) Specially designed instructions for the module

You can use specially designed instructions to control the modules without spending too much time to

figure out how to achieve the required applications.

11 - 2
 Ch ap te r 11 Pos i tion in g Mo du le AS02 /0 4 PU

11.2 Specifications and Functions

11.2.1. Specifications
 Electrical specifications for the inputs
11
Module Name AS02PU-A AS04PU-A

Input High speed Standard Standard

3 5
Number of Input Points 6
(A+/A-, B+/B-, Z+/Z-) (X0.0-X0.4)

Connector Type Removable terminal block

Direct current

(sinking or sourcing)

Sinking: The inputs are

NPN transistors whose

Direct current collectors are open

Input Form Differential input
(sinking or sourcing) collectors.

Sourcing: The inputs are

PNP transistors whose

collectors are open

collectors.

Input Current 5-24 VDC, 5 mA 24 VDC, 5 mA 24 VDC, 5 mA

OFF→ON >3VDC >15VDC >15VDC

Action Level
ON→OFF <1.5VDC <5VDC <5VDC

Response time <2.5us <0.5ms <0.5ms

200 k Hz
Maximum input frequency 10 k Hz 10 k Hz
(A+/A-, B+/B-, Z+/Z-)

Input impedance 4.7kΩ

Electrical isolation Optocoupler

Input display When the optocoupler is driven, the input LED indicator is ON.

Weight 120 g

11 - 3
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

 Electrical specifications for the outputs

Model
AS02PU-A AS04PU-A
Item
_11
Number of outputs Four (2-axis) Eight (4-axis)

Connector type Removable terminal blocks

Output form differential output Transistor-T (sinking) (NPN)

Output current 5 VDC*1 5-30 VDC

Resistance 10 mA 0.1A
Maximum
Inductance N/A
load
Bulb N/A

Maximum Resistance 200 kHz 100 kHz

output Inductance N/A

frequency*1 Bulb N/A

Maximum OFF→ON 2.5 μs 5 μs

Response

time ON→OFF 2.5 μs 5 μs

Weight 120 g

*1: Acutal output: 4 VDC (high input impedance) to 3.3 VDC (10mA)/output

11 - 4
 Ch ap te r 11 Pos i tion in g Mo du le AS02 /0 4 PU

11.2.2. Profile
38.2 95

11
1
7
7

98 .3
88
2 3
8

4
9 5
6 75
35

Unit: mm

Number Name Description

1 Model name Model name of the module

Indicates the status of the power supply

POWER LED indicator
ON: the power is on
(Blue)
OFF: no power

Operating status of the module

Run LED indicator
ON: the module is running and ready to accept instructions.
(Green)
OFF: the module is stopped and can NOT accept instrucitons.

Error status of the module

2
Error LED indicator OFF: the module is normal.
(Red) Blinking (0.2 seconds ON/OFF): hardware error occurs in the

module, can NOT operate normally

Input LED indicator ON: Receives an input signal

(Red) OFF: Receives no input signal

Output LED indicator ON: Receives an output signal

(Red) OFF: Receives no output signal

Removable terminal The inputs are connected to sensors.

3
block The outputs are connected to loads to be driven.

Arrangement of the
4 Arrangement of the terminals
input/output terminals

5 Terminal block clip Removal of the terminal block

6 DIN rail clip Secures the module onto the DIN rail

11 - 5
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

Number Name Description

7 Module connecting set Connects the modules

8 Ground clip On the DIN reail for grounding

_11
9 Label Nameplate

11.2.3. Arrangement of Terminals

AS02PU-A AS04PU-A

02PU
04PU

IN IN
IN OUT
A+ A-
C0
B+ B- PWR

0 PWR
Z+ Z- RUN
ERR 0 1 RUN
0 A ERR
B 1 2 0
1 2 Z 1
0 2 3 2
3 4 IN
IN 1 3
OUT OUT 3 C1
2
0+ 0- 4
5
3 4 4
1+ 1-
4 0
5 5
2+ 2- 1
●
6 2
3+ 3- 0 3
1 OUT
●
7 4
OUT
2 5
3 6
7

11 - 6
 Ch ap te r 11 Pos i tion in g Mo du le AS02 /0 4 PU

AS02PU-A AS04PU-A

Wordings with the same indications that are used Wordings with the same indications that are used

on the terminal block and manual on the terminal block and manual

Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal

11
Manual Block Manual Block Manual Block Manual Block

(left) (right) (left) (right)

A+ A+ A- A- S/S S/S C0 C0

B+ B+ B- B- S/S S/S Y0.0 0

Z+ Z+ Z- Z- X0.0 0 Y0.1 1

S/S S/S X0.0 0 X0.1 1 Y0.2 2

X0.1 1 X0.2 2 X0.2 2 Y0.3 3

X0.3 3 X0.4 4 X0.3 3 C1 C1

Y0.0+ 0+ Y0.0- 0- X0.4 4 Y0.4 4

Y0.1+ 1+ Y0.1- 1- X0.5 5 Y0.5 5

Y0.2+ 2+ Y0.2- 2-  Y0.6 6

Y0.3+ 3+ Y0.3- 3-  Y0.7 7

11 - 7
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

11.2.4. Special Designed Instrucitons

Special designed instructions for the positioning modules are listed below:

Instruction code Pulse

_11 API Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

Reading data from the control register in an extension

1400 FROM DFROM 
module

1401 TO DTO  Writing data into the control register in an extension module

1402 PUCONF DPUCONF  Setting output control parameters of PU module

1403 PUSTAT – – Reading PU module output state
1404 – DPUPLS – PU module pulse output (no acceleration)
Relative position output of PU module (with acceleration and
1405 – DPUDRI –
deceleration)
Absolute addressing output of PU module
1406 – DPUDRA –
(with acceleration and deceleration)
1407 – DPUZRN – PU module homing
1408 – DPUJOG – PU module jog output
1409 – DPUMPG – PU module MPG output
1410 – DPUCNT – High-speed counter function of PU module
Note: Refer to section 6.15 in AS Series Programming Manual for more information on the instrucions listed

above.

11 - 8
 Ch ap te r 11 Pos i tion in g Mo du le AS02 /0 4 PU

11.2.5. Wiring
 Precautions

To ensure the positioning module functions well and reliably, the external wiring must prevent noise.
11
Before you install the cables, follow the precautions below.

(1) To prevent a surge and induction, the AC cable and the input signal cables that are connected to the

AS02/04PU-A must be separate cables.

(2) Do not install the cable near a main circuit, a high-voltage cable, or a cable connected to a load that

is not a PLC. In addition, the cable must not be bound to a main circuit, a high-voltage cable, or a

cable connected to a load which is not a PLC.

(3) Ground shielded cables and hermetically sealed cables separately.

(4) Terminals with insulation sleeves cannot be arranged as a terminal block, so you should cover the

terminals with insulation tubes.

(5) Use single-core cables or twin-core cables with a diameter of 24–22 AWG and with pin-type

connectors smaller than 1 mm. The plastic jackets that are removed from the cables should be 8

mm to 10 mm long. Only use copper conducting wires which can withstand temperatures of 60° C

/75° C or higher.

< 1m m 8-10m m 24-22AWG

(6) Note: use cables with the same length (less than 200 m) and use wire resistance of less than 100

ohm.

(7) Notes on two-wire, three-wire, and four-wire connections:

 Two-wire connection/three-wire connection (passive transducer): connect the transducer and

the analog input module to the same power circuit.

 Four-wire connection (active transducer): the transducer uses an independent power supply, so

do not connect it to the same power circuit as the analog input module.

11 - 9
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

 External wiring

(1) AS02PU-A

_11 X0.4

Delta s ervo d rive

X0.3 *7 ASDA - A2 Series
Y0.0+ PLS 43
X0.2 Y0.0- /PLS 41
Y0.1+ SIGN 36

X0.1 Y0.1- /SIGN 37

X0.0

*1 S /S Delta s ervo d rive

+ 24V
*7 ASDA - A2 Series
*2
MPG *3 Y0.2+ P LS 43
Shi el ded
c able Y0.2- /PLS 41
A+
Y0.3+ SIGN36
Phase
A A- Y0.3- /SIGN37
B+
Phase
B B-
Z+
Phase
Z
Z-

5 ~2 4V *4
A+
R* 6
A-
B+
R*6
B-
Z+
R*6
Z-

*5
A+
R* 6
A-
B+
R* 6
B-
Z+
R* 6
Z-
5 ~2 4V

*1. Sinking

*2. Souring

*3. Differential input

*4. Open collector sinking

*5. Open collector sourcing

*6. Open collector sinking/sourcing to conncet to phase A/B/Z and if the input frequenct is higher than 100

kHz, add a 3W/470 ohm resistor between + the positive end and – the negative end.

*7. Refer to API1402 in AS Series Programming Manual and Delta Servo Drive Manual for more

information on the output mode.

11 - 1 0
 Ch ap te r 11 Pos i tion in g Mo du le AS02 /0 4 PU

(2) AS04PU-A

D elta s erv o dri ve ASD A - A2 s eri es

24V
*1
11
VD D 17

9 1kΩ
PU L L_ HI_ P 339 Ma x.
2 00Kpps
PUL SE 43
X0.5 51Ω
Y0.0 /PU L SE 41
51Ω
C0 COM- 45
X0.4 0V
*3
Delta s erv o driv e ASD A -A2 s eries
X0.3
2 4V
*1 V DD 17

X0.2 5 1 kΩ
PU LL _ HI_ S 339 Max.
200 Kp ps
SIGN 36
51Ω
X0.1 Y0.1 /S IGN 37
51Ω
C0 C OM- 45

*3 0V
X0.0

5~30VD C, 0.1A
*4 Y0.4
S/S *2
+24V C1
*5 *3

*1. VDD and COM are seen as a group and its power is provided by Delta servo drive.

*2. It is a load or an input point.

*3. Use the same power supply for the same COM group.

*4. Sinking

*5. Sourcing

11 - 11
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

11.3 HWCONFIG in ISPSoft

11.3.1. Initial Setting

_11 (1) Start ISPSoft and double-click HWCONFIG.

(2) Select a module and drag it to the working area.

11 - 1 2
 Ch ap te r 11 Pos i tion in g Mo du le AS02 /0 4 PU

(3) Double-click the module in the working area to open the Device Setting page.

11

11 - 1 3
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

(4) Choose the parameter, set the values, and click OK.

_11

(5) Click Download on the toolbar to download the parameters. Note that you cannot download the
parameters while the CPU module is running.

11 - 1 4
 Ch ap te r 11 Pos i tion in g Mo du le AS02 /0 4 PU

11.3.2. Checking the Version of a Module

(1) On the Option menu, click Online Mode.

11

(2) Double-click the module to open the Device Setting page. The versions of both the firmware and the

hardware are displayed.

11 - 1 5
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

11.3.3. Online Mode

(1) On the Option menu, click Online Mode.

_11

(2) Right-click the module and click Module Status.

(3) View the module status.

11 - 1 6
 Ch ap te r 11 Pos i tion in g Mo du le AS02 /0 4 PU

11.3.4. Importing/Exporting a Parameter File

(1) Click Export in the Device Settings dialog box to save the current parameters as a CSV file (.csv).

11

(2) Click Import in the Device Settings dialog box and select a CSV file to import saved parameters.

11 - 1 7
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

11.3.5. Parameters
 The input point settings

You can set values in the input points as the triggering conditions (phase Z, DOG, LSN, LSP) for the
_11 axis1 and axis 2 to position. Rising-edge and falling-edge can also be specified in the triggering

conditions.

 Filter time settings

The default setting is 10 ms; the system filters out distortion and noises in a pulse width modulated
transmission that is below 10 ms.

11 - 1 8
 Ch ap te r 11 Pos i tion in g Mo du le AS02 /0 4 PU

 The output point settings

You can set values in the output points (single pulse output, pulse + direction, CW+CCW, A phase + B

phase). Refer to API1402 in AS Series Programming Manual for more information on output modes.

11

 Axis settings

You can set up the axis in HWCONFIG or through positioning instructions. Use API1402 to set up the

followings starting speed, accelation time, deceleration time, max. speed, seeking the set number of Z phase

after homing, output the offset position after homing. Use API1407 to setup homing mode. Refer to API1402 –
1410 in AS Series Programming Manual for more information on the settings of axis.

11 - 1 9
 AS Ser ies M od ul e Man ua l

11.3.6. Normal Exchange Area

For data exchange among the CPU module and the modules, the system assign special devices for specified

parameters.
_11
 AS02PU-A

 AS04PU-A

11 - 2 0
 Ch ap te r 11 Pos i tion in g Mo du le AS02 /0 4 PU

11.4 Troubleshooting
11.4.1. Error Codes

Error
Description
A↔ D LED ERROR LED 11
Code indicator indicator

16#1802 Hardware failure OFF Blinking

11.4.2. Troubleshooting Procedure

Description Procedure

Hardware failure Return the module to the factory for repair.

11.4.3. State Codes (Axis 1 - 4)

State Code Axis Axis

Description
Byte # 1-2 3-4

0 Error flag

1 The output is active.

2 The output has stopped working.

3 The instruction execution is complete.

Axis 1 Axis 3
4 Pulse in positive direction not allowed

5 Pulse in negative direction not allowed

6 Current position value overflow

7 Pulse direction (positive or negative)

8 Error flag

9 The output is active.

10 The output has stopped working.

11 The instruction execution is complete.

Axis 2 Axis 4
12 Pulse in positive direction not allowed

13 Pulse in negative direction not allowed

14 Current position value overflow

15 Pulse direction (positive or negative)

11 - 2 1